HomeMy WebLinkAboutOrdinance 1389 LL BUILDING CODE
OF THE
CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS
ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL
FEBRUARY 28, 1928
�1
as
PRICE, CLOTH BINDING — — $1.00
PAPER BINDING — — .50
STAFFORD—LOWDON CO., PRINTERS
FORT WORTH, TEXAS
1928
MAYOR
Wm. BRYCE
CITY MANAGER
O. E. CARR
rr
CITY COUNCIL
WILLARD BURTON i
T. B. HOFFER
A. E. THOMAS
E. T. RENFRO
WM. MONNIG
W. E. AUSTIN
VAN ZANDT JARVIS
JOHN M. SPARKS
BUILDING CODE COMMITTEE
M. R. SANGUINET THOS. S. BYRNE
W. G. CLARKSON
Assisted P. M. GEREN
OUTLINE OF CHAPTERS
Preface. Title and Scope.
Chapter 1. Administration:
Section 1- 1. General Provisions.
Section 1- 2. Organization.
Section 1- 3. Duties of Building Commissioner.
Section 1- 4. Authority of Building Commissioner.
Section 1- 5. Plans, Specifications, Permits, Fees and
Bonds.
Chapter 2. Definitions.
Chapter 3. Classifications:
4 Section 3- 1. Classification by Construction.
Section 3- 2. Classification by Occupancy.
Chapter 4. Fire Zones:
Section 4- 1. Zone One.
Section 4- 2. Zone Two.
Section 4- 3. Zone Three.
Chapter 5. General Building Restrictions.
Chapter 6. Special Restrictions:
Section 6- 1. Height of Buildings According to Classi-
fication by Construction.
Section 6- 2. Restrictions as to Construction Required
for Buildings According to Occupancy.
Section 6- 3. Restrictions as to Floor Areas According
to Class of Construction and Type of
Occupancy.
Section 6- 4. Lot Line Restrictions.
Section 6- 5. Building Line Restrictions.
Chapter 7. Enclosures of Stairs, Elevator Shafts, etc.:
Section 7- 1. Enclosures Required.
Section 7- 2.. Construction of Enclosures Where Re-
quired.
Chapter 8. Stairways, Exits, Corridors and Fire Escapes:
Section 8- 1. Stairways in General.
Section 8- 2. Stairways in Stores, Factories, Work
Shops, Warehouses, Lofts, Office
Buildings, Industrial Buildings,
Garages, Stables, etc., over two
stories in height.
4 BUILDING CODE
Section 8- 3. Stairways in Flats and Apartment
Houses.
Section 8- 4. Stairways in Hotels, Dormitories, Hos-
pitals and Buildings Where Sleeping
Accommodations are Provided for
More Than 20 Persons.
Section 8- 5. Stairways in Public Halls, Churches,
Club and Lodge Halls, and All Build-
ings Used for Public or Private
Gatherings.
Section & 6. Stairways in Theatres.
Section 8- 7. Stairways in School Buildings.
Section 8- 8. Exit Doors, Corridors and Means of
Egress.
Section 8- 9. Fire Escapes.
Chapter 9. Chimneys, Flues, Stacks and Fireplaces:
Section 9- 1. Chimney Construction.
Chapter 10. Roof, Roof Structures, Roof Covering and Sheet Metal:
Section 10- 1. Roof Coverings.
Section 10- 2. Roof Structures.
Section 10- 3. Sheet Metal. `
Section 10- 4. Sky Lights.
Chapter 11. Fire Protection:
Section 11- 1. Fireproofing Structural Members.
Section 11- 2. Metal Lath and Plaster Used as Fire
Protection.
Section 11- 3. Fire Doors and Windows.
Section 11- 4. Fire _Stopping.
Ohapter 12. Electric Signs, Sign Boards and Bill Boards:
Section 12- 1. General Provisions.
Section 12- 2. Electric Signs.
Section 12- 3. Sign Boards and Bill Boards on Build-
ings.
Section 12- 4. Sign Boards and Bill Boards on the
Ground.
41hapter 13. Loads, Materials and Stresses:
Section 13- 1. Loads.
Section 13- 2. Quality of -Materials.
Section 13- 3. Allowable Working Stresses.
Chapter 14. Masonry Construction:
Section 14- 1. Solid Brick Walls.
Section 14- 2. Walls of Hollow Tile, Concrete Block
or Tile and Hollow Walls of Brick.
Section 14- 3. Walls of Plain Concrete.
Section 14- 4. Stone Walls.
Section 14- 5. Veneered Walls.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 5
Section 14- 6. Faced Walls.
Section 14- 7. Fire Walls, Division Walls and Par-
titions.
Section 14- 8. Foundation Walls.
Section 14- 9. Skeleton Construction.
Section 14-10. New Types of Masonry Construction.
Section 14-11. Miscellaneous Requirements.
Chapter 15. Steel Construction:
Section IS- 1. Material.
Section 15- 2. Loading.
Section 15- 3. Allowable Stresses.
Section .15 -4. Symmetrical Members.
Section 15- 5. Beams and Girders.
Section 15- 6. Column Bases.
Section 15- 7. Eccentric Loading.
Section 15- 8. Combined Stresses.
Section 15- 9. Abutting Joints.
Section 15-10. Net Sections.
Section 15-11. Rivets and Bolts.
Section 15-12. Rivet Spacing.
Section 15-13. Connections.
Section 15-14. Lattice.
Section 15-15. Expansion.
Section 15-16. Minimum Thickness.
Section 15-17. Adjustable Members.
Section 15-18. Workmanship.
Section 15-19. Painting.
Section 15-20. Erection.
Section 15-21. Inspection.
Section 15-22. Fire Escapes.
Section 15-23. Smoke Stacks.
Chapter 16. Cast Iron Construction:
Section 16- 1. General Requirements.
Chapter 17. Reinforced Concrete Construction:
Section 17- 1. General.
Section 17- 2. Quality of Material.
Section 17- 3. Design.
Section 17- 4. Flexural Computations and Moment
Coefficients.
Section 17- 5. Shear- and Diagonal Tension.
Section 177 6. Bond and Anchorage.
Section 17- 7. Flat Slabs.
Section'17- 8. Reinforced Concrete Columns.
Section 17- 9. Footings.
Section 17-10. Reinforced Concrete Chimneys.
Section 17-11. Protection of Reinforcing Steel.
Chapter 18. Mill Construction:
Section 18- 1. General Requirements.
M
Chapter 19. Wooden Construction:
Section 19- 1. Framing Requirements for Timber Con-
struction.
Section 19- 2. Spans for Floor and Roof Joists.
t
6 BUILDING CODE
Chapter 20. Excavations and Foundations:
Section 20- 1. Excavations.
Section 20- 2. Foundations.
a
Chapter 21. Fencing, Storage of Materials, Protection, etc.:
Section 21- 1. General Requirements.
Chapter 22. Bays, Balconies, Porches, Cornices, Sidewalks, Vaults and
' Other Projections:
Section 22- 1. General Conditions Covering Issuance
of Projection Permits.
Section 22- 2. Projections Above Sidewalk Grade.
Section 22- 3. Projections Below Sidewalk 'Grade.
Chapter 23. Lathing and Plastering:
Section 23- 1. Lathing.
Section 23- 2. Plastering.
Chapter 24. Awnings, Marquise, etc.:
Section 24- 1. Awnings.
Section 24- 2. Canopy or Marquise.
Chapter 25. Public Lavatories:
Section 25- 1. Floors and Ventilation.
Chapter 26. Pipes, Chases and Ducts.
Section 26- 1 Chases and Ducts for Pipes.
Section 26- 2. Chases and Recesses.
Chapter 27. Outside Stairs, Areas, Coal Holes, Sidewalks, etc.:
Section 27- 1. Outside Stairs.
Section 27- 2. Open Areas.
Section 27- 3. Openings in Sidewalks.
Section 27- 4. Reinforced Concrete Sidewalks.
Chapter 28. Reconstruction and Alteration of Buildings:
Section 28- 1. General Provisions.
Section 28- 2. Alteration of Frame Buildings.
Section 28- 3. Alteration or Repairs Other Than Frame
Construction.
Chapter 29. Unsafe Buildings:
Section 29- 1. General Provisions.
Chapter 30. Removal of Buildings:
Section 30- 1. General Provisions.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 7
Chapter 31. Wrecking of Buildings.
Section 31- 1. General Provisions.
_ Chapter 32. Special Structures:
Section 32- 1. Theatres Existing and New-
Part 1. General Requirements.
Part 2. New Theatres.
Part 3. Auditoriums.
Part 4. Proscenium Wall and Opening.
Part 5. Curtain.
Part 6. Stage Section.
Part 7. Stairways.
Part 8. Gallery.
Part 9. Heating Plant.
Section 32- 2. Moving Picture Theatres Existing and
New.
Section 32- 3. Assembly Halls.
Section 32- 4. Public Garages and Sales Rooms.
Section 32- 5. Private Garages.
Section 32- 6. Carbide.
Section 32- 7. Dry Cleaning Establishments.
Section 32- 8. Transformer Vaults.
Chapter 33. Storage of Inflammable Liquids:
Section 33- 1. General Provisions.
Section 33- 2. Fuel Oil, Storage, Tanks and Equipment.
Chapter 34. Fire Prevention:
Section 34- 1. Miscellaneous Provisions.
Section 34- 2. Standpipes.
Section 34- 3. Sprinkler Requirements.
Chapter 35. Heating:
Section 35- 1. General Conditions.
Chapter 36. Ventilating:
Section 36- 1. General Provisions.
Chapter 37. Elevators:
Section 37- 1. Construction and Operation of Elevators.
i
ORDINANCE 1389
AN ORDINANCE
GOVERNING AND REGULATING THE CON-
STRUCTION, ERECTION, RAISING AND
WRECKING, MAINTENANCE, ALTERATION,
REPAIRING, REMODELING, REBUILDING,
SECURING, MOVING AND SHORING AND
THE INSPECTION OF BUILDINGS A N D
STRUCTURES IN FORT WORTH AND PROVID-
ING FOR THEIR SAFETY; DEFINING THE
FIRE ZONES OF THE CITY OF FORT WORTH;
•� CREATING THE OFFICE OF BUILDING COM-
MISSIONER AND DEFINING THE DUTIES OF
SAID OFFICE; REGULATING THE INSTALLA-
TION AND USE OF HEATING APPARATUS,
BOILERS, AND MEANS OF VERTICAL
TRANSPORTATION; GOVERNING THE STOR-
AGE OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS, AND
PROVIDING A PENALTY FOR ANY VIOLA-
TION THEREOF, REPEALING ALL EXISTING
ORDINANCES IN CONFLICT HEREWITH,
AND DECLARING AN EMERGENCY.
WHEREAS, the public health, safety and
property is not adequately protected by the pro-
visions of existing ordinances relating to the con-
struction, erection and alteration of buildings and
structures in the City; and
WHEREAS, it is necessary for the immediate
preservation of the public health, safety and prop-
erty that further provisions be immediately en-
acted relating to the construction, erection and
alteration of buildings and structures in order
that all buildings and structures hereafter
erected, constructed or altered shall conform to
all reasonable requirements for the preservation
of the public health, safety and property, all of
which constitutes an emergency; Now, therefore,
BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL
OF THE CITY OF FORT WORTH.
Chapter 1.
ADMINISTRATION.
Section 1-1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
Paragraph 1-1-1. Title Cited.
The following provisions shall constitute the Building Code of the
City of Fort Worth, and may be cited as'such.
Paragraph 1-1-2. Intent and Purpose.
The intent and purpose of this code is to regulate the construction,
erection, enlargement, raising, alteration, repair, removal, maintenance,
use and height of buildings and structures; to regulate the character
and use of materials in and for buildings and structures; to regulate the
character and use of certain mechanical equipment in buildings; to
establish fire limits; and provide for emergencies.
Paragraph 1-1-3. Remedial Ordinance.
r This ordinance is hereby declared to be remedial and intended to
secure the beneficial interests and purposes thereof.
Paragraph 1-1-4. Conflicting Ordinances Repealed.
a All ordinances or parts thereof, insofar as they conflict with the
provisions herein contained, are hereby repealed. Should any section,
word or,sentence, or any part of this ordinance be held to be invalid, the
same shall not be construed to affect any other valid provision of same.
Paragraph 1-1-5. Buildings Affected by This Ordinance.
This ordinance shall apply to all buildings and structures hereafter
erected, constructed, altered, repaired, raised, added to or built upon,
within the boundaries of the City of Fort Worth, except buildings and
structures for which permits have been issued by the Building Depart-
ment prior to the passage of this ordinance. However, this ordinance
shall apply also to all buildings, both new and existing, in such par-
ticular requirements as are contained herein.
Section 1-2.
ORGANIZATION.
Paragraph 1-2-1. Office Created.
There is hereby created the office of Building Commissioner, and
such office is being charged with the duty of enforcing the provisions
of this code.
Paragraph 1-2-2. Qualifications.
The Building Commissioner must be a person competent to carry
out the intent and purpose of this code. Only an architect, structural
or civil engineer, experienced in building construction, a general con-
tractor, or a general superintendent of building construction, having not
less than ten (10) years' experience, shall be considered competent to
act as Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 1-2-3. Appointment of Building Commissioner and As-
sistants.
As soon as possible after the passing of this ordinance, the City
Manager, with the approval of the City Council of the City of
12 BUILDING CODE
Fort Worth, shall appoint a competent person to fill the office of Build-
ing Commissioner. This person shall hold the office of Building Com-
missioner during the pleasure of the City Manager, or until his suc-
cessor has been selected and qualified. The City Manager, advising
with the Building Commissioner, shall also secure sufficient and com-
petent assistants to aid the Building Commissioner in the performances
of his duties.
Paragraph 1-2-4. Salary and Bond.
The Building Commissioner shall receive a salary, to be determined
by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, which shall be
in full compensation for all services rendered. Furthermore, the Build-
ing Commissioner shall devote his whole time to the work of this de-
partment and shall not in any way be connected with the promotion or
sale of any type of equipment, material or supplies; nor shall the
Building Commissioner or any of his assistants, during their term-of
office, be employed or engaged, directly or indirectly, in any building
business, or enter into any contract for building for others, or, for
furnishing materials, specifications or plans for others.
A satisfactory surety bond of not less than Ten Thousand
($10,000.00) Dollars shall be furnished to the city by the Building Com-
missioner. The cost of the bond is to be paid by the city.
The salary of the assistants to the Building Commissioner shall be
commensurable with the duties performed, and bonds where required by
the city shall be based upon the funds handled by these assistants.
Section 1-3.
DUTIES OF BUILDING COMMISSIONER.
Paragraph 1-3-1. Code 'Enforcement.
It shall be the duty of the Building Commissioner to enforce all
the conditions of this code.
Paragraph 1-3-2. Records.
It shall be the duty of the Building Commissioner to keep a record
of all applications for permits, which shall be regularly numbered in
order of their issuing and filing.
Also a record shall be kept showing the number, description and
size of each building erected in the City of Fort Worth during the
term of his office, of what material constructed; the aggregate of the
number, kind and cost of all buildings, the inspection, removal and
condemnation of buildings and all other matters to be recorded.
Paragraph 1-3-3. Personal Inspection.
It shall be the duty of said Building Commissioner, upon being
served with a notice requiring him to visit and inspect any building
upon or in which any work is being done, under any of the provisions
of this code, to do so.
Paragraph 1-3-4. Certificates and Notices.
It shall be the duty of the Building Commissioner to sign all cer-
tificate and notices required to be issued under this code, and to keep
proper book records of same; also he shall keep a register of all transac-
tions of his office, and submit to the City Manager a monthly state-
mylt of all such transactions.
CITY OF FORT.WORTH 13
Paragraph 1-3-5. Examination of Buildings.
The Building Commissioner shall examine all buildings, or cause
the same to be examined, upon or in which work is being done under
the provisions of this code, as often as practicable, and make a record
of all violations of same, together with the street and number where
such violations are found, the name of owner, lessee, occupant, architect
and builder, and all other matters relating thereto.
It shall be the duty of the Building Commissioner to examine, or
cause to be examined, all buildings reported to be dangerous or damaged
by fire or accident, and to make a record of such examination, including
the nature of such damage, with the name of the street and the number
of the buildings, as well as the name of the owner. He shall also ex-
amine or cause to be examined all buildings under application to be
moved, raised, enlarged, altered or built upon, if considered necessary,
and to make a record of the condition of same. Such records shall always
be open to the inspection of the public.
Paragraph 1-3-6. Handling of Fees.
The Building Commissioner, with the approval of the City Manager,
shall designate in writing some suitable persons in his office to receive
all moneys coming into his office as fees for permits, inspections, etc.,
under the terms of this code.
Such person so designated shall, before entering upon the duties
of his employment, execute and deliver to the City of Fort Worth, a
bond in the sum of Three Thousand ($3,000.00) Dollars, payable to
the City of Fort Worth, conditioned that he will faithfully and safely
keep all moneys coming into his hands and turn the same over to such
officer or officers as may be designated by the City Manager and at
such time as approved by the City Manager.
Paragraph 1-3-7. Notice of Danger.
Whenever the Building Commissioner has knowledge of any un-
safe buildings, structure or part thereof, the condition being such as
to endanger the public or the occupants of such building or structure,
it shall be his duty to affix a notice of the dangerous character of the
building or structure in a conspicuous place on the exterior thereof
and any person removing or defacing such notice so applied shall be
subject, upon conviction thereof, to a fine of not less than Ten ($10.00)
Dollars, and not more than Two Hundred ($2(10.00) Dollars.
Section 1-4.
AUTHORITY OF BUILDING COMMISSIONER.
Paragraph 1-4-1. Board of Appeals.
The Building Commissioner shall pass on all questions arising
under this ordinance; in case of dissatisfactioti with his decisions, ex-
cept in regard to insecure and unsafe buildings requiring immediate
action, the question in dispute may be referred to a Board of Appeals,
and a decision of a majority of the board shall determine the issue.
Such board shall consist of three persons properly qualified to decide
the question at issue; all three to be appointed by the Mayor, one to
be an architect, one a general contractor, and one a structural engineer.
One member shall be appointed chairman and he shall keep a record of
the proceedings and decisions, a copy of which shall be filed with the
City Manager.
Each member shall take an oath to faithfully perform his duties,
and shall be paid Ten Dollars each ($10.00) for each meeting attended,
1�4 kBYsiF�ifP+� i7eri�
not to exceed Three Hundred ($300.00) Dollars in any one calendar
year. These fees to be paid by the City of Fort Worth.
J
The board shall meet at such time and place as called together
by the chairman.
Appeals from the decision of the Building Commissioner shall be
taken within ten days (10) after such decision is made by filing with
the Building Commissioner a notice of appeal on blanks to be provided
for that purpose, stating specifically the question or questions which
the appellant desires to have passed on.
The Board of Appeals shall have power to pass upon the true intent
and meaning of the several provisions of,this code, and also when it is
claimed that an equally good or more desirable form of construction
or materials can be employed in any specific case, to permit the same
if concurred in by a majority of said boardo but the board shall not
otherwise have power to modify any other provisions of this code.
Any person appealing from a decision of the Building Commis-
sioner shall.in every case be required to pay to the City Secretary a
fee of $20.00 at the time of giving notice of such appeal, said fee to
be returned to said applicant in case the decision of the Board of Ap-
peals sustains his contention. In case such appeal is not sustained,
such money shall be retained by the city. All rulings and decisions
of the Board of Appeals shall be binding upon all parties and it shall
be the duty of the Building Commissioner to carry them into effect. _
Paragraph 1-4-2. Immediate Decisions.
Where a situation requires an immediate decision, that of the Build-
ing Commissioner shall be final and conclusive.
Paragraph 1-4-3. Transfer of Authority.
In the absence of the Building Commissioner, one of his assistants
shall be designated by him to act in his place, and when so designated,
the assistant shall exercise all powers and duties of the Building Com-
missioner.
Paragraph 1-4-4. Tests and Inspection.
The Building Commissioner and his regularly authorized assistants
are hereby given authority to make such tests as may be necessary
to determine the safety or condition of any building or machinery which
it becomes their duty under the provisions of this code to inspect.
Paragraph 1-4-5. Police Power.
For the purpose of enforcing the provisions of this code or detect-
ing violations thereof, the Building Commissioner or any assistant
Building Commissioners are hereby vested with full police power and
authority in the execution of their duties.
Paragraph 1-4-6. Special Cases.
-The Building Commissioner shall have full power to exercise his
own judgment in a resonable and proper manner and rule accordingly
on all special cases in regard to any of the matters and things in this
code and specifically covered thereby.
Paragraph 1-4-7. Term "Person."
Whenever the term "Person" is used herein, the same shall be
construed to include any firm, company, corporation or any association
of persons, their agents, servants or employees. -
CITY OF FORT WORTH 15
Paragraph 1-4-8. Penalty for Violation.
.�� Unless a penalty is otherwise provided herein, for a violation of
certain provisions of the code, then any person, firm, company or cor-
poration, their agents, servants or employees violating any of the pro-
visions of same, where a penalty is not otherwise provided, shall upon
conviction in the Corporation Court be fined in any sum not exceeding
Two Hundred ($200.00) Dollars for each and every day that any person
shall fail, omit, neglect or refuse to do any act required by the terms
of this code, or if they .shall do any act in violation of the terms of
this code, they shall be subject to the penalty herein provided for, not
exceeding Two Hundred ($200.00) Dollars.
Section 1-5.
PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PERMITS, FEES AND BONDS.
Paragraph 1-5-1. Permit Necessary.
No work or repairs shall be done upon any structure, building or
shed, nor shall any mechanical installation, such as plumbing, heating,
electric wiring or elevators be installed in same, within the City of
Fort Worth (excepting as herein mentioned) without a Building Permit
from the $tjilding Commissioner.
Repairs of buildings or structures, or mechanical installations, the
cost of which will not exceed Fifty ($50.00) Dollars, may be made with-
out securing a building permit, but such repairs shall not be construed
to include the cutting away of any masonry wall or structural member,
or any portion thereof, nor the removal, change or closing of any stair-
way, nor the construction of any chimney. Permits must always be
secured for electrical or plumbing work regardless of extent.
Paragraph 1-5-2. Occupancy Permit.
No building or part thereof, except a private dwelling, shall be
occupied before its completion without an Occupancy Permit from the
Building Commissioner.
Also, no structure, building or part thereof shall be used or oc-
cupied for any purpose other than that named in its Building Permit
or its latest Occupancy Permit or from the purpose for which it is used
when this Building Code is adopted, until the necessary Occupancy Per-
mit therefor has been issued by the Building Commissioner. If such
change of use or occupancy increases the load, the danger to life or
health, or the fire risk, the Commissioner may require such altera-
tions and changes in the building as he may deem necessary before is-
suing Occupancy Permit for such new use or occupancy.
If the condition of any structure, building or part thereof becomes
unsafe or dangerous to life or limb, the Commissioner may, with the
written approval of a majority of the Board of Councilmen, revoke the
Occupancy Permit thereof, and it shall thereupon be unlawful for any
person to use or occupy such building until a new Occupancy Permit has
been issued therefor.
Paragraph 1-5-3. Application for Building Permits.
When any person or persons shall be desirous of erecting, repairing,
Changing, altering or removing any building or structure, or making
any mechanical installation such as plumbing, heating, or electrical wir-
ing in same, within the limits of said city, he or they, or their authorized
agents shall make application at the office of the Building Commj sioner
for a Building Permit (except in cases cited in Paragraph 1-6-1 above),
16 BUILDtric CODE
and shall furnish said Building Commissioner with a written statement,
giving such information as desired by him, upon a blank form furnished
by the said Building Commissioner for the purpose, together with plans
and specifications of same, when required, which shall be delivered to
the Building Commissioner and shall retrain in his custody a sufficient
length of time to allow the necessary examination to be made of the
same.
Before a Building Permit is issued the plans and specifications shall
be submitted to the plumbing and electrical inspectors who shall pass on
same in regard to the plumbing and electrical work.
Paragraph 1-5-4. Drawings.
When the cost of erecting, repairing, changing or altering any struc-
ture, or making any mechanical installation as before mentioned, in the
City of Fort Worth, exceeds the sum of Three Thousand ($3,000.00) Dol-
lars, there shall be complete scale drawings and specifications showing
and describing all parts of the construction and installation filed with
the Building Commissioner, along with the application for permit.
All plans and drawings shall be drawn to a scale of not less than
of an inch to the foot, on paper or cloth, in ink or by some process
that will not fade or obliterate. All distances shall be securely figured s
and drawings made explicit and complete. Any plans or drawings that ..
do not show all necessary details to enable the Building Commissioner
to intelligently inspect same shall be rejected and such necessary de-
tails shall be shown on said drawings before same will be accepted.
Lot lines, as well as building lines must be shown on plans.
Paragraph 1-5-5. Approval or Rejection.
If such plans and specifications are in compliance with the pro-
visions of this code, and indicate that the erection, reconstruction, re-
moval or installation is to be in accordance with this code, the Building
Commissioner shall stamp them "approved" and issue "Certificate of
Approval," retaining one set of plans and specifications to be kept until
the proposed work is completed, when they shall be returned to the
party who filed them. Such plans and specifications so filed shall not
be open to the inspection of other than those interested in the building
or structure, and if not claimed by the proper party within six months
after completion they shall be destroyed. All plans and specifications
of buildings of a public character, and buildings for public gatherings
shall remain on file permanently in the Building Commissioner's office.
If such plans and specifications proposed do not comply with the
provisions of this code, then the Building Commissioner-shall reject same
and refuse a certificate, indicating in a written report his objections
thereto. Such changes as may be required shall be made before any
permit is issued.
Paragraph 1-5-6. Alterations or Additions to Drawings and Specifica-
tions.
Any alterations of plans and specifications or addition thereto shall
be submitted in the same manner and subjected to the same requirements
as the original plans and specifications, and accompanied by a similar
application. The Building Commissioner may stop any work of altera-
tions or additions to such original plans and specifications where such
changes materially affect cost or purpose of the structure until the
foregoing provisions have been complied with and a permit therefor
issued.
Nothing in this section shall be construed to prevent the Building
Commissioner from granting permit for the erection of any part of a
CITY oF_Fo$T WowrH 17
building or any part of a structure, where the partial plans or detailed
statements of such building or structure have been presented before the
entire plans and detailed statements of said building or structure have
been submitted. -
Paragraph 1-5-7. Revocation of Permits.
Should the Building Commissioner become convinced that the work
under any permit is not proceeding according to the detailed statement,
plans and specifications upon which such permit was issued, but is
proceeding in violation of the law or provision of this code, it sliall be
his duty to notify the owner or owners, or his or their agents, in writ-
ing, that the work is being constructed or installed in violation bf the
permit and this code, and that the same must be immediately rectified
to conform with same.
If the owner or owners, or his or their agents neglect to comply with
the said code or fail to make corrections, it shall be the further duty of
the Building Commissioner to revoke said permit, and notice thereof
shall be immediately served upon the owner or owners, agents, superin-
tendent, or contractor in charge of this work; said notice shall be in
writing, signed by the Building Commissioner, and after such revoca-
tion of permit, any contractor or workman performing any work in or
about such structure, building or premises shall be guilty of a misde-
meanor, and shall be dealt with accordingly.
Paragraph 1-5-5. Placards.
With each and every Building Permit issued, the Building Commis-
sioner shall issue to the applicant a weatherproof card, properly filled
out. It shall be the duty of the person or persons to whom the permit
was issued, to place and maintain the weatherproof card in a conspicu-
ous place on the outside of the premises where the building is being
erected or the work being done, the card to be unobstructed from public
view and not more than fifteen (15) feet nor less than five (5) feet
above the grade level.
In case of revocation of a permit the Building Commissioner shall
immediately place a proper notice of the revocation in a conspicuous
place and any person removing or defacing such notice as applied shall
be'subject, upon conviction thereof, to a fine of not less than Ten Dol-
lars ($10.00) or more than Two Hundred Dollars ($200.00).
Paragraph 1-5-9. Co-Operation of Police and Fire Departments.
The Police and Fire Department shall co-operate with the Building
Commissioner, and any construction or installation that comes under the
Building Code not displaying such signs shall be reported to the Build-
ing Commissioner.
Paragraph 1-5-10. Time Limit of Permit.
Every permit" shall be considered cancelled if active work is not
commenced within six (6) months of the date of issue. In case of can-
cellation of permit from the above cause, all permit fees already paid
shall be retained by the City of Fort Worth as compensation for work
done in checking plans and issuance of permits.
Paragraph 1-5-11. Estimate of Cost.
Applications for building permits shall be accompanied by an esti-
mate of the cost of the proposed structure. The Building Commissioner
may at his discretion, prepare his own estimate and issue the permit on
basis of same. On completion of the structure the party to whom the
permit was issued may submit or the Building Commissioner may require
18 BUTLDiNG CODE.
to be submitted vouchers and affidavits showing the actual cost of the
structure. Where the actual cost thus ascertained is found to vary by
more than ten per cent from the estimate on which the permit was
issued, then the permit fee shall be recomputed and charges made on the
basis of the actual cost of the structure.
Paragraph 1-5-12. Fees for Permits and Inspection.
For every Building Permit issued for the erection or construction
of any new building or structure, or for the alteration or repair of
any existing building or structure, or for any mechanical installation,
such as plumbing, heating, electric wiring or elevators, the Building
Commissioner shall collect a fee from the owner or contractor per-
forming such work. Such fee shall cover the cost of permit and cost
of inspection by the Building Commissioner or his assistants at regular
intervals until work is completed, and shall be based on the total cost,
including mechanical work, as follows:
Cost. Fee.
$100.00 or less ..................................................----.................-----..LNi 00
Over $100.00 and not exceeding $500.00---------------------------------------------------- 1.50
Over $500.00 and not exceeding $1,000.00......................----........................ 2.00
Over$1,000.00 and not exceeding $2,000.00................................................ 3.00
Over$2,000.00 and not exceeding $3,000.00............................................... 4.00
Over$3,000.00 and not exceeding $5,000.00................................................ 5.00
Each additional $1,000.00 above $5,000.00 and not exceeding
$20,000.00 ;.. .. . -----•- , 1.25
Each additional $1,000.00 above $20,000.00................................................ 1.00
For making trip of inspection upon receipt of notice stating build-
ing is ready for inspection when same is not.,...------ :...... ......:...... 1.00
On additional cost due to changes in plans and specifications, an
additional fee must be paid by the owner or his authorized agent, in
accordance with the above schedule.
However, inspection fees for special items such as plumbing, heat-
ing, electrical work, sprinkler systems, elevators, fire escapes, signs
and bill boards, wrecking of houses, moving picture shows, film ex-
changes, moving houses through public streets or alleys, gasoline tanks
and pumps, fuel oil tanks and equipment, dry cleaning establishments,
etc., as called for in various sections of this code, and in the plumbing
and electrical ordinances shall be paid in addition to the general fee
for Building Permits mentioned herein.
In addition to the above fees, the owner or his agent shall pay
the actual cost of any tests required by the Building Commissioner.
unless the owner or his agent can furnish certificates covering such
tests made by some recognized authority satisfactory to the Building
Commissioner.
Any act of erecting, repairing, changing, altering or removing any
building or structure or making any mechanical installations such as
heating, plumbing, or electrical wiring in same, (except in cases cited in
Paragraph ]-5-1) carried on without a permit having been issued by the
Building Commissioner, or any willful misstatement of facts concerning
the proposed type of construction, proposed use or estimated or actual
cost made in securing a permit shall render the owner of such building
or structure or his agent liable to penalty for violation of this code in
accordance with Paragraph 1-4-8. Where penalties are invoked, in
addition to such penalties the owner or his agent shall further be held
liable for payment of permit fees computed on the basis of the above
schedule for the actual cost of such building or structure.
CITY or FORT WORTH 19
Paragraph 1-5-13. Bond for General Contractors and Others.
Any person, firm or corporation desiring to engage in the busi-
ness of general contracting in the City of Fort Worth, shall file with
the Building Commissioner, to be approved by the Board of Councilmen,
a surety bond in the penal sum of Three Thousand ($3,000.00) Dollars,
conditioned on a faithful performance of all the provisions of this code,
such surety to be a company authorized to transact business in the
State of Texas.
Any person, firm or corporation, other than general contractors,
doing construction, repairing, etc., under the provisions of this code, +
shall furnish a similar bond in an amount to be determined by the
Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 1-5-14. Bond for Mechanical Contractors.
Any person, firm or corporation desiring to engage in the busi-
ness of installing heating, or other mechanical apparatus in a build-
ing or structure, other than plumbing or electrical work in the City
of Fort Worth, shall first file with the Building Commissioner a surety
bond, to be approved by the Board of Councilmen, in a penal sum of One
Thousand ($1,000.00) Dollars, conditioned on the faithful performance of
this Code. Bond shall be similar to general contractor's bond. This
does not include, however, license fees and other indemnity bonds as
provided for in this code. In the case of plumbing and electrical con-
tractors such bonds, etc., shall be furnished as provided in these respec-
tive ordinances.
Chapter 2.
DEFINITIONS.
The following terms when used in this code shall be construed to
have the meaning here given them. Words used in the present tense
include the future as well as the present; the singular number in-
cludes the plural and the plural the singular; the word "person" includes
a corporation or copartnership as well as bn individual; "writing" in-
cludes printed or typewritten matter. In mixtures, unless otherwise
limited, the word "parts" shall mean parts by volume. The word
"shall" is to be construed in a mandatory sense.
1. Alley and Street. Any public thoroughfare less than 20 feet
wide and not less than 8 feet wide, shall be deemed an alley. When
20 feet wide or over it shall be deemed a street.
2. The "width of the street" is the mean of the distances between
the sides thereof within a block. Where a street borders a public place
or public park the width of the street is the mean width of such street
plus the width, measured at right angles to the street line of such public
place or park. The "width of the street" shall in no case be deemed to
exceed one hundred feet and the distance from the street line to the
center line of the street, measured at right angles to the street line,
shall in no case be deemed to exceed 50 feet.
3. Alteration. Any change, addition or modification in construc-
tion or character or grade of occupancy.
4. Apartment House. An "apartment house" is a building ar-
ranged, intended or designed to be occupied by three or more families.
?0 BUILDING CODE
"Apartment" is a room or suite of rooms in an apartment or tene-
ment house, which is occupied or which is intended or designed to be
occupied by one family for living and sleeping purposes.
b. Approved. The term "approved" refers to a device, material
or construction which has been approved by the Underwriters' Labora-
tories; or such approval may be granted by the Building Commis-
sioner as result of tests or investigations made under his direction;
or may issue approval upon satisfactory evidence of competent and
impartial tests or investigations conducted by others.
6. Areas. Open sub-surfaces adjacent to a building or lot line.
7. Areaway. An open sub-surface space adjacent to a building for
lighting or ventilating cellars or basements.
8. Area of a Building. The area of the horizontal cross section at
the ground level measured to the center of party walls or fire walls,
and to the outside of outer walls.
9. Attic. A story situated wholly or partly in the roof and at
some point lower than 8 feet in height.
10. Appendages. Dormer windows, cornices, molding, bays, oriel
windows, balconies, cupolas, domes, towers, spires, ventilators, or any
other accessory projecting from a building.
11. Balcony. A kind of gallery on the outside of a building with
no support from the ground. Elevated floor space in a story.
.12. Basement. A story partly, but not more than one-half, below
the level of the curb.
13. Bay Window. A rectangular, curved or polygonal window,
which projects from the balance of the enclosing walls.
14. Building Line. A line formed by the intersection of the outer
face of the enclosing walls of a building and the surface of the ground.
15. Bulkhead or Pent"House. A structure erected on the roof of
a building for the purpose of enclosing stairways to the roof, elevator
machinery, water tanks, ventilating apparatus, exhaust chambers or
other building equipment, machinery or for janitor's quarters. When
used only for the above mentioned purpose, such structures need not be
considered in determining the height of the building.
16. Cellar. A story whose height is more than pne-half below the
level of the curb. It shall not be counted as a story in determining the
height of a building.
17. Cement Plaster. A plaster composed of one part Portland
cement, not more than three parts sand, to which hydrated lime may
be added to the extent of not more than 10 per cent of the volume of
Portland cement, with hair or other binder when necessary.
18. Cement. (a) Natural cement is a product of calcination of
natural rock. (b) Portland cement is the finely ground clinker from
calcareous and argillaceous matter to meet the requirements hereafter
given.
19. Chase. A vertical slot in a wall.
20. Code. This Building Code.
CITY OF FORT WORTH
21. Concrete. Concrete is a mixture of Portland cement, sand
and aggregates, unless otherwise allowed.
22. Courts. A court is an opening unoccupied space, other than
a yard, on the same lot with a building.
A court not extending to the street or yard is an inner court.
A court extending to the street or yard is an outer court.
23. Curb. The "curb level" for the purpose of regulating and de-
termining the height of any portion of a building or to the definition of
a basement or cellar, is the mean level of the curb in front of such
portion of the building. But where a building is on a corner lot the
curb level is the mean level of the curb on the street of greatest width.
If such greatest width occurs on more than one street the curb level
is the mean level of the curb on that street of greatest width which
has the highest curb elevation. Where no curb elevation has been
established the average ground level of the lot shall be considered the
curb level. Where the building sets back from the street line the average
ground level of the lot, if higher than the established curb elevation,
shall be considered the curb level.
24. Dry Cleaning Business. Dry cleaning business is the business
of cleaning cloth, clothing, feathers, or any sort of fabrics by the use
of gasoline, naphtha, benzine, benzole or similar petroleum or coal tar
products, or cleaning by a process known as dry cleaning.
25. Dumb Waiter. A dumb waiter is a small special form of
elevator whose dimensions do not exceed 6 square feet and 4 feet high,
designed to carry light articles, provided with one or more shelves.
26. Dwelling. A building arranged, intended or designed to be
occupied by not more than two families.
27. Existing Building. A completed building or structure, or one
for which plans have been approved in whole or part, previous to the
date on which this code goes into effect.
28.. Factory. A building or portion thereof, designed or used to
manufacture or assemble goods, wares, or merchandise, the work being
performed wholly or principally by machinery.
29. Family. A family is a single individual living upon the
premises as a separate housekeeping unit or a collective body of per-
sons, the relations between whom is of a permanent and domestic charac-
ter, subsisting in common and living together upon the premises as a
separate housekeeping unit.
30. Fire Limits. See Chapter 4.
31. Fireproof Building. A fireproof building is one in which the
structural parts are constructed of incombustible material, such as stone,
brick, iron, terra cotta, or concrete. Buildings constructed of reinforced
concrete shall be deemed to be fireproof buildings, if constructed in
accordance with the requirements of this code. Skeleton steel con-
structed buildings must have all columns, girders, beams, floor and
all other structural portions of the building enclosed in concrete, hollow
tile or brick, and must have all floors between such beams constructed
of fireproof material. All partitions in such buildings subdividing the
halls and suites and all partitions of a permanent character must be
fire resistive partitions. Floors in any other portion of the building
except in the public halls and toilets may be of wood nailed to sleepers
22 BumwNG CODE
for the purpose of securing the flooring. In such buildings, window
frames and sash and window and door trim, and all other similar finish,
unless otherwise piovided for in this code, may be of wood, also the
top handrail of the stairs.
32. Fireproof and Fire-Resistive. As used in this code, except as
elsewhere prescribed by test for particular types of construction, refers
to materials or construction not combustible in the temperatures of or-
dinary fires, and which will withstand such fires without serious im-
pairment of the usefulness for at least one hour.
33. Fire Door. A door, frame, and sill which will successfully
resist a fire and has been approved for use.
34. Fire Shutter. A shutter which will successful) resist a fire
and has been approved for use.
35. Footings. The projecting course or courses at the bottom of
a foundation wall or pier.
36. Foundation. (a) That portion of a building below the lowest
floor line upon which the superstructure rests. (b) The earth upon
which the structure rests.
37. Garage. A garage shall be construed to mean a building in
which are housed self-propelled vehicles in which inflammable liquids are
contained for fuel or power.
38. Gauge. When not specifically otherwise given, gauge shall
mean, "United States Standard Gauge."
39. Gypsum Block. The term "gypsum block" shall include tile or
blocks composed of gypsum and not to exceed 5 per cent, by weight, of
combustible fibre binding material; or a mixture of crashed cinders and
gypsum, commonly called "cinder-plaster blocks."
Gypsum, containing large air cells, called "Puffed Gypsum," may
be used only as a floor fill over fireproof floors, for fire stopping and
insulation.
40. Height of a Building. The "height of a building" is the
vertical distance measured, in the case of flat roofs, from the curb
level to the level of the highest point of the roof beams adjacent to the
street wall, and in the case of pitched roofs, from the curb level to the
mean height level of the gable. Where no roof beams exist or where
there are structures wholly or partly above the roof, the height shall
be measured from the curb level to the level of the highest point of
the building. See also bulkheads.
41. Hotel: Any building or portion thereof, designed or used for
supplying food and shelter to residents or guests, and containing more
than fifteen sleeping rooms above the first story.
42. Hall. (a) Public hall.
A public hall is a hall, corridor or passageway used in common by
occupants within a building.
(b) Stair hall.
A stair hall includes the stairs, stair landings and other portions of
the public halls through which it is necessary to pass in going between
the entrance floor and the top floor.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 23
43. height of Walls. The height of every external wall, party and
divisional bearing wall shall be measured from the base of the wall to
the level of the top of the topmost story, but in no case higher than the
actual top of the wall.
44. Height of Stories. The height of the topmost story shall be
measured from the level of its floor to the underside of the ceiling
joists or collar beams forming a tie to the roof, or up to the average
height of the rafters when the roof has no such tie, and the height of
any story shall be the clear height of such story.
45. Incombustible or Noncombustible. Materials or construction
which will not ignite and burn when subjected to fire.
46. Length of a Building. Its greatest horizontal dimension.
47. Loads on a Building. (a) Dead loads shall consist of the
actual weight of walls, floors, permanent partitions and all permanent
construction.
(b) Live loads shall consist of all loads other than dead, due to
the occupancy of the building and its exposure to wind pressure.
(c) Where the word load is used in this code, it shall mean both
the dead and live load.
48. Lot. A "lot" is a lot, parcel or tract of land occupied or
proposed to be occupied by one building and the necessary buildings or
uses customarily incident to it, including at least such open spaces as
are required by this code, and such open spaces as are arranged and
designed to be used in connection with such building.
Lots or portions of lots shall be deemed "back to back" when they
are on opposite sides of the same part of g rear line common to both
and the opposite street lines on which the lots front are parallel with
each other or make an angle with each other of not more than 45
degrees.
49. Lot Line. 'The line of demarcation between either public or
private properties; a party line is the lot line between adjoining prop-
erties. When such a lot line abuts on the street or alley, park or other
public property, it shall be known as a street line.
50. Lot Area. The lot area shall be considered as the ground
area upon which a building is erected, and may include-the adjacent un-
occupied ground within the party and street lines of the same tract
upon which the building is erected.
51. Masonry. The product from building with stone or clay prod-
ucts or concrete.
52. Mill Constructed Buildings. "Mill" construction, also called
"slow burning construction," is a term applied to buildings having
masonry walls and heavy timber interior construction with no con-
cealed spaces.
53. Mortar. Mortar is a mixture in proper proportion of sand,
lime and water, or of sand, cement and water, or of sand, lime, cement
and water.
54. Nuisance. For the purpose of this ordinance the word
"nuisance" shall be held to embrace public nuisance as known at common
law or in equity jurisprudence; and whatever is dangerous to human
life or that may be or may have a tendency to be prejudicial to public
24 BUILDING CODE
health; whatever residence building is overcrowded with occupants or is
not,provided with adequate ingress and egress to or from the same, or
is not sufficiently supported, ventilated, sewered, drained, cleaned or
lighted, in reference to its intended or actual use, and whatever renders
the air or human food or drink unwholesome, are also severally, in con-
templation of this ordinance, nuisances; and all such nuisances are
hereby declared illegal.
55. Occupied. Shall be construed to mean occupied, to be occupied,
or intended or designed to be occupied in whole or part.
56. Office Building. One used for professional or clerical pur-
poses, but not for manufacturing, storage, or sale of goods except by
sample; also excepting the first story, which may be used for com-
mercial purposes. No part of such buildings shall be used for living
purposes except by the janitor's family.
57. Opening. Any door, window or skylight that may be me-
chanically open or opened by fire.
58. Owner. Any person, firm or corporation, owning or controlling
property, including a duly authorized agent or attorney. Guardians,
conservators, or trustees shall also be regarded as owner.
59. Partition. A partition is an interior subdivision wall.
60. Plaster Board. A board consisting of an intimate mixture of
gypsum plaster composition and a fibrous binding material.
61. Post. A term which when used in this code means a vertical
wooden support or column.
62. Property Line. See Lot Line.
63. Public Buildings. See Section 3-2.
64. Repairs. The reconstruction or removal of any part of an
existing building for the purpose of its maintenance in its present class
of construction and grade of occupancy.
65. Shed. A roofed structure, open on one or more sides, which
does not exceed 15 feet in height nor more than 500 square feet in area.
66. Skeleton Construction. A form of building construction
wherein all external and internal loads and stresses are transmitted to
the foundations by a rigidly connected frame-work of metal or rein-
forced concrete. The enclosing walls are supported by girders at each
story.
67. Skylight. Any cover or enclosure placed above roof openings
01 for the admission of light.
68. Story. That part of any building comprised between any floor
and the floor or roof next above. In case any floor or the combined
area of floors at any one level extends over less than 20 per cent of
the horizontal area included within the outside wall at that level, the
same shall not be considered as a floor for the purpose of determining
story heights.
69. Structure. Includes the terms building, appurtenance, wall,
platform, staging or flooring used for standing or seating purposes, a
shed, fence, sign or billboard on public or private property, or on, above
or below a public highway.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 25
70. Shaft. A shaft is a vertical enclosed space that is open from
the bottom, unobstructed to the top, and used exclusively for ventilation,
dumb waiter, elevator, wiring or piping purposes.
71. Tenement House. A tenement house is any house or build-
ing, or portion thereof, which is either rented or leased, to be occupied
in whole or in part, as the home or residence of three or more fami-
lies, living independently of each other and having a common right in
yards, porches, hallways and stairways and includes apartment houses,
flat houses and all other houses so occupied.
72. Theatre. Any building or part of building designed or used
for theatrical or operatic purposes with accommodation for an audience
of more than 300 persons and having a permanent stage upon which
movable scenery and theatrical appliances are employed; including also
motion picture theatres, either with or without a stage and having ca-
pacity as above stated.
73. Ton. Whenever used in this code, a ton shall be 2,000 pounds.
74. Warehouse. A building or portion thereof designed or used for
the storage of merchandise.
75. Width of a building. The horizontal dimension next in value
to the length.
76. Wired Glass. Glass not less than %-inch thick enclosing a
layer of wire fabric reinforcement having a mesh not larger than %-
inch and the size of wire not smaller than No. 24 B. and S. gauge.
77. Workshop. A building or room in which articles of merchan-
dise are manufactured or repaired, wholly or principally by hand.
78. Walls. (a) "Bearing Wall." A wall which supports any load
other than its own weight.
(b) "Curtain Wall." Any exterior non-bearing wall between col-
umns or piers which is not supported by beams or girders at each story.
(c) "Division Wall." Any interior wall in a building.
(d) "Division Bearing Wall." Means a division wall that car-
ries or sustains the weight of the floor or roof.
(e) "Exterior Wall." Any outside wall or vertical enclosure of a
building, other than a party wall.
(f) "Fire Wall." A wall built for the purpose of restricting the
area subject to the spread of fire.
(g) "Foundatiolt Wall." Means that portion of an enclosing wall
below the first tier of floor joists or beams nearest and above the
grade line.
(h) "Panel or Enclosure Wall." An exterior non-bearing wall in
a skeleton structure built between columns or piers and supported at
each story.
(i) "Parapet Wall." That portion of any wall which extends above
the roof line and bears no load except as it may serve to support a roof
structure.
(j) "Party Wall." A wall used for joint service between two
buildings.
(k) "Retaining Wall." One constructed to support a body of
earth or to resist lateral thrust.
79. Yard. A yard is an open space on the same lot with the
building.
26 BUILEgNG CODE
/ Chapter 3.
CLASSIFICATIONS.
Section 8-1.
CLASSIFICATION BY CONSTRUCTION.
For the purpose of this code, all buildings shall be classified accord-
ing to construction as first-class construction, second-class construction
and third-class construction.
Paragraph 3-1-1. First-Glass Construction.
A building of first-class construction shall have external and party
walls of brick, stone, concrete or other equally substantial and incom-
bustible material; construction and supports of floors and roofs to be
either of metal, protected as required by Chapter 11, or of reinforced
concrete, hard burned terra cotta, brick, concrete tile; inside walls,
partitions and stairs to be of incombustible material. Roofg and roof
structures shall be of and covered with incombustible material; bays,
cornices, gutters, belts, and similar projections to be of incombustible
material.
' Sub-floors and finished floors, windows and door frames, sash, ,
doors, except as provided in Chapter 11, interior finish, hand rails for
stairs, and necessary isolated furrings and floor screeds may be of wood;
screeds if used, must be bedded in cement mortar or cinder concrete with
no air space between floor construction and floor boarding.
Paragraph 3-1-2. Second-Class Construction.
Second Class A Construction. Buildings of this class shall be like
first-class construction except that roof construction may be of woad
but covered with incombustible material, and roof shall be fire-stopped.
Second Class B Construction. Mill construction with sprinklers.
Buildings of this class shall have external and party walls of brick,
stone, concrete, or other equally substantial and incombustible material;
Construction and supports of floors and roofs may be of wood. Roofs
and roof structures to be covered with incombustible material; bays,
cornices, gutters, belts and similar projections to be of incombustible
material.
Girders and beams if of wood, shall have a sectional area of not
less than 56 square inches. Columns, girders and beams if of metal
need not be protected except that metal columns supporting masonry
walls or piers, or steel beams supporting masonry walls or piers over
openings wider than 10 feet shall be protected as required by Chapter 11.
Floor planks shall be not less than 2% inches thick, and roof planks
shall be not less than 1% inches thick, tongued and grooved or splined.
No bearing partitions shall be allowed, and all partitions shall be of
fire-resistive material or of,tongued and grooved or splined plank not
less than lye inches thick or of double matched 25/32-inch boards; no
wooden furrings or wooden lathing shall be allowed, and further, build-
ings in this class shall be completely equipped throughout with approved
automatic sprinklers on the interior.
Second Class C Construction. Buildings of this class shall be like
Second-Class B Construction except that no. automatic sprinklers are
required; however, columns, girders and beams, if of metal, shall be
protected as required by Chapter 11.
Second Class D Construction. Buildings of this class shall have
external and party walls of brick, stone, concrete or other equally sub-
stantial and incombustible material; construction and supports of the
first floor and any floor below it shall be same as for first-class con-
CITY or FART W03TH 27
struction, but construction of floors above the first floor and of the
roofs may be of wood. Bearing partitions must be covered with metal
lath and plaster or equally non-combustible material.
Roof and roof structures shall be covered with incombustible mate-
rial; bays, cornices, gutters, belts and similar projections shall be made
of or covered on the upper side with incombustible material; metal
columns in buildings three stories or more high or if supporting masonry
walls or piers over openings wider than 10 feet shall be protected as
required by Chapter 11.
Buildings of this class also shall be fire-stopped as required by
Chapter 11.
Second-Class E Construction. Buildings of this class shall have
external and party walls of brick, stone, concrete or other equally sub-
stantial and incombustible material; construction and supports of floors
and roofs may be of wood, and bearing partitions must be covered with
metal lath and plaster, or equally non-combustible material.
Roof and roof structures shall be covered with incombustible mate-
rial; bays, cornices, gutters, belts, and similar projections shall be made
of or covered on the upper side with incombustible material. Steel
columns supporting masonry walls or piers over openings wider than
10 feet shall be protected by at least metal lath and cement plaster,
and shall be fire-stopped as required by Chapter 11.
If the first floor over any basement or cellar, is of wooden construc-
tion, it shall be covered on the under side with a ceiling of metal lath
and cement plaster or equally incombustible material.
Paragraph 3-1-3. Third-Clans Construction.
Third Class A Construction. Buildings of this class may have a
wooden frame but shall be fire-stopped as required by Chapter 11, and
walls, and dormer sides shall be covered with fire-resistive material.
Main gutters shall be made of or lined with incombustible material.
Third-Class B Construction. Buildings of this class may have frame
and exterior walls of wood but shall be fire-stopped as required by
Chapter 11.
Third-Class C Construction. Buildings of this class may. have
exterior walls, floor and roof construction of wood. Buildings of Type 1
of this class construction shall be fire-stopped at the first floor and at
the second floor when leger boards are used in place of girts.
If external, bearing or party walls in any building of third-class
construction are of material other than wood, such walls shall be of
thickness necessary to give strength and rigidity sufficient to carry
safely the estimated dead and live loads.
Paragraph 3-1-4. Different Types in One Building.
Any building, parts of which vary from other parts in class of
construction, shall be rated as the lowest class unless such parts are
separated by walls and floors of first-class construction with only such
openings as permitted for fire and party walls according to Chapter 14. '
Paragraph 3-1-5. Protection or Structural Metal.
Metal lath and plaster shall be considered as fireproofing only
where specifically allowed.
Section 3-2.
CLASSIFICATION BY OCCUPANCY.
For the purpose of this code, all buildings except garages shall be
classified according to occupancy, as "Residence Building," "Public
Building" and "Business Buildings."
28 BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 3-2-1. Type 1—Residence Building.
(a) Single houses, double houses, duplex houses, group houses,
boarding houses, club houses with sleeping accommodations above the
first floor,not.exceeding those allowed for boarding houses. (See defini-
tion of `Boarding House.")
(b) Apartment houses.
(c) Dormitories, convents, private charitable homes and studios.
(d) Hotels, apartment hotels, clubs other than those included under
"a" above.
Paragraph 3-2-2. Type 2—Public Buildings.
(a) Hospitals, asylums,nurseries,detention buildings,public charit-
table homes.
(b) Libraries with stacks, museums, court houses, armories, city
halls, fire and police station.
(c) School houses.
(d) Buildings having an assembly hall or lodge room, churches,
amusement halls, exhibition building, libraries without stacks, etc.
(e) Theaters, moving picture houses, opera houses, music halls
and assembly halls.
Paragraph 3-2-3. Type 3—Business Buildings.
(a) Office buildings.
(b) Stores, restaurants.
(c) Manufacturing and storage buildings, freight houses, work
shops.
(d) Stables and barns.
(e) Amusement park buildings, bath houses, railroad stations, car
barns, foundries, grand- stands, shelters, green houses, ice houses, light
and power plants, and other buildings not classified herein (except
garages).
Paragraph 3-2-4. Varied Occupancy.
Each building or part of a building shall be constructed and main-
tained as herein provided, according to its occupancy; provided however,
that if, in the opinion of the Building Commissioner, the requirements
for a part of the building conflict with the requirements for any other
part of the same building, the best and safest requirements shall apply
to the whole building, subject however, to the following further provi-
sions: ,
When part of a building is used for residence purposes and another
part or parts are used for public or business purposes, such other part
or parts shall, if required by the commissioner, be separated from the
residence portion at least by metal lath and plaster ceiling, and partitions
nogged with brick or solid gypsum blocks, and metal lath and plaster
on the side used for public or business purposes; the residence portion
shall be of the class of construction required by the commissioner.
For any business buildings of Type E, the Building Commissioner
may require construction, equipment and maintenance giving protection
and safety equivalent to that obtained by the requirements for other
buildings in the same building district.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 29
Chapter 4.
FIRE ZONES.
Section 4-1.
ZONE ONE.
Zone One, shall, and is hereby declared to include, all that area,
within the following boundaries, viz.:
Beginning at a point at the intersection of Calhoun, with Front
street, and extending in a northwesterly direction, along Calhoun street,
to the intersection with Bluff street, thence southwesterly along Bluff
street to intersection with Taylor street, thence southeasterly along
Taylor to intersection with West Fifth, thence southwesterly along Fifth
to intersection with Florence, thence south along Florence to intersection
with Texas, thence east along Texas to intersection with Monroe, thence
south along Monroe to Front street, thence east on Front to the point
of beginning.
Section 4-2.
ZONE TWO.
Zone Two shall, and is hereby declared to include all that area
within the following boundaries, excepting that area included in Zone
One, as above described, viz.:
Beginning at a point on Bluff street where North Commerce would
interseet and extending northwest along North Commerce to Twentieth
street, thence north to Marine Creek and along west bank of Marine
creek to Twenty-fifth street, thence west on Twenty-fifth street to
Clinton, thence South on Clinton to Twenty-fourth street, thence east
on Twenty-fourth street to Ellis avenue, thence south and southeast on
Ellis to Fourteenth, thence southwest on Fourteenth to North Houston,
thence southeast on North Houston street, maintaining one full block
west of North Main street to Bluff street, thence southwest on Bluff
street to Royal, thence southeast on Royal to Belknap, thence southwest
on Belknap to a point where Fournier street would intersect, thence
south on the extension of Fournier to a point 250 feet north of the
north property line of West Seventh street, thence west and maintaining
a distance of 250 feet north of said north property line of West Seventh
street to Barden street, thence south on Barden to Seventh, thence east
on Seventh to Burleson street, thence south on Burleson to a point 250
feet south of the south property line West Seventh street, thence east
and maintaining a distance of 250.feet south of said south property line
of West Seventh to Fournier street, thence south on Fournier to a point
where Presidio street would intersect, thence east to Presidio and thence
east on Presidio to Lake street, thence south on Lake to Railroad ave-
nue, thence-east on Railroad avenue to Henderson, thence south on Hen-
derson to Daggett, thence east on Daggett to May, thence south on May
to Broadway, thence east on Broadway to Galveston avenue, thence
south on Galveston to Oleander,. thence west on Oleander to Eighth
avenue, thence south on Eighth avenue to Morphv street, thence east
on Morphy to Bryan, thence north on Bryan to Elizabeth, thence east
on Elizabeth to South Boaz, thence north on South Boaz to Railroad
avenue, thence east on Railroad avenue to a point where Pine street
would intersect, thence north on Pine street to Kennedv, thence west
on Kennedy and an extension of Kennedy to intersection with Fort Worth
& Denver City Railroad, thence north along For4- Worth.& Denver City
Railroad to intersection of Sixth and Harding streets, thence northwest
on Harding to Bluff, thence southwest along Bluff to point of beginning.
30 BUILDING CODE
Section 4-3.
THIRD ZONE.
The Third Zone shall, and is hereby declared to include, all of the
area within the City Limits, excepting only that which is hereinabove
described as being included in the First and Second Zones.
Note: Wherever streets are referred to abpve, same shall mean
the center line of street.
Chapter 5.
GENERAL BUILDING RESTRICTIONS.
Section 5-1.
RESTRICTION AS TO CONSTRUCTION.
Paragraph 5-1-1. Zone 1.
No person, firm, company or corporation shall build any type of
structure other than First-Class Construction within Zone 1, except that
Second-Class A Construction, and Second-Class B Construction may be
allowed in Zone 1 on special permit issued by the Building Commis-
sioner after approval by the City Counci3 4'
Paragraph 5-1-2. Zone 2.
No, person, firm, company or corporation shall build any type of
structure other than First-Class or Second-Class Construction within
Zone 2.
Paragraph 5-1-3. Zone 3.
No person, firm, company or corporation shall build any type of
structure other than First, Second or Third-Class Construction within
the limits of the City of Fort Worth, Texas.
Paragraph 5-1-4. Additions to Existing Buildings.
No building already erected, or hereafter built shall be raised or
built upon in such manner that where such building wholly built or con-
structed after the passage of this ordinance, it would he in violation
of any provision thereof.
Chapter 6.
SPECIAL RESTRICTIONS.
Section 6-1.
HEIGHT OF BUILDING ACCORDING TO CLASSIFICATION BY
CONSTRUCTION.
No building or part of a building shall be erected to a height (see
Definition of "Height of Building") exceeding in any case:
For First-Class Construction, no limit.
Second-Class A Construction, no limit.
Second-Class B and C Construction, 65 feet.
Second-Class D and E Construction, 50 feet.
Third-Class Construction, 35 feet, except as provided in Chapter 10.
a
CITY OF FORT WORTH
Section 6-2.
RESTRICTIONS AS TO CLASS OF CONSTRUCTION REQUIRED
FOR BUILDING, ACCORDING TO OCCUPANCY.
Minimum Class
Type of Building Height of Construction
1-A Over 2 Stories 3rd Class A
1-A Over 3 Stories 2nd Class D
1-A Over 4 Stories 1st Class
1-B Over 1 Story 3rd Class A
1-B Over 2 Stories 2nd Class D
1-13 Over 3 Stories 1st Class
1-C 1 Story 2nd Class D
1-C Over 1 Story 1st Class
1-D Over 1 Story 2nd Class D
1-D Over 2 Stories 1st Class
2-A Any Height 1st Class
2-B 1 Story 2nd Class D
2-B Over 1 Story 1st Class
2-C 1 Story 2nd Class D
2-C Over 1 Story 1st Class
2-D Over 1 Story 2nd Class D
2-D Over 2 Stories 1st Class
(Except Church Spires, See Chapter 10.)
2-E 1 and 2 Stories 2nd Class A
2-E Over 2 Stories 1st Class
3-A 1 and 2 Stories 3rd Class E
3-A 3 Stories 2nd Class E
3-A 4 Stories and Over 2nd Class A
3-B 1 and 2 Stories 3rd Class E
3-B 3 Stories 2nd Class E
3-B 4 Stories and Over 2nd Class A
3-C 1 and 2 Stories 3rd Class E
3-C 3 Stories 2nd Class E
3-C 4 Stories 2nd Class C
3-C over 4 Stories 2nd Class B
3-D 1 and 2 Stories 3rd Class E
3-D Over 2 Stories 2nd Class C
3-E 1 and 2 Stories 3rd Class E
3-E 3 Stones 2nd Class E
3-E 4 Stories 2nd Class C
3-E 5 Stories 2nd Class B
3-E Over 5 Stories 2nd Class A
Section 6-3.
RESTRICTIONS AS TO FLOOR AREAS ACCORDING TO CLASS OF
CONSTRUCTION AND TYPE OF OCCUPANCY.
Paragraph 6-3-1. Basic Limits.
The maximum undivided floor area between fire walls or exterior
walls in any building shall be as follows:
e
32 BUILDING CODE
First-Class Construction and Second-Class Construc-
tion of Occupancy Classification, other than
Types 3-A, 3-B and 8-C................................:...:..... No Restriction
First-Class Construction and Second Class A Con-
struction of Occupancy Classification, 3-A, 3-B
and 3-C ........................•......---------- ......12,0p0 Square Feet
Second-Class C Construction of all Occupancy Classi-
fications ......_....._......................................................... 7,500 Square Feet
Second-Class D and E Construction of all Occupancy
Classifications .............................................................. 5,000 Square Feet
Third-Class A, B and.C Construction of all Occu-
pancy Classifications------...................... 3,500 Square Feet
Paragraph 6-3-2. Allowable Increases in Areas.
The areas in the foregoing table may be increased as follows:
In 1-story buildings......................................................................Increased 50010
In buildings equipped with an approved automatic
sprinkler system ..................: ___-...,.;.................................Increased 50010
In buildings fronting on two streets or one street and
on alley .............................. ..._..........................................Increased 20010
In buildings fronting on three streets or two streets and
one alley ...................................�.............................................Increased 500Jo
Paragraph 6-34. Increases Cumulative.
Every such increase shall be computed on the original maximum
area. The increases are accumulative and where both the building and
its contents are practically incombustible, such areas may be further
increased if approved in writing by the Building Commissioner.
(For Fire and Dividing Wall Specifications, See Chapter 14.)
Section 6-4.
LOT LINE RESTRICTIONS.
Hereafter no part of any building shall project beyond the line of
the lot occupied by said building, except as provided in Chapter 22.
Section 6-5.
BUILDING LINE RESTRICTIONS.
Hereafter, wherever fifty (50ofo) per cent of the buildings in any
block on the side of the street being considered are used exclusively for
residence purposes, the building line of buildings to be erected shall con-
form to the natural building line of the block as determined by the
existing buildings.
When there are no existing buildings in any block which is to be
used exclusively for residence purposes, the nearest .part of the build-
ings to be erected shall be not less than twenty (20) feet distant from
the street line. The Board of Councilmen may establish a new or dif-
ferent building line in any block in such residential sections.
The distance of one-story private garages and sheds from lot line
shall be at least 10 feet further back than the building line as established
for houses.
CITY OF FORT WORTH
Chapter 7.
ENCLOSURES OF STAIRS, ELEVATOR SHAFTS, ETC.
Section 7-1.
ENCLOSURES REQUIRED.
Paragraph 7-1-1.
In addition to any requirement of statute and of State regulations,
all stairs, elevator and other shaftways shall be enclosed when and by
such construction as is hereinafter required.
In buildings of Type 1-B, 1-C and 1-D, (See Chapter 3):
Three stories—at least ONE stairway enclosed, and ALL stairways
enclosed in the basement.
Four stories or more—ALL stairways enclosed except independent
flights connecting not more than two stories.
In buildings of Type 2-A, all stairways enclosed.
In buildings of Type 2-B, four stories or more at least ONE stair-
way enclosed.
In buildings of Type 2-C—Same as for 2-B.
In buildings of Type 2-D—All basement stairs enclosed. If the
assembly hall, lodge room, auditorium, amusement hall or exhibition hall
is above the first story, at least ONE stairway enclosed.
In buildings of Type 2-E, see Chapter 32.
In buildings of Type 3-A:
Four or five stories—at least ONE stairway enclosed.
Six or more stories—all stairways enclosed; however, they need
not be enclosed in first story if opening into a public lobby leading direct
to exit and separated from rest of building by first-class construction.
Further, independent flights connecting not more than two stories need
not be enclosed.
In buildings of Type 3-B:
Three stories—at least ONE stairway enclosed.
More than three stories and used above the first story for the sale
of merchandise or for restaurant purposes—ALL stairways enclosed
except independent flights connecting not more than two stories.
In buildings of Type 3-C, over two stories—ALL stairways enclosed.
In buildings of Type 3-D, three stories or more—ALL stairways
enclosed except runway for horses from first to second floor.
Buildings of Type 3-E are subject to special ruling by the Building
Commissioner, consistent with the above requirements.
In ALL types of buildings:
In addition to the requirements of statute and of State regulations,
any elevator shaftway in any building of Type 1, Type 2-A and 2-C, or
of Type 3-A, even though within the well way of a surrounding enclosed
• stairway, shall itself be enclosed by construction hereafter required.
In all types of buildings except single houses, all vent, light, con-
veyor,clothes chute, dumb waiter, or other vertical shaftways, not other-
wise provided for in this chapter, shall, if same extend more than two
stories, be enclosed as hereinafter required.
34 BUILDING CODE
Section 7-2.
CONSTRUCTION OF ENCLOSURES WHERE REQUIRED.
Paragraph 7-2-1.
Where stairs, elevator and other shaftways are required to be
enclosed in the preceding section, the construction used, shall be any
one or more of the following or an equivalent construction approved by
the Building Commissioner:
For Buildings of First- and Second-Class Construction-
1. Brick or concrete walls built according to Chapter 14, and not
less than 8 inches thick.
2. Terra cotta, gypsum blocks, or concrete tile at least 4 inches
thick plastered on both sides if supported at each story on reinforced
concrete or steel framing properly fireproofed.
3. Wire glass at least 1/4-inch thick in metal frames--no light of
glass being over 720 square inches in area.
For Buildings of Third-Class Construction-
1. Walls of 4-inch studs, firestopped at each floor as required by
Chapter 19, and covered on bath sides with metal lath and cement plaster
at least %-inch thick, or with approved gypsum board not less than
%-inch thick and coated with at least 1/4-inch of cement plaster—except
that all elevator shaftways and all required enclosures in buildings of
Types 1-C and 1-D, and Types 2-A and 2-D, shall be constructed as
required for buildings of first and second-class construction.
2. Metal lath and cement plaster making solid 2-inch partitions,
or hollow partitions, with metal studs and metal lath and cement plaster
at least %-inch thick on each side supported at each story.
All doorways leading into stairways and elevator shafts, required
to be enclosed shall be fitted with approved self-closing fire doors.
Windows in interior walls of enclosures shall be approved fixed fire
windows; and windows of exterior walls of enclosures shall be approved
fixed fire windows except in third-class construction.
Openings in all other shaftways required to be enclosed in the
preceding section shall be fitted with approved fire doors or windows
which shall be automatic if so required by the commissioner.
Sf an elevator shaftway extends to the top story, the enclosure
walls shall extend at least three feet above the roof. If a stair shaft-
way extends to the top story, the enclosure walls shall extend to the
under side of the roof covering if the building is of first-class construc-
tion; if of second or third-class construction, the enclosure walls shall
extend through and at least 6-inches above the roof.
Where the shaftway is not required to extend through the roof,
the top of the shaftway shall be made equivalent to the wall of same in
fire-resistance; every stairway which extends to the top story shall have
a skylight, covering not less than three-fourths the area of the shaftway. _�7F'I
Where stairway does not extend to roof, there shall be provided at
least a ladder extending to the roof with a scuttle over same of not less
than 8 square feet in area. This scuttle shall be provided with such
hardware that same cannot be locked but can be latched so as to be
opened from the inside at all times.
CITY OF k'QRW WQ$TH 35
Chapter S.
STAIRWAYS, EXITS, CORRIDORS AND FIRE ESCAPES.
Section 8-1.
STAIRWAYS IN GENERAL.
Paragraph 8-1-1. Materials.
In First-Class and Second-Class A and C constructed buildings,
stairways shall be built of approved concrete, reinforced concrete, stone
or with metal supports, metal strings, metal or composition floor treads
and risers, metal or composition floor platforms, or a combination of.one
or more of such materials.
In Second-Class B and Third-Class constructed buildings, stairways
may be of wood construction.
The hand rails of such stairways mentioned above can be of wood.
Paragraph 8-1-2. Location of Stairs.
Every building shall have at least one stairway from the ground
to the top floor, and one stairway from the lowest basement. The loca-
tion of every stairway required by this code shall, be subject to the
approval of the Building Commissioner.
In first and second-class constructed buildings, all stairways when
practical, shall be continuous from the topmost floor down to the ground
floor, and when two or more stairways are required, they will be located
at as great a distance from each other as is practical. When not con-
tinuous, the different stairways must be connected by ample corridors.
Every building except as otherwise particularly mentioned, not more
than two stories high, shall have at least one stairway not less than
three feet wide, provided that such stairway is so located that no part
of the second floor area shall be more than 100 feet from the stairway.
In case the above requirements cannot be complied with, then such
number of stairs or fire escapes shall be added so that no floor space
shall be more than 100 feet from a stairway or fire escape.
No stairway leading to the basement of a building shall be located
under any stairway extending above the second floor unless such stair-
way be enclosed in the basement by fire walls with fire doors and such
stairway shall -be located so as to provide easy access from street or
alley.
All buildings having scuttle in the roof, shall have a ladder or stair-
way leading thereto from the floor below, and such ladder shall be
stationary or hung to the underside of the roof, and in an accessible
place.
Paragraph 8-1-3. Construction of Stairs.
No stairway shall have a width less than three feet or a minimum
width as prescribed for the various classes of buildings, except private
stairs in buildings of the dwelling house type, and used only by one
family—in which case the minimum width shall be not less than two
feet six inches.
All stairs except as herein otherwise stated, shall have treads and
risers of uniform width and height throughout each flight, and in no
case shall the height of the riser exceed 7% inches, and the tread, ex-
clusive of the nosing, shall be not less than 9% inches wide.
The width of the different stairways in one building need not be
the same.
36 BUILDnIG CODE
Paragraph 8-1-4. Enclosures..
All stairs shall have walls, or well secured balustrades or guards,
on both sides.
Where the second or upper floors of a building are not used in con-
nection with the business of the first floor, stairways serving them
shall be enclosed and such stairways shall lead directly to a street or
alley.
Stairs in the basement of private residences less than three stories
in height will not be required to be enclosed.
Paragraph 8-1-5. Hand Rails.
Except in dwellings, a stairway more than three feet wide shall
have not less than two hand rails. A stairway of seven feet or more
in width shall be further provided with a continuous intermediate hand
rail, substantially supported.
Paragraph 8-1-6. Stair Landings.
In all buildings, no stairway shall ascend to greater height than
13% feet without a level landing, which, if it is in the direction of the
run of the stairs, shall not be less than three feet in length. No landing
shall be less in width than the stair on which it occurs.
Paragraph 8-1-7. Spiral Stairs.
Stairways hereafter erected shall not be spiral stairways nor have
any winders (except in dwellings, winders may be used). However,
circular or elliptical stairways may be used if the width of treads one
foot from the center of the hand rail next to the well hole is not less
than 9% inches.
Section 8-2.
STAIRWAYS IN STORES, FACTORIES, WORK SHOPS, WARE-
HOUSES, LOFTS, OFFICE BUILDINGS, INDUSTRIAL BUILD-
INGS, GARAGES, STABLES, ETC., OVER TWO STORIES
IN HEIGHT.
Paragraph 8-2-1. Number Required.
All buildings under the above mentioned types hereafter erected or
altered, shall be provided with such number of stairways, of such mini-
mum width each as herein prescribed:
In all buildings occupied for the above mentioned purposes, and all
buildings in which a stairway complying with the requirements of this
code cannot be so located as to be within 100 feet of every part of the
floor space of each floor above the first floor, there shall be installed
such additional stairways so that no floor space exceeds a distance of
100 feet from a stairway.
The number of stairs required for a building shall be determined by
the floor area measured on the third floor of the building, and such area
shall not include stairs, elevators, shafts, well holes and corridors, viz.:
In First-Class and Second-Class A Construction. No.of -
Stairways
With floor area of 7,000 square feet of leas...........................: 2
With floor area of 7,000 to 15,000 square feet....................... 3
With floor area of 15,000 to 21,000 square feet'........................ 4
With floor area of 21,000 square feet and over....................... 5
Clwy or FORT Wouni 37
In Second-Class B and C Construction. No.of
Stairways
With floor area of 6,000 square feet or left...................I.......
_... 2
With floor area of 6,000 to 12,000 square feet............................ 3
In Second-Class D and E Construction.
With floor area of 5,000 square feet or Joss-,- ....... 2
With floor area of 5,000 to 10,000 square feet_................::........ 3
Paragraph 8-2-2. Width of Stairs.
The aggregate width of all stairs shall be computed on the basis
of the number of persons allowed in the building above the ground floor
at any one time, with a minimum number of stairs as required by the
floor area.
Each stairway referred to in Paragraph 8-2-1 under the Construc-
tion Classification, shall be not less than three feet wide in the clear,
provided that not more than ten (10) persons are allowed on a floor
for each stairway. If more than ten (10) persons per stairway are
allowed on a floor, then the total aggregate width of all stairways shall
be increased 22 inches for each one hundred (100) persons or fraction
thereof of all persons allowed in the building above the ground floor in
excess of ten (10) persons per stairway per floor.
Paragraph 8-2-3. Adjoining Buildings.
Where two areas of the same building adjoin and are separated by
fireproof dividing walls,they may have a stairway in common, providing
such stairway is not less than 5 feet wide, and is enclosed in all stories
of the buildings by fireproof walls in none-fireproof buildings, and by
fireproof partitions in fireproof buildings; and where the istairways and
landings are built as required by this code of fireproof construction, and
where doors, frames, sash and casings, and the glazed portion thereof,
are built as described in Chapter 11 of this code covering "Fireproofing,"
then in such case such stairway may be considered as equivalent to one
stairway from each such area. Where such stairway provides exit from
only one floor, said stairway may be considered as equivalent to two
stairways, but in no case shall there be less than two stairways in any
such building, except as otherwise provided in this chapter.
Where adjoining building or buildings on opposite sides of an alley
or other open space, are of the same class and used by the same person,
firm or corporation, and are connected by fireproof bridges or passages
with fireproof doors on each end, or by fireproof doors on each floor,
built and equipped as required by this code for dividing wall doors—if
such bridges or passageway or fireproof door is located as far as prac-
ticable from the stairway in both said buildings, then said bridge or
passageway or fireproof door may be considered to be equivalent to a
stairway for each of the two areas.
Paragraph 8-2-4. Interior Stairways.
In buildings of the above classes where an interior stairway is en-
closed in a fireproof shaft built entirely of fireproof material, and pro-
vided with automatic fire doors, and where such stairway and the stair
hall has at least one side on a street or alley, then such stairway may
be considered as equivalent to two stairways, or a stairway and a fire
escape, provided however, that if such stairway is considered the equiva-
lent of two stairways,the building must also be equipped with a stairway
fire escape.
38 BLT"ING ConE
Paragraph 8-2-5. Exterior Stairways.
Exterior stairways in buildings of this class built entirely of iron
and steel having iceproof treads not less than 10 inches wide from nosing
to riser, and a riser of 8 inches or less, and otherwise made as required
for stairway fire escapes, and where such stairway fire escapes extend
from the inside grade of the top floor to the ground with a counter-
balanced section, and has a steel ladder from the top landing to the roof,
then such stairway may be considered the equivalent of an interior stair-
way and one stairway fire escape, if the width of such stairway and
that of the one or more stairways in the building equal the width of
stairs required by this chapter; provided, that in such case the respec-
tive floors,door sills and stairway platforms are flush, and that the doors
do not obstruct the stairs or platforms, and that the doors are each at
least 90 per cent of the width of said stairway and that the windows,
doors and frames passed by such stairways and platforms, are built of
incombustible materials and wire glass.
In buildings of this class, not more than three stories high, a stair-
way fire escape not less than three feet wide, located and built as re-
quired by Sections 8-9 for such fire escapes, and placed as far as prac-
ticable from the stairway, may be considered as a stairway and may be
deducted frotp the width of stairways required for the building.
Section 8-3.
STAIRWAYS IN FLATS AND APARTMENT HOUSES.
Paragraph 8-3-1. General Requirements of Stairs.
In all buildings of this class, all stairways shall extend from the
entrance floor to the roof, and the stairs shall be not less than three feet
two inches wide in the clear. Each apartment in every story shall have
direct access to such stairways.
Paragraph 8-3-2. Exits.
Each stairway shall have an exit to the street at the street level,
or to a court or yard which connects directly into a street or alley.
Paragraph 8-3-3. Closets Under Stairs.
In non-fireproof buildings, no closet of any kind shall be constructed
under any stairway leading from the entrance story to the upper stories,
but such space shall be left entirely open and free from incumbrances.
Paragraph 8-3-4. Number of Stairways.
Every building of this kind containing not more than 20 apartments
or suites of rooms above the entrance floor, shall have at least two
interior stairways and for every additional 20 apartments or fraction
thereof, an additional stairway shall be provided.
If such houses contain not more than 30 apartments above entrance
floor, and the building is of fireproof construction in lieu of additional
stairways, the entrance hallway, stairs and stair hallways may each be
made five feet six inches wide, provided that such stairways be so
located that the entrance to every room in such building shall be within
100 feet from a stairway.
Paragraph 8-3-5. Basement Stairways.
In buildings of this class, cellar and basement stairways may be
located inside the building, but shall not be located underneath the stairs
leading to upper stories; this prohibition shall not apply where base;
ment is the main entrance floor of the house. '
CITY OF FORT WORTH 39
Paragraph 8-3-6. Outside Basement Entrance.
In every building of this class, there shall be an outside entrance
to the basement or other lowest story.
Paragraph 8-3-7. Enclosures.
All stairways coming within the provisions of this section, shall
have surrounding walls of fire resisting materials in non-fireproof build-
ings and of fireproof materials in fireproof buildings.
Section 8-4.
STAIRWAYS IN HOTELS, DORMITORIES, HOSPITALS AND ALL
BUILDINGS WHERE SLEEPING ACCOMMODATIONS
ARE PROVIDED FOR MORE THAN 20 PERSONS.
Paragraph 8-4-1. Extend and Width.
In every building of this class all stairways shall extend from the
entrance floor to the roof and the stairs shall be at least three feet eight
inches wide in the clear. Each room or suite of rooms in such buildings
shall have direct access to such stairways.
Paragraph 8-4-2. Stair Exits.
Each stairway shall have an exit to the street, alley or yard at street
level, or to a lobby approved as adequate by the Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 8-4-3. Interior Stairs.
Every such building containing not more than fifty (50) rooms or
suites of rooms above the entrance floor shall have at least two interior
stairways, and for every additional fifty (50) rooms or suites of rooms
or fraction thereof an additional stairway shall be provided.
However, there shall not be required more than two stairways for
each 300 rooms in such buildings, if of fireproof construction, provided
that the aggregate width of such stairways and stairway halls are
increased 22 inches for each fifty (50) rooms or fraction thereof, above
the first 200 rooms, provided that such stairways be so located thatr the
entrance to every room in such building shall be within 100 feet from a
stairway.
Fire escapes may be included in determining the necessary width
of stairs.
Paragraph 8-4-4. Stair Enclosures.
All stairways coming within the provisions of this paragraph shall
have all surrounding walls of fireproof materials.
Paragraph 8-4-5. Exterior Stairways.
Exterior stairways in buildings of this class built entirely of iron
and steel having iceproof treads not less than 10 inches wide from nosing
to riser, and a riser of 8 inches or less, and otherwise made as required
for stairway fire escapes, and where such stairway fire escapes extend
from the inside grade of the top floor to the ground with a counter-
balanced section, and has a steel ladder from the top landing to the
roof, then such stairway may be considered the equivalent of an interior
stairway and one stairway fire escape, if the width of such stairway and
that of the one or more stairways in the building equal the width of
stairs required by this chapter; provided, that in such case the respective
_^ floors, door sills and stairway platforms are flush, and that the doors
do not obstruct the stairs or platforms, and that the doors are each at
40 .
least 901110 of the width of said stairway and that the windows, doors and
frames passed by such stairways and platforms, are built of incom-
bustible materials and wire glass.
In buildings of this class, not more than three stories high, a stair-
way fire escape not less than three feet wide, located and built as re-
quired by Section 8-9 for such fire escapes, and placed as far as prac-
ticable from the stairway, may be considered as a stairway and may be
deducted from the width of stairways required for the building.
Section 8.5.
STAIRWAYS IN PUBLIC HALLS, CHURCHES, CLUB AND LODGE
HALLS, AND ALL BUILDINGS USED FOR PUBLIC
OR PRIVATE GATHERINGS.
Paragraph 8-5-1. Width and Number of Stairs.
In every building hereafter erected or altered, to be used in whole
or in part as a public hall, church, club or lodge hall, the width of the
stairs shall be 22 inches for every one hundred (100) persons of the
aggregate seating capacity of all rooms, provided no stairway shall be
less than 4 feet wide in the clear, and that all public halls, roof gardens,
churches, clubs, and lodge halls, two stories or over in height, are pro-
vided with. at least two separate and distinct stairways. Fire escapes
shall be included in determining the necessary width of stairs.
Paragraph 8-5-2. Winders Prohibited.
All such stairs shall be without winders and have the treads and
risers of a uniform width and height.
Section 8-6.
STAIRWAYS IN THEATRES.
Paragraph 8-6-1. Number and Width of Stairways.
Every building hereafter erected or altered and used as a theatre -
or place of amusement shall have the entrance stairways equivalent in
width to 22 inches for each 100 of seating capacity, and no such stair-
way shall be less than five feet wide in the clear.
Fire escapes or emergency stairways shall NOT be included in
determining the width of stairways but shall be provided according to
Paragraph'32-1-58, and of at least equal capacity to entrance stairways
serving each tier above the main floor.
Paragraph 8-6-2. Hand Rails.
All such stairways shall have hand rails on each side thereof, and
when seven feet and over in width, shall be provided with a center hand
rail.
Paragraph 8-6-3. Treads, Risers and Landings.
In no case shall the risers of any stairs exceed 7% inches in height
or shall the treads, exclusive of nosings, be less than 10% inches wide.
When stairs return directly on themselves, a landing of the full width
of both flights shall be provided.
The stairs turning at an angle shall have a proper landing without
winders introduced at said turn.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 41
Section 8-7.
STAIRWAYS IN SCHOOL BUILDINGS.
Paragraph 8-7-1. Number and Width of Stairs.
In all buildings hereafter erected or altered for the use of any
school, the stairways must be equivalent in width to 30 inches to every
one hundred (100) of seating capacity of the auditorium, assembly
rooms, and school rooms; provided however, that the number of persons
allowed in such building at any time shall be limited by the width of
stairways available as exits therefrom.' In every school house two or
more stories in height, two or more stairways shall be provided, not less
than 4 feet in the clear, and shall be placed at opposite ends of the build-
ing or as far apart as practicable.
No riser in any stairway shall be over 6% inches high nor shall
the tread be less than 11 inches.
All stairways shall have railings on each side thereof and no stair-
way shall ascend a greater height than 13 feet without a level landing,
the dimensions of which ir. the direction of the run of the stairs shall
be of not less width than the width of the stairs.
No windows shall be permitted on any stairs within six feet of
floor line.
Section 8-8.
EXITS DOORS, CORRIDORS AND MEANS OF EGRESS.
Paragraph 8-8-1. Number of Exits and Location.
Every building, except dwellings and every story in each building
above the first shall have at least two means of exit remote from each
other; one of these open to a street or passage leading directly to the
street, and one may be open to a yard or other space deemed safe by
the Building Commissioner, and of sufficient area to accommodate all
persons in the building. Two means of exit remote from each other shall
be provided from each story of a dwelling, when three stories or over in
height. (Fire escapes are classed as exits.)
Paragraph 8-8-2. Width of Exits.
When exit doorways have a clear width of at least 40 inches each
the aggregate widths of doorways shall be equal to the required width
of corridor or stairway served-by same. When individual doors are less
than 40 inches wide, there shall be one doorway for each 22 inches of
required width of corridor leading to same. Every doorway shall be at
least 27 inches wide in the clear. All passageway exit doors shall swing
in the direction of exit travel except in the case of horizontal exits, where
direction of travel may be indeterminable.
Paragraph 8-8-3. Doors to Open Out.
The entrance and exit doors of all hotels, churches, lodge halls, court
houses, assembly halls, theatres, opera houses, colleges and public school
houses, and other structures where the hazard is deemed sufficient by
the Building Commissioner,and the entrance doors to all class and assem-
bly rooms in all public school buildings shall open outward and shall not
be fastened against exit or so the same cannot be easily opened from
within.
Paragraph 8-8-4. Number of Doorways.
Every room having an occupancy of more than seventy-five (75)
persons shall have at least 2 doorways remote from each other, leading
to exits.
MGM
42 BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 8-8-5. Hallways and Corridors.
Hallways or corridors at the street or court level furnishing exit
from stairways shall be not less in width than the aggregate width of
the required stairways which they serve. Every hallway or corridor
which may serve as an exit for 50 or more persons shall have at least
44 inches of width for the first 50 persons and 6 inches additional for
each additional 50 persons to be accommodated thereby. This computa-
tion shall be based on the number of persons in the story having the
largest occupancy served by said corridor.
Paragraph 8-8-6. Locks on Loft Doors.
At all times when any loft or space is occupied for manufacturing
or mercantile purposes, the fastenings or locks on exit doors shall be
easily opened from the inside without the use of keys.
Paragraph 8-8-7. Exit or Elevator Signs.
A clearly painted sign marked "EXIT" in letters not less than
6 inches in height shall be placed over all exits in the buildings specified
under 8-8-3. The elevators shall be provided with similar signs marked
"ELEVATOR." Such signs shall be illuminated when necessary by means
of artificial lighting.
Paragraph 8-8-8. Engineers' Stationary Ladders.
Every building in which high pressure steam boilers or ammonia
refrigerating machinery are placed in the cellar or lowest story shall
have stationary iron ladders or stairs from such story leading direct to a
manhole through the.sidewalk or other outside exit in addition to another
approved means of entrance and exit. The manhole through the side-
walk must not be locked but may be secured by a latch, usually operated
from the inside.
Section 8-9.
FIRE ESCAPES.
Paragraph 8-9-1. Where Required.
Fire escapes shall be provided on all buildings as required by the
Texas Fire Escape Law of the latest issue, as quoted hereinafter, and
also where otherwise required as herein provided.
Paragraph 8-9-2. Special Hazards.
The location of all fire escapes shall meet with the approval of the
Building Commissioner, and where they are peculiar, unusual and ex-
treme hazards, fire escapes in addition to those provided for by the
Texas Fire Escape Law shall be installed as directed by the Building
Commissioner.
Paragraph 8-9-3. Metal Windows Passed by Fire Escapes.
Where fire escapes are required on buildings hereafter erected or
constructed, the windows by which they pass shall have approved metal
frames, metal sash and wire glass.
Paragraph 8-9-4. Inspection Fee.
Where fire escapes are installed on existing buildings, an inspection
fee of five ($5.00) dollars for each two stories or fraction thereof served,
shall be paid the Building Commissioner in addition to the Building
Permit Fee as required in in Chapter 1. However, in no event shall this
inspection fee exceed the sum of fifteen ($16.00) dollars on any one
fire escape.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 43
Paragraph 8-9-5. Texas.Fire Escape Law.
Herewith below is quoted the Fire Escape Law of the State of
Texas, Revised Statutes 1925:
"Art. 3955. OWNER TO PROVIDE. The owner of each build-
ing which is or may be constructed within this State, three or more
stories in height, constructed, used or intended to be used in whole or
in part as any of the following buildings, shall provide and equip such
building with at least one adequate fire escape, and such additional fire
escape, as provided in the three succeeding articles.
"Art. 3956. HOTELS, THEATRES; ETC. For each hospital,
seminary, college, academy, school house, dormitory, hotel, lodging
house, apartment house, rooming house, boarding house, house for the
accommodation of transient guests, lodge hall, theatre, public place or
amusement, or hall or place used for public gatherings, having a lot
area in excess of five thousand square feet, there shall be provided
with one additional adequate fire escape for each five thousand square
feet, of such excess or fraction thereof if such fraction exceeds two
thousand square feet.
"Art. 3957. OFFICES AND PLANTS. For each office building,
wholesale or retail mercantile establishment or stare, work shop, or
manufacturing establishment or industrial plant, having a lot area in
excess of six thousand square feet, there shall be provided one additional
adequate fire escape for each six thousand square feet of such excess
or fraction thereof if such fraction exceeds twenty-five hundred square
feet.
"Art 3958. WAREHOUSES AND MILLS. For each warehouse,
storage house or mill building, having a lot area in excess of eight
thousand square feet, there shall be pro*ded one additional adequate
fire escape for each eight thousand square Yeet of such excess, or frac-
tion thereof if such fraction exceeds thirty-five hundred square feet.
The provisions of this title requiring the construction of standard fire
escapes, shall not apply to grain elevators of steel, or steel and con-
crete construction, nor to wooden elevators where less than five persons
are employed.
"Art. 3959. STATE, COUNTY AND CITY BUILDINGS. Each
building which is or may be constructed within this State three or more
stories in height, which is owned by this State, or by any city, county
or school district, and in which building public assemblies are permitted
or intended to be permitted, or in which schools of any kind are con-
ducted, or in which sleeping apartments are permitted or intended to be
permitted, on any floor above the first, shall be provided and equipped
with at least one adequate fire espace if the lot area of such building
shall not exceed five thousand square feet, and one additional adequate
fire escape for each five thousand square feet, or fraction thereof if
such fraction exceeds two thousand square feet in excess of the first
five thousand square feet of lot area.
"Art. 3960. OFFICIALS TO PROVIDE. Each board, commission,
official or person having charge or supervision of any building included
in the preceding article, or having charge or supervision ,of the let-
ting of contracts for the construction of such buildings, shall fully
comply with the provisions of this title relating to providing and
equipping such buildings with adequate fire escapes.
"Art. 3961. `OWNER' DEFINED. The terms `Owner' within the
meaning of this title, shall include persons, firms, associations or private
corporations.
"Art. 3962. `STORY' DEFINED. The word `Story' as used in this
title, shall be construed to have its usual and ordinary meaning as applied
44 BUII.D�NIG p
to architecture, and in addition thereto shall be construed to include a
basement of any building that extends five feet or more above grade line
on one or more sides of such building, a balcony or mezzanine floor of
any building, a roof of any building used as a roof garden, and an attic
of any building used for any purpose.
"Art. 3963. `ADEQUATE FIRE ESCAPE.' An `Adequate Fire
Escape'within the meaning of this title, is defined to be an exterior iron,
steel or concrete stairway type fire escape, or an exterior iron or steel
straight chute type fire escape, or an exterior iron or steel spiral chute
type fire escape, or a combination of said three types, or an interior type
fire escape enclosed with non-combustible material and having self-clos-
ing fireproof shutters on all door and window openings thereof. Each
type of such fire escapes shall be so constructed and arranged as to
permit exit upon such fire escape from each floor of the building above
the first floor and shall provide a continual egress upon it from such
building to grade, and the material, construction, erection and test.of
such fire escapes shall comply at least with the minimum specifications
for each respective type thereof, as hereinafter set forth.
"Art. 3964. LOCATION. All such fire escapes shall, consistent
with accessibility, be located as far as possible from stairways, eleva-
tor hatchways, and other openings in the floor, and where possible, they
shall be located at the end of hallways or corridors or unobstructed
passageways, and as far as is consistent with the construction and loca-
tion of the building.
"Art.3965. GUIDE SIGNS AND EXIT LIGHTS. In all such build-
ings there shall be installed and maintained therein in good condition at
all times, at least one red light at each exit to each fire escape, and one
guide sign at each hall or corridor intersection, and one additional guide
sign for every twenty-five lineal feet of hallway or corridor leading
to such fire escape. All exit lights shall have painted thereon the
words, `Fire Escape Exit' and all guide signs shall have painted thereon
the words, `Fire Escape,' and an arrow or hand pointing to the nearest
fire escape exit. It shall be unlawful for any person to obstruct any fire
escape in any manner that would prevent free access thereto or free
use.thereof, or to obstruct any hallway corridor or entrance leading to
such fire escape by means of any door provided with locks requiring
a key to operate, or by partitions or by any objects of any kind what-
soever.
"Art. 3966. MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS. The minimum speci-
fications for the several types of adequate fire escapes required by this
law are as follows;
EXTERIOR STAIRWAY TYPE.
"(1) Shall consist of balconies and stairways on the exterior of
the building and be constructed of iron, steel or reinforced concrete, and
shall be in superimposed form or straight run form, or superimposed
form with intermediate balconies, or a combination of any such form
and type.
"(2) Balconies. Balconies for stairs in superimposed form at-
tached to the building at two or more floors, shall equal in length the
horizontal length of the stair runs, plus an amount at each end equal
to the width of the stairs, and shall be as long as the width of the open-
ing for exit in the building wall and shall•be at least fifty inches wide
inside of railings. Balconies for stairs in superimposed form with in-
termediate balconies attached to the building at two or more floors shall
be not less in width than the combined width of the stairways connected
therewith leading both up and down, and the landings, at the head and
foot of the stairs shall be as deep as the width of the stairs, and shall
Czwx w 45
be as long as the width of the opening for exit in the building wall.
Balconies tor stairs in straight run form shall be not less in width than
the width of the stairs and as long as the width of the opening for exit
in the building wall. The minimum unobstructed width of any exterior
passageway in the entire fire escape, whether parallel to the building or
at rignt angles to it, shall be 24 inches. The floors of iron or steel dal-
comes shall be solid or of slats and if solid, shall have scoriated surface
to prevent slipping and pitched not less than %-inch in ten feet to se-
cure drainage, or it of slats, shall be placed not more than %-inch apart
and securea in place with rivets or bolts. Material in floors shall be not
less than 3/16-inch thick. Railing enclosures of all balconies shall be
not less than 2 feet 9 inches high, and if of vertical and horizontal
slat or grill construction, no space shall have the horizontal width of
more than 8 inches, and if of truss construction, the span of each panel
shall not exceed 3 feet. No opening in railing enclosures on any con-
struction shall exceed two square feet in area. All railing enclosures
throughout their lengths shall be free from obstruction tending
to break handholds and the passage space shall be smooth and free
from obstruction or projections. All railing enclosures shall be de-
signed to withstand a horizontal pressure oz 200 pounds per running
foot of railing without serious deflection. Balconies shall ue anchorea
to building with bolts not less than 1-inch in diameter, extending
through the wall and provided with wall bearing plate on the inside
not less than 5 inches square and %-inch thick or anchored by such
bolts set in concrete or masonry or made integral in new buildings.
Balconies shall never be placed above and not more than one foot
below the top of the sill of the opening for exit in building wall, pref-
erably level with sill. Concrete balconies shall comply with all re-
quirements herein set forth and be made of reinforced concrete, the
concrete to be 1 part cement, 2 parts sand and 4 parts stone or gruoel.
Railing enclosures of concrete balconies shall be as herein specified, or
of reinforced concrete, with balusters spaced not over one foot apart.
"(3) Stairs. The pitch of the stairways shall not exceed 9 de-
grees. Treads shall be not less than 8 inches wide, exclusive of nosings,
and not less than 24 inches long and placed so that the rise, either
open or closed, shall not exceed 8 inches, and if solid shall have scoriated
surface, and if made of slats they shall be placed not more than %-
inch apart and be well secured in place by bolts or rivets. Material
in treads shall be not less than 3/16-inch thick. Railings shall be pro-
vided on both sides of stair, not less than 2 feet 9 inches high, as meas-
ured vertically from the center of stair treads, and supported by balus-
ters spaced not exceeding 5 feet apart. Intermediate rail shall be
provided midway between top rail and stair stringers, or if interme-
diate rail is omitted, balusters shall be placed not over 1 foot apart.
Railings on stairs shall permit not less than 24 inches unobstructed pas-
sageway, and shall be designed to withstand a horizontal pressure of
200 pounds per running foot of railing without serious deflection.
Concrete stairs shall comply with all requirements herein set forth
and be made of reinforced concrete, concrete mixture to be as herein
specified for concrete balconies. Railing enclosures of concrete stairs
shall be as herein specified, or of reinforced concrete balustrade with
balusters spaced not over 1 foot apart. Stairways shall be built sta-
tionary to grade where possible and this shall be required in. such
buildings as schools and hospitals. Where fire escapes terminate over
streets, alleys or private driveways, or like conditions, and shall ter-
minate in a hinged and counter-balanced section of stairway, the con-
struction of such section of stair shall conform with the stationary parts
of stairways and shall be so balanced that the weight of one person
on third or fourth tread will lower same to landing. Bearings for such
46 BUILDING CODE
counter-balanced stairs shall be either bronze bushings or have sufficient
clearance, provided to prevent sticking on account of corrosion. No
latch or lock shall be attached to the counter-balanced stair in pup posi
tion but latch shall be provided to hold stair in down_position when
same has once been swung to ground. The connection between stair
railings_on the stationary part and the counter-balanced part of stair-
ways shall be designed to prevent probability of injury to persons using
said fire escape. Where necessary, a suitable opening shall be provided
in any awning, roof or other intervening obstruction, to admit counter-
balanced stair and permit passage of persons thereon.
11(4) Roof Connection. Exterior stairway type .fire escapes shall
be connected with the roof of building to which attached. If the roof
of the building is such that escapes by way of the.roof might be neces-
sary, the fire escape shall extend to the roof. If the connection is
only for fire department use, it shall be made with a ladder of the
gooseneck type, the stringers of which shall be of material at least
%-inch thick and the rungs shall be at least %-inch in diameter, 16
inches long and not exceeding 14 inches apart. Said ladder shall be
anchored to the wall.
"(5) Clearance. The minimum clearance at all points on bal-
conies and stairs as measured vertically shall be 6 feet 6 inches.
EXTERIOR CHUTE TYPE.
"(1) Shall consist of balconies and straight gravity chutes on the
exterior of the building and constructed of iron or steel and placed at
an angle not to exceed 45 degrees, and shall be in superimposed form,
parallel to or at right angles to the building, or straight run form
parallel to or at right angles to the building, or a combination of these
two forms.
"(2) Balconies. Shall be the same as herein specified in subdi-
vision two of specifications for exterior iron, steel or concrete stairway
type fire escape.
"(3) Chute. Shall be made of material of not less than No. 14
gauge iron or steel, blue annealed or equal, and shall be such as will
take a smooth or polished surface. The chute shall be 20 inches wide
and 18 inches deep, inside dimensions, and free from obstructions, or
sharp edges throughout its length, and in cross section shall have con-
cave bottom and straight sides. The top edges of the chute shall be
stiffened and protected throughout its length with iron or steel angles,
free from any sharp edges,and the angles of size necessary to carry the
maximum loading possible and the chute shall be reinforced crosswise,
underneath with iron or steel angles. A landing of same material as
the chute shall be provided at the lower end of the chute, and shall be
of sufficient length, in proportion to the length of the chute and the
concavity of its surface, to check the momentum attained through
gravity and afford a safe stop. Such landing shall be 6 inches wider
on each side than the chute where wall construction will not interfere,
and there shall be no sharp edges or ragged projections exposed, and
said landing shall rest upon and be anchored to concrete base not less
than 6 inches thick. All rivets exposed inside of chute and on top side
of landing to be countersunk and ground down smooth. Intervening
balconies and the chute also, shall be so constructed that a continuous
gravity slide will be afforded from the top floor to the grade, and the
chute shall be accessible at all floors.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 47
EXTERIOR SPIRAL CHUTE TYPE.
"(1) Shall consist of balconies in superimposed form and spiral
gravity chute on the exterior of the building and constructed of iron
or steel.
"(2) Balconies. To be the same as herein specified in subdivision
two of specifications of Exterior Type, steel or concrete stairway type
fire escape.
"(3) Chute. Slideway shall be made of material of not less than
No. 16 gauge iron or steel, blue annealed or equal, and shall be such as
will take a smooth or polished surface. The chute shall be not less than
30 inches wide inside, with the slideway banked at the outer edge to
prevent a passenger being thrown against guard rail or enclosure, and
enclosed by either a continuance wall or a guard rail, the material of
which shall not be less than No. 18 gauge iron or steel and said guard
rail shall be not less than 30 inches high. The entire slideway shall
be free from obstructions or sharp edges and all rivets exposed inside to
be countersunk and ground down smooth. The chute shall be con-
structed in helical or.spiral form around a central column, resting on
and anchored to concrete base not less than 18 inches thick. The chute
shall terminate not more than 2 feet above the grade and be so con-
structed and arranged that normal landing,will be in a standing posi-
tion. Intervening balconies, and the chute also, shall be so constructed
that a continuous gravity slide will be afforded from the top floor to
the grade, and the chute shall be accessible at all floors.
INTERIOR TYPE.
"(1) Shall be a stairway type constructed of iron, steel or concrete
or straight chute type constructed of iron or steel or spiral chute type
constructed of iron or steel, either of which types erected on the in-
terior of the building to be enclosed with non-combustible material and
all door and window openings in such enclosures protected with self-
dosing fireproof shutters.
"(2) Balconies or Landings. Balconies or landings to be the same
construction as specified for balconies in subdivision No. 2 of specifica-
tions for exterior iron, steel or concrete stairway type fire escapes,
except that such balconies shall permit not less than 40 inches unob-
structed passageway,'and such balconies or landing shall be provided'
and erected on the interior of the enclosing wall on a level with the
floors of the building to be served.
"(3) Stairway Type. Stairs to be same construction as specified
for stairs in Sub-division No. 3 of specifications for Exterior Iron, Steel
or Concrete Stairway Type Fire Escapes, except that such stairs shall
permit not less than 40 inches unobstructed passageway in all its parts.
Stairs known as-`Spirals' or `Winders' shall not be permitted.
"(4) Straight Chute Type. The chute to be the same as herein
specified in Sub-division No. 3 of the specifications for Exterior Iron
or Steel Straight Chute Type Fire Escapes.
"(li) Spiral Chutes. The chute to be the same as herein specified
in Sub-division No. 3 of the specifications for Exterior Iron or Steel
Spiral Chute Type Fire Escape.
"(6) Access. They shall be accessible from all parts of the build-
ing which they are designed to serve, and all lobbies, halls and passage-
ways on each floor leading to fire escapes and in connection therewith,
shall be not less than 36 inches wide and not less than 6 feet 6 inches
high, and shall be level with the floor upon which it opens and serves.
They shall be so constructed at lower end as to permit direct egress to
the outside of the building at grade: All interior stairway type fire
48 BUILDING CODE
escapes shall be continuous starting at ground gloor and shall never
descend to any basement, and shall extend through roof of the building
and terminate in a pent house constructed of non-combustible material
with self-closing fire door as herein specified.
"(7) Enclosing Walls. The following materials may be used for
enclosing walls of interior escapes:
(a) Brick or plain solid concrete not less than 8 inches in thickness
for the uppermost 30 feet, increasing 4 inches in thickness for each
lower section of 30 feet or part thereof, or.8 inches in thickness for the
entire height when wholly supported at intervals not exceeding 80 feet. F
(b) Reinforced stone or gravel concrete not less than 5 inches in
thickness for the uppermost 30 feet, increasing 2 inches in thickness for
each lower section of 30 feet or part thereof, or 3 inches in thickness
for entire height when supported at vertical intervals not exceeding 20
feet, and braced where necessary with lateral supports or suitable steel
uprights.
(c) Reinforced cinder concrete not less than 5 inches in thickness
for the entire height when supported at vertical intervals not exceeding
15 feet, and braced where necessary with lateral supports or suitable
steel uprights.
(d) Hollow terra cotta blocks laid in cement• mortar not less
than 5 inches thick over all, or hollow concrete blocks of either stone
or cinder concrete mortar, not less than 5 inches thick over all, or
solid.or hollow blocks, consisting of gypsum containing not more than
25% by weight of cinders, asbestos fibre, wood chips or vegetable fibre,
laid in gypsum plaster or cement mortar tempered with lime, not less
than 5 inches thick over all, or metal lath on steel studding covered with
Portland cement mortar or gypsum plaster of a finished thickness of
not less than 2 inches in the case of solid partitions, nor less than 3
inches in the case of hollow partitions. All openings in such walls or
partitions shall have substantial steel framing, the vertical members of
which shall be securely attached to the floor construction above and
below.
"(8) Door and Window Openings. All door openings shall be
protected by the use of an automatic or self-closing fire door of standard
manufacture, bearing Underwriters label, and where automatic fire doors
are used,the same shall be enclosed in recess partitions. All doors shall
be so arranged and equipped to remain in closed position at all times and
under all conditions except during actual use. All window openings shall
have metal sash, bearing Underwriters label, and wire glass.
"(9) Lighting. All interior fire escapes shall be provided with
not less than one light at each landing equal to a ten-watt electric
globe, in a separate circuit from that of the building, arranged to
operate should the regular lighting system of the building be dis-
abled.
11(10) Painting. All fire escapes of any type constructed of iron
or steel shall have at least two coats of good metallic paint when
erected and shall be painted as frequently thereafter as may be neces-
sary to preserve from rust or climatic influences and at least once
every two years. The sliding surface of either the straight chute or
spiral chute type fire escape shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted
at least once each year.
"Art. 3968. TESTS. Upon completion and before final approval
of any fire escape of any of the type specified herein, both exterior
and interior, such fire escape shall be tested by the erector by the ap-
plication of a live load of 160 pounds per square foot of area of balcony
floor and stair treads, or a dead load of 240 pounds per square foot
CITY OF FORT WORTH 49
of area of balcony floor and stair treads, in either case simultaneously
imposed upon each balcony and the stairway connected therewith lead-
ing both up and down. Sand, gravel, concrete blocks or any other
suitable commodity may be used in applying these tests, but the load
must be accurately weighed and applied as specified herein. By the
+ dead load is meant a load placed in position in whole or in part by any
mechanical means and without any person being on the fire escape at
the time the test is made, and by live load is meant a load placed in
position by mechanical means or by persons and with persons on the
fire escape as part of the load at the time the test is made.
"Art. 3969. AFFIDAVIT. Such tests shall be conducted in the
presence of the State Fire Marshal or a representative duly appointed by
him, or the chief of any fire department, or the city fire marshal of
any city or town. If the State Fire Marshal or his representative, or
a chief of a fire department, or a city fire marshal cannot be present to
witness such test, such officials may permit the erector to furnish an
affidavit, setting forth that the minimum test herein specified has been
made and that the fire escape has fully withstood said test and may
accept such affidavit in lieu of the personal presence of such officials.
"Art. 3970. COMPLETION BEFORE OCCUPANCY. All buildings
constructed hereafter and within the provisions of this title providing
for the equipment of buildings with fire escapes, shall be so provided
and equipped, and otherwise meet all requirements of this law, before
such buildings are occupied or used in whole or in part.
"Art. 3971. INSPECTION. All fire escapes, extensions and addi-
tions to fire escapes constructed and erected under the provisions of this
law, shall be inspected by the State Fire Marshal, or any inspector of
the State Insurance Commission, or the chief of the fire department
of any city or town, or any city fire marshal, before being approved,
and no fire escape, extension or addition shall be approved, unless the
same conforms to and meets all the provisions of this law.
"Art. 3972. INJUNCTION. The Attorney General, or the county
attorney of any county in which any building is maintained in violation
of any provision of this title, or the district attorney of any district in
which such building is located, may proceed by suit or injunction against
the owner, or person, board, commission, or official having charge of
such buildings, to enforce the provisions of this title. Such suit or in-
junction shall be brought in the name of this State in the district,court
of the county in which such building is located. Such suit or injunction
may be prosecuted by the Attorney General, county or district attorney
upon their own motion or upon the relation of any individual, or any
person mentioned in the preceding article. District courts and the judges
thereof may issue mandatory injunctions and other writs against any
such owner, person, board, commission or official, to enforce the pro-
visions of this title. A disobedience of such injunction shall constitute
a contempt of court and be punishable as now provided by law for con-
tempts. Injunctions in such cases may be heard and granted either in
term time or vacation, after the defendant has been given ten days'
notice of the time and place set for the hearing of same. .
PENAL CODE: FIRE ESCAPES.
"Art. 869. VIOLATION OF FIRE ESCAPE LAW. Any owner of
any building required by law to be equipped with adequate fire escapes,
who shall fail or refuse to comply with any provision of the statutes
regulating fire escapes, or any person who shall obstruct, any fire
escape or hallway or entrance leading thereto, so as to prevent free
access to or use of either, shall be fined not less than Twenty ($20.00)
Dollars nor more than Fifty ($60.00) Dollars. If such owner be a
50 BUILDING CODE
corporation, each officer or member of the board of directors, thereof,
shall be subject to such fine. Each day's failure or refusal to comply
with any provision of said law is a separate offense.
"Art. 870. VIOLATION BY AGENT. If the owner of any build-
ing within the provisions of said law be a non-resident of this State,
and such owner fails, neglects or refuses to comply with any provisions t
of said law, it shall be unlawful for any person within this State to
represent such non-resident owner as an agent in the case, management,
supervision, control or renting of such building, and whoever violates
this article shall be punished as provided in the preceding article. Each
day that such agent so represents such non-resident owner is a separate
offense.
Chapter 9.
CHIMNEYS, FLUES, STACKS AND FIREPLACES.
Section 9-1.
CHIMNEY CONSTRUCTION.
Paragraph 9-1-1. Materials and Height.
All chimneys hereafter erected shall be of brick or stone, rein-
forced concrete or other approved incombustible material, extending at
least 4 feet above the point of contact with a flat roof, or 2 feet above
the edge of a pitch roof, and shall be properly capped with terra cotta,
stone, cast iron or concrete. All chimneys less than 8 inches thick shall
be provided with flue lining, laid in Portland cement mortar. All chim-
neys, excepting when concrete or stuccoed, shall be built of hard brick
from a point 18 inches below roof to top of chimney. All walls to be
at least 4 inches thick, exclusive of lining, and no brick to be set on
edge. Every flue where practicable, must be provided with cleanout
door at bottom.
Paragraph 9-1-2. Multiple Flues.
Where two or more smoke flues are contained in the same chimney,
the walls between the several flues shall be not less than 4 inches thick.
The walls of stone smoke flues shall be 4 inches thicker than required
for brick or reinforced concrete. No smoke flues shall have smoke
pipe connections in more than two stories of a building.
Flues from incinerators shall be independent of any other flues, and
shall have no openings other than for incinerator itself.
Paragraph 9-1-3. Area of Flue and Flue Lining.
Every smoke flue contained in a chimney herein after erected shall
have an area of at least sixty-four (64) square inches. The flue lining
shall start from the bottom of the flue, or from the throat of the fire-
place, if the flue starts from a fireplace, and shall be carried up con-
tinuously the entire height of the flue. All such lining tile shall be
laid in cement mortar and the tile shall be built in as the flues are
carried up.
Paragraph 9-1-4. Corbeling and Framing.
In no case shall a chimney be corbeled more than 8 inches from
the wall, and such corbeling shall consist of at least five courses of
brick. Piers which support chimneys shall start from the foundation
on the same line with the chimney breast. They shall be not less than
12 inches in the face and shall be properly bonded into the walls. No
combustible framing or sheathing shall be placed within 1 inch of any
CITY OF FORT WORTH 51
smoke flue or chimney breast. Chimney must be run up plumb except
for permissible corbeling of eight inches.
Paragraph 9-1-5. Flues for High Pressure Systems.
The smoke flue of every high pressure steam boiler and every
appliance producing a corresponding temperature, in the smoke flue,
shall, if built with brick, stone, reinforced concrete or other approved
masonry be lined on all sides with not less than 4 inches of fire brick
laid in fire mortar from a point 3 feet below to a point at least 25 feet
above the place where the smoke connection of the boiler enters the flue.
Paragraph 9-1-6. Interior Metal Stacks.
Interior vertical smoke stacks or flues for steam boilers or other
furnaces, and similar heating devices producing a corresponding tem-
perature, may be of metal not less than No. 10 U. S. gauge, properly
riveted, jointed and braced at intervals of at least 20 feet. Such stacks
shall be enclosed by approved masonry walls not less than S inches
thick with an air space of at least 4 inches between lining and wall.
Paragraph 9-1-7. Exterior Metal Stacks.
Exterior metal smoke flues for boilers, large cooking ranges and
similar heating devices shall be of approved construction and supported
on approved masonry foundations, and shall have a clearance of at
least 4 inches from the outside wall. Such flues having an area not
exceeding 255 square inches shall be constructed of not less than No. 16
U. S. gauge metal; if the area exceeds 255 square inches the thickness
of the metal shall be not less than No. 10 U. S. gauge.
Paragraph 9-1-5. Chimneys on Lean-To's.
Chimneys within city limits on lean-to's of present structures and
structures to be erected, where they are lower than the main roof and
are considered dangerous to fire, shall be raised to a point of 2 feet 6
inches above the main roof, either by raising the brick work or by gal-
vanized iron smoke pipe.
Paragraph 9-1-9. Height of Chimney on Blast Furnaces, etc.
Chimneys of cupola furnaces, blast furnaces and similar devices
shall extend at least 10 feet above the highest point of any roof within
radius of 50 feet and no wood work shall be within 3 feet of any part
of such device or its chimney.
Paragraph 9-1-10. Flue Hole Covers.
All flue holes when not in use shall be closed with tight fitting
metal covers.
Paragraph 9-1-11. Framing Around Fireplaces and Hearth Construc-
tion.
All fireplaces and chimney breasts where mantels are placed,
whether intended for ordinary fireplace use or not, shall have trimmer
arches or other approved fireproof construction supporting hearths. The
arches and hearths shall be at least 20 inches in width, measured from
the face of the chimney breast. The arches shall be of brick, stone,
terra cotta, or reinforced concrete of approved thickness.
The trimmer arch and the length of the hearth shall be not less
than the width of the chimney breast. The hearth shall be of brick,
stone, tile or other approved fireproof material.
Paragraph 9-1-12. Miscellaneous Provisions as to Fireplaces.
No coal burning heater shall be placed in a fireplace which does
not conform to the foregoing requirements and have an incombustible
52 BUILDING CODE
mantel. No wood mantel or other woodwork shall be placed within 8
inches of the side nor within 12 inches of the top of the opening of
any fireplace. No combustible summer piece or fire board shall be used
in connection with any open fireplace. The firebacks of all fireplaces
shall be of solid masonry, not less than 8 inches thick, the inside face
of which must be of fire brick.
Paragraph 9-1-13. Foundations.
Chimneys shall not rest upon or be carried by wood floors, wood
beams or brackets, nor be hung from wooden rafters, but masonry shall
be built from foundations up in all cases, including frame buildings.
Paragraph 9-1-14. Change in Dimensions.
No change in the exterior dimensions of chimneys shall be made
within a distance of 12 inches above or below the rafters or roof
joists.
Paragraph 9-1-15. Flue Intake Openings.
Flue intake openings shall be at least 18 inches below wooden lath
and plaster, or other combustible ceilings or open joists, unless the sur-
face above the pipe is protected within combustible materials. No wood
work shall be placed within 6 inches of a thimble.
Paragraph 9-1-16. Clearance From Wood.
Tops of furnaces shall not be less, than I foot below wooden joists,
and such joists shall be protected by Portland cement plaster or gypsum
on metal lath, or No. 24 U. S. gauge sheet iron, hung;2 inches below
joists and extending 2 feet beyond furnaces on all sides.
No metal smoke pipe shall pass through any wooden floor, parti-
tion or roof, nor through any closet, attic or similarly concealed space.
Metal smoke pipes shall not be within 2 feet of any unprotected wood
work, or within 1 foot of wood work if same is protected as required
in the preceding paragraph.
Chapter 10.
ROOF, ROOF STRUCTURES, ROOF COVERINGS AND
SHEET METAL.
Section 10-1.
ROOF COVERINGS.
Paragraph 10-1-1. Dwellings, Frame Buildings.
On buildings, outside of Zones 1 and 2, not exceeding two stories
or 30 feet in height and 2,500 feet in area, and not used for factories,
warehouses or mercantile purposes, the quality of roofing shall be of a
grade which will rank not lower than Class C under test specifications
of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, or edge grain wood shingles.
If shingles are used they must be made to meet the following require-
ments and be laid as herein provided. The thickness of five shingles,
measured to the butts must not be less than two inches. The measure-
ment of wood shingles to the wind shall be on roofs of one-third pitch,
or more, 16 inches-5 inches, 18 inches-5% inches, 24 inches-
7% inches. On roofs of less than one-third pitch, 16 inches-4 inches, 18
inches-4Y2 inches, 24 inches-6% inches. Shingles to be laid with broken
joints or side lap not less than 11h inches with no breaks directly over
each other on any three consecutive courses. 'All nails to be covered.
CITY of I.+ow WuRTH 53
First course the eaves to be laid two-ply projection 2 inches over crown
mold with.1-inch projection at gables. Shingles to be nailed with 3%d
or 4d galvanized shingle nails, cut iron, copper, zinc or zinc coated shin-
gle nails, with two nails to each shingle % to % inches from the sides.
Shingles to be thoroughly wet before laying. If stained, shingles must be
dry before dipping and dipped to at least 8 inches from the butt.
Paragraph 10-1-2. Other Classes of Buildings.
Roof covering of all buildings within Zone 1 and Zone 2, shall
have roof coverings of approved standard quality, such as brick, cony
crete, tile, slate, highest grade of tin roofing, asbestos or asphalt, or
of built up roofing felt with gravel or slag surface, or built up asbestos
roofing or other roofings of like grade which would rank as Class A
or B under-the test specifications of the National Board of Fire Under-
writers.
Paragraph 10-1-3. Dormer Coverings.
The top and sides of dormer windows shall be covered same as the
roof, or with other material having equivalent fire resistive properties.
Paragraph 10-1-4. Repairs to Wood Shingle Roofs.
If an existing wood shingle roof is damaged by a fire more than
20%, the entire roof shall be replaced with material specified in Para-
graph 10-1-1 and 10-1-2 of this code.
If a wood shingle roof is to be repaired more than 1017o in any
one year, the same shall be entirely replaced with materials specified in
Paragraph 10-1-1 and 10-1-2 above.
Paragraph 10-1-5. Condemnation of Wood Shingle Roofs.
The Building Commissioner shall have power to condemn and have
removed any wood shingle roof that in his opinion is in such a de-
teriorated condition as to be excessively inflammable.
Paragraph 10-1-6. Removal of Wood Shingle Roofs.
Within twenty (20) years from the date of the approval of this
ordinance, any and all roofs in Zones 1 and 2 not meeting requirements
of Paragraph 10-1-2 shall be replaced with roof coverings which comply
with said paragraph.
Section 10-2.
ROOF STRUCTURES.
Paragraph 10-2-1. Pent House Heights.
No pent houses shall be constructed on any building above the
highest level permitted for the roof except over stairs, tanks, eleva-
tors, and elevator machinery, and such pent houses shall be no larger
than is necessary to serve their purpose or than is approved by the
Building Commissioner. The walls and roof of every pent house shall
be of construction and exterior covering at least equivalent to the con-
struction required for the roof, and walls of the building or structure
on which it is located.
The scuttle or door to any pent house must be of metal, or covered
with metal.
Paragraph 10-2-2. Tanks.
Every tank having a capacity of 1,000 gallons or more, placed in
any story, or on or above the roof of any building, shall be supported
on iron or steel beams or concrete of sufficient strength to carry it
54 BUILDING CODE
safely. Such beams shall be supported on masonry, steel construction
or concrete from the ground up. Every tank of less than 1,000 gallons
capacity shall be supported as approved by the Building Commissioner.
Underneath or on the side near the bottom of any such tank having
a capacity of 1,000 gallons or more, and used for the storage of water,
there shall be a short pipe or outlet not less than 4 inches in diameter,
fitted with suitable valve having a wheel handle. Any such tank of
less than 1,000 gallons capacity shall be fitted with an outlet satis-
factory to the Building Commissioner.
All tanks shall be placed when practicable at a corner of the build-
ing, and in no case over or near a line of stairs.
Paragraph 10-2-3. Skylights.
All skylights on roofs of buildings shall be of metal and glass
and shall not be at any point higher than 6 feet above the highest level
permitted for the roof except with special approval of the Building
Commissioner.
Paragraph 10-2-4. Temporary Stands.
No temporary elevated staging or stand, for observation purposes,
shall be constructed or occupied upon the roof of any building.
Paragraph 10-2-5. Church Spires.
Church spires outside of Zone 1, which do not exceed 75 feet in
height, need not be fireproof. However, all church spires exceeding 75
feet in height must be of First-Class Construction.
Section 10-3.
SHEET 'METAL.
Paragraph 10-3-1. Leaders.
The roof of all buildings to be erected or reconstructed, shall be
provided with proper metallic leaders for conducting the water away
from the roof in such a manner that it will protect the walls and
foundation of such building and of adjacent building from injury.
Paragraph 10-3-2. Water on Sidewalks.
In no case shall water from such leaders be allowed to flow directly
upon street sidewalks, but in such case it shall be conducted by proper
pipes to the storm sewer. If there should be no sewer available, then
a gutter should be constructed in the walk and same provided with non-
slipping metal cover, set flush with sidewalk, and securely fastened
to same. Approval of design of cover must be obtained from the Build-
ing Commissioner.
Paragraph 10-3-3. Minimum Requirements for Sheet Metal Work.
Cornices, Mouldings, Awnings and Hoods. All joints in metal form-
ing the above members shall be lapped not less than one inch and
riveted not more than three inches on centers.
All mitres to be lapped and riveted same as above specified.
All brackets, modillions and dentils are. to be locked and riveted.
Gutters. Gutters of all descriptions are to be lapped one inch, and
riveted not less than three inches on centers. No gutter shall have less
than four (4) rivets to each joint. Hangers or braces are to be not
more than four (4) feet apart. All seams and braces are to be well
soldered. All gutters are to be made of material not lighter than
CITY OF FORT WORTH 55
No. 26 galvanized iron. All copper is to be tinned at seams and mitered
before being soldered.
Conductor Pipes. Conductor pipes shall be not lighter than No. 27
galvanized iron and farstened to brick walls with expansion bolts, and
to stucco walls with toggle bolts, and to wood walls with screws. Lead
shields and screws may be used in masonry walls—fasteners to be not
snore than 8 feet apart on pipes erected vertically. Pipes erected
horizontally to have not less than two straps to each 10-foot joint.
Conductor Heads. Conductor heads shall be not lighter than No. 26
galvanized iron. All straight members of two-inch width or over shall
be locked or riveted; all other members to be lapped, all seams well
soldered, all heads to have an overflow and lock head to the outlet
through wall.
All outlets to be a solid sleeve through wall, and to have drain to
the water head at least one-half (%) inch to the foot, and locked or
riveted to base flashing.
Skylights. Skylights are to be made of not lighter than No. 26
gauge material in weakest part. All members are to have laps at ridge
and curb, which are to be riveted and soldered.
' All joints in curb bars, including mitres, to be lapped not less than
one-inch, and to be well riveted and soldered. All common bars to be
riveted to ridge and curb with two rivets in each end.
All common, jack or hip bars five (5) feet or longer, are to be
reinforced with iron core not less than %x2 inches, and riveted to ridge
and curb.
Metal Ceiling and Metal Siding. All furring to be securely fastened
before ceiling is applied. Nail all edges not less than 6 inches apart.
Metal Tile and Shingles. All to have not less than two barbed
nails of same material as roof to each tile or shingle. All eave tile
to have end pieces. All valley tiles to have end pressed or soldered in,
and locked to valley.
All surfaces to be covered shall be free from nails or holes. Then
there shall be applied not less than one (1) thickness of two-ply sat-
urated felt paper. All valleys to be lined with not less than 2-inch
valley with 1-inch pocket edge and 3%-inch back under shingle, of
No. 26 gauge galvanized iron or 40-pound tin, or 14-ounce copper. Lap
all joints not less than 6 inches and cleat same not less than 12 inches
apart.
Tin Roofs. Tin roof to be not lighter than 215 pounds and cleated.
All seams to be smooth before soldering. Where 20x28-inch sheets
are used, there shall be not less than 6 cleats to each sheet, and where
14x20-inch sheets are used, there shall be not less than 4 cleats to each
sheet.
Four pounds of solder are required to the square of room tin 20x28
inches, with two pounds additional where smaller sheets are used. All
repairs on tin roof shall be cleated and well soldered, eavestrip to be
placed at all edges, and no nails are to be in sight. All tin roofs are
to have rosin sized paper under same.
Standing Seams, Roof Tin or Other Metal. Cleats in standing
seams to be not more than 8 inches apart, and all butts are to be well
soldered. All valley seams to be securely locked, eaves finished same
as flat lock. On standing seam and flat lock roofs of galvanized iron,
sheets to be not wider than 24 inches.
Ventilators. Louvre ventilators shall have not less than two rivets
at each connection. Tubular ventilators to be not lighter than No. 26
galvanized iron. and not less than four braces, well riveted in place,
56 BUmwNG CoDP
to be used. On large ventilators, the braces shall be heavier and of
same proportion in number. All roof flanges shall be double seamed,
or riveted and soldered.
Chimney Extensions and Flue Caps. To be mot lighter than No. 24
gauge iron, and to be locked or riveted. All repairs to be same as
above.
Furnace Work. All cold air ducts and returns to be galvanized
iron, locked and riveted. All hot air pipes to be bright tin, tacked with
solder at each 12 inches, and wall stack to be properly fastened to studs.
All hot air pipes to be wrapped with asbestos paper, except double
pipe.
Gas Vents and Double Vent Thimble. All vents passing through
wood must be double. If inside of wall, they must be wrapped with
asbestos paper. Outside casing of double vent to be of No. 27 gal-
vanized iron or heavier, and inside lining to be not lighter than No. 26
galvanized iron.
Flashing—Tar and Gravel and Built Up. Roofs. All flashing to be
not lighter than No. 27 gauge iron, 216-pound tin, or 14-ounce copper.
Base flashing shall turn up onto wall not less than 5 inches at high
point of roof, and not less than 8 inches for a distance of 20 feet each
way from outlets, and nailed to roof every 3 inches.
Outlets shall be riveted and soldered, or seamed and soldered to
base flashing.
Where fire wall is not high enough to turn up flashing 5 inches on
same, flashing shall extend as high as the fire wall will permit.
Counter flashing shall extend to first masonry joint above the base
flashing; counter flashing shall be not less than 6 inches wide, and is
to come down over the base flashing not less than 3 inches at any
point; same shall be extended into the masonry joint at least one inch
and metal plugged to wall every 3 feet.
Flues—Step Flashing, Residences and Exposed Work. All flue
backs are to be riveted or seemed at corners.
All step counter flashing to be dove-tailed or fastened with con-
cealed clips, and to come down over base flashing not less than 2 inches,
same to be flashed in each masonry joint.
On residences and exposed work where water has no chance to
stand, such as on awning hoods and cornice work—flashing shall be
turned up not less than 2 inches and shall be counter-flashed in first
masonry joint above.
Any flashing job that cannot be done according to this code shall
be reported to the Building Commissioner before the work is done.
Ventilation. All ducts and pipes for ventilation to be not lighter
than No. 26 galvanized iron. All elbows shall have proper sweep -so as
not to decrease the area of the pipe. All joints shall fit true and shall
be connected together so as to make tight joints, and the size of pipe
should be figured according to the number of cubic feet to be ventilated.
Section 10-4.
SKYLIGHTS.
Paragraph 10-4-1. Glass in Skylights.
Except as herein provided, all skylights shall be glazed with wire
glass not less than 1/4-inch thick.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 57
Paragraph 10-4-2. Skylights Over Elevators, Etc.
In all buildings hereafter erected or altered, the roof immediately
over elevator shaft, stairway shaft or other shaft over 6 square feet
in area, and which extends through or to the roof of the building—shall
be provided with a skylight covering at least three-fourths (:X) of the
area of the shaft, up to 100 square feet. These skylights shall be glazed
with.glass set in metal sash or frames, in lights of not more than 200
square inch area each, and glass shall not exceed %-inch in thickness.
There shall be suspended immediately below this glass a strong wire
netting, and such skylights shall he provided, with ventilators or louvres
of an area equal to one-seventh (1/7) the area of the skylights up to
14 square feet.
Instead of skylights, metal windows of equivalent area may be
placed above the roof in sides of shaft farthest removed from party
lines, or a combination of windows and skylights of the same required
total area may be used. These windows are to be glazed as specified
for these skylights.
Wherever a pent house is separated from the shaft below same
by a floor for the support of elevator machinery, etc., at least 75% of
the area of said floor up to 25 square feet shall be an open grating as
approved by the Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 10-4-3. Louvres.
When metal louvres are used for ventilating purposes over shafts
or in connection with skylights, the louvres or slats shall be.riveted to
the metal frame.
Paragraph 10-4-4. Protection of Skylight and Roof.
Where construction of building'is carried up above the roofs of
adjoining buildings, proper means shall be provided and used during
the construction period, by the person erecting the building for the
protection of the skylights and roof of such adjoining buildings.
Should the owner of such adjoining building refuse permission to
have his roofs and skylights protected, such refusal shall be reported
in writing to the Building Commissioner, and it shall then be the duty
of the owner refusing such permission to make his skylights and roof
safe at his own expense. Such refusal by said owner of the existing
building shall relieve the owner of the new building or person erecting
same from any responsibility for damage done to persons or property
on or within the premises affected, occasioned by the non-protection of
such skylights and roofs.
Chapter 11.
FIRE PROTECTION.
Section 11-1.
FIREPROOFING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS.
Paragraph 11-1-1. Fireproofing Required.
The provisions of this chapter shall apply to all fire protection
required by Chapter Nos. 14 and 15, in all buildings more than one
story in height, and in all public garages and theatres hereafter built.
In alterations of existing .buildings, the character and amount of pro-
tection for steel and iron work shall be made satisfactory to the Build-
ing Commissioner.
58 BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 11-1-2. Protection of Structural Steel and Iron Columns.
Every metal column which supports a steel beam or girder carry-
ing a masonry wall or pier, or which is built into a wall and supports
floors only, shall be protected on all surfaces against moisture and
fire by a casing of masonry, which shall be not less than 4 inches thick
of brick or tile, or 2 inches thick of concrete—specified thickness in each
case to extend beyond the greatest projection. In buildings in which the
fire hazard is limited, a 3-inch covering of brick or tile or a 1%-inch
covering of concrete may be used in lieu of the above. The protecting
material shall be well bonded into the masonry of any enclosing walls.
Paragraph 11-1-3. Protection of Beams and Girders.
Every metal beam or girder supporting a masonry wall shall have
the same masonry protection as required for a wall column, securely
tied and bonded; but the extreme outer edge of the flanges of beam or
girder, or the plates or angles connected to it may project within 2
inches of the outside surface of such casing. The inside surface of
the beam or girder shall be similarly protected by masonry.
Paragraph 11-1-4. Protection of Girders and Trusses Carrying Roof
and Ceiling Only.
Girders and trusses carrying only roof and ceiling loads and pro-
tected by a suspended metal lath and plaster ceiling, need not have any
other fireproofing.
Paragraph 11-1-5. Fireproofing Materials.
In buildings of First-Class Construction, every metal structural
member which supports loads or resists stresses other than those already
provided for in this section, shall have a protection of fireproofing as
herein specified. The protecting material shall be of brick, concrete or
terra cotta. Concrete shall not be less than 1 part Portland cement to
3 parts of sand and 5 parts of gravel or crushed stone which will pass
through a 1-inch ring. Terra cotta may be solid or hollow, and shall
be porous or semiporous, but neither the shells nor webs thereof shall
be less than %-inch thick; metal lath and cement plaster may be used
as fireproofing for metal trusses, provided the entire truss is enclosed;
it shall be 2 inches thick for lower chord and lei inches for-all other
members.
Paragraph•11-1-6. Fireproofing Blocks and Laying of Same.
All brick or terra cotta used for fireproofing columns shall be
accurately fitted, laid with broken joints, and all spaces between the
outside layer and the metal solidly filled with masonry or concrete.
All brick or terra cotta used for fireproofing shall be set in Portland
cement mortar.
Paragraph 11-1-7. Thickness of Protection.
The protection shall cover the columns at all points to a thickness
of not less than 4 inches if of brick or terra-cotta and not less than
2 inches if of concrete and be continuous from the base to the top
of the column, except that the extreme outer edges of,lugs, brackets and
similar supporting metal may project to within 2 inches of the outer
surface of the protection.
In buildings in which the fire hazard is limited, a 3-inch covering
of brick or tile or a 1%-inch covering of concrete may be used in lieu
of the above.
Paragraph 11-1-9. Galvanized Wire Wrapping.
Galvanized steel wire not smaller than No. 12 gauge shall be x
securely wrapped around block column covering, so that every block is
Crryr dF fORT WofgR 59
crossed at least once by a wire. • The wire shall not be wound spirally
around the column, but each turn or band shall be a separate unit and
shall be twisted tightly or otherwise securely-bound. Other equivalent
anchorage may be employed if approved by the Building Commissioner.
No block used for this purpose shall exceed 12 inches in vertical dimen-
sion.
Paragraph 11-1-9. Columns in Damp Places.
Columns located in damp places shall receive a coat of at least
1 inch of Portland cement mortar, or a coating of paint approved by
the Building Commissioner, before the application of the fireproofing.
Paragraph 11-1-10. Pipe Columns.
Columns made of steel or wrought iron pipe filled with concrete
shall be protected by at least 1% inches of fireproofing.
Paragraph 11-1-I1. Exposed Fireproofing.
Fireproofing of columns exposed to damage from trucking or han-
dling of merchandise, shall be jacketed on the outside with metal or
other approved covering to a height of at least 3 feet from'the floor.
Paragraph 11-1-12. Covering for Webs and Bottom Flanges.
The protecting covering of the webs and bottom flanges of girders
and of all members of trusses shall have a thickness of not less than
2 inches at all points, and that of all the webs and bottom flanges of
beams, lintels and all other structural members, except the lower chord
of all trusses, shall be not less than 11A inches at all points.
Paragraph 11-1-13. Terra Cotta Fire Protection.
If hollow terra Gotta tile is used for protection, all joints shall be
solidly filled with mortar, and the lower flanges of beams and similar
members shall be encased either by lugs which form a part of the skew-
backs and extend around the flanges, meeting at the middle, or by the
tile slabs held in position by dove-tailed lugs projecting from the skew-
backs. I'
Paragraph 11-1-14. Concrete Protection.
Concrete protection for all structural members shall be held in
position by suitably designed interior steel anchors, hooked securely
around the flanges or angles of the members, at intervals not exceed-
ing 8 inches. These anchors shall be not less than %-inch in thickness
if flat, or 1/10-inch in diameter if of wire, and shall be located at a
distance not less than 14-inch nor more than 1-inch from the outside
surface. Provision shall be made to prevent displacement of anchors
while concrete is being deposited. When the flange width of steel mem-
bers exceeds 6 inches, the wire used for anchoring the concrete protec-
tion shall be not less than %-inch in diameter.
Paragraph I1-1-15. No Pipes, Wires, Etc. Encased.
No pipes, wires, cables or other material shall be encased within
or embedded in the required fireproofed protection of columns or other
structural members.
1
Paragraph 11-1-I6. Metal Fronts.
Metal fronts on the exterior of buildings over one story high shall
= be backed up or filled in with masonry not less than 8 inches thick.
60 $UA.DI.NG-Cwa
Section 11-2.
METAL LATH AND PLASTER USED AS FIRE PROTECTION.
Paragraph 11-2-1. Support of Ceilings.
All suspended metal lath and plaster ceilings required as fire pro-
tection by this code in buildings of first and second-class shall be sup-
ported by metal furring and hangers or clamps attached to the floor
or roof construction in an approved manner. Such supports shall be
of such section and weight and so arranged as to support the wet
plaster with a deflection of not more than 1/30-inch per foot of span.
Where metal lath ceilings are attached direct to wood ceiling joists,
joists shall not be spaced over 16 inches center to center, and lath shall
be nailed to each joist not over 6 inches center to center with not less
than 5d box nails.
Paragraph 11-2-2. Studding.
All metal studding for metal lath partitions or wall furring required
as fire protection by this code, in buildings of first and second-class
shall be made from steel stock weighing not less than one-half pound
per lineal foot, and shall be spaced not over 16 inches center to.center,
and shall be securely fastened to the floor construction. Where metal
lath is attached to wood studding, studs shall not be spaced over 16
inches center to center, and lath shall be nailed to each stud not over 6
inches center to center with not less than 5d box nails.
Paragraph 11-2-3. Metal Lath;
Metal lath required for the above purposes shall be of galvanized
steel weighing not less than 54 ounces per square yard. Metal lath
shall be laced to the supporting furring or studs at intervals not ex-
ceeding 6 inches. Wire lath shall be not less than No. 20 gauge, and
sheet metal lath not less than No. 24 gauge.
Section 11-3.
FIRE DOORS AND WINDOWS.
Paragraph 11-3-1. Fire Door Construction.
Where fire doors, windows and shutters are required they shall be
built in accordance with the latest requirements of the National Board
of Underwriters.
Where fire windows are required in exterior walls, fire shutters
may be substituted with the approval of the Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 11-3-2. Fire Doors and Windows Required.
Doors and windows in the following locations shall be equipped
with approved fire doors and fire windows respectively:
(a) All openings in required enclosures for elevators, stairways,
shaftways.
(b) All doors or windows opening upon fire escapes or passed by
fire escapes.
(c) Doors to boiler rooms.
(d) All openings in required fire or division walls (both sides).
(e) Every building within Zone 1 and Zone 2, over three stories in
height occupied for manufacturing, mercantile or warehouse purposes
and all buildings over four stories in height-occupied for office, hotel,
hospital or asylum purposes, also buildings over five stories in height
CITY(W FMr WoRwA 61
occupied for apartment or tenement house purposes, shall have approved
fire doors or fire windows on every exterior opening above the first
story, when fronting on a street or public driveway less than 40 feet
wide, or where another building is within 40 feet of such opening; also
all openings in the side and rear walls of the first story, except show
windows, when less than 40,feet from another building. The walls of a
building in the same plane or parallel planes and facing in the same
direction as that in which the opening is situated shall not be considered
as coming within the intent of this rule.
All openings in a side wall above and facing on the roof of an
adjoining building of other than fireproof construction shall be pro-
tected by fire doors or fire windows to a height of 40 feet above the roof,
measured in a vertical line. If the adjoining building has a fireproof
roof, all openings in the said side wall shall be protected from the
level of the adjoining roof to a height of 40 feet measured in a straight
line from the adjacent edge of the nearest skylight or the opening in the
adjacent roof, to the top of the opening in the wall.
All openings in a side wall above and facing on the roof of a
building other than a fireproof constructed building which is separated
from the side wall by a horizontal distance less than 40 feet shall he
protected by fire doors or fire windows from the roof level of the ex-
posing building to a height of 40 feet measured from the top of the
adjacent parapet wall to the top of the opening in the side wall, or 40
feet from the adjacent edge of the nearest skylight or other opening
in the roof of the exposing building, if the roof be of fireproof construc-
tion.
In business buildings over four stories or 55 feet in height, the
windows which are not fire windows, shall have a distance of at least
3 feet between the top of a window sill and the bottom of the lintel of
a window directly beneath. No such window shall be arranged to open
within 9 inches of the ceiling surface, but the wall construction between
the window opening and the ceiling may, if desired, he replaced by a
fire window in fixed sash and frame.
In buildings of all classes, all openings into halls or adjoining rooms
from rooms in which paint, oils, varnishes, spiritous liquors or drugs,
or other highly inflammable liquids or materials are stored for pur-
pose of sale or otherwise—or in which manufacturing processes or busi-
ness operations are conducted which are generally recognized as hazard-
ous as regards fire, shall be protected by automatic fire doors or fire
windows.
Section 11-4.
FIRE STOPPING.
Paragraph 11-4-1. Fire Stopping Walls.
Fire stops where required shall be as follows:
Spaces between and behind all furring on masonry walls shall be
filled solid with brick and mortar or other incombustible material for a
space of 2 inches in height above floor beams and plaster grounds, and
for 2 inches below the bottom of floor beams. Spaces between studding
of all exterior walls not constructed of masonry shall be stopped with
similar material from the bottom of the floor beams to 2 inches above
the top of same. Filling material may be supported on strips of wood
nailed between the studding. Where masonry walls are studded off;
the space between the inside face of the wall and the studding shall be
? fire stopped, and fireproof material shall be placed on the underside
of the wood beams above for a depth of not less than 4 inches, and
.62 $V=uaG CO.
securely supported, or the beams directly over the studded off space
shall be fire-stopped with not less than 4 inches of fireproof material,
which may be laid on boards cut in between the beams. Spaces between
parts of the floor beams that rest upon bearing stud partitions or
girders shall be filled in solid with incombustible material to a depth of
the beams and where the partition continues above the floor, to a height
of 2 inches above the top of the beams.
Paragraph 11-4-2. Stairs.
Spaces between the stringers of stairs and the beams of landings,
unless unceiled or of incombustible material, shall be stopped solidly
with wood, brick or terra cotta, or other approved material as often
as twice to each flight of stairs.
Paragraph 11-4-3. Air Spaces.
The various forms of construction tending to form air passages
from one story to another, such as spaces around pipes, ventilating
shafts or chimneys, shall have a fire and smoke stop of incombustible
material at each floor.
Paragraph 11-4-4. Vertical Ducts.
All vertical ducts for pipes, wires and other similar purposes, shall
be enclosed on all sides with incombustible material, and the opening
through each floor shall be properly firestopped with incombustible ,
material. Any door opening into such duct shall be provided with a
door and frame lined with incombustible material.
Chapter 12.
OUTDOOR ADVERTISING, ELECTRIC SIGNS, SIGN
BOARDS AND BILL BOARDS ON BUILDINGS
AND GROUND.
Section 12-1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
Paragraph 12-1-1. Permit Required.
No electric sign, sign board or bill board on any building or on the
ground, such as hereafter described in this chapter, except as otherwise
provided for herein, shall be erected or reconstructed within the City
of Fort Worth unless a permit shall have been first secured from the
Building Commissioner by the person, firm or corporation desiring to
erect such sign board, bill board or electric sign. All applications for
permits for such sign boards, bill boards, or electric signs shall be
accompanied by such drawings or descriptions as are necessary to fully
advise the Building Commissioner as to the location, construction,weight,
materials and manner of securing of such proposed sign board, bill board
or electric sign, and a complete diagram of and description of electrical
equipment for electric signs. If these drawings and descriptions conform
to the regulations in this Code, then the Building Commissioner shall
issue the permit to erect the sign upon payment of the required fee.
Before a permit for an electric sign shall be issued the approval of
the Electric Inspector shall be filed with the Building Commissioner.
Coy OF FAST WORTH 63
Paragraph 12-1-2. Permits Not Required.
Permits shall not be necessary for temporary sign boards or bill
boards to be placed on buildings advertising the sale or renting of such
buildings on which they are placed, when such sign boards or bill boards
do not exceed sixty (60) square feet of area.
Paragraph 12-1-3. Fees.
Whenever a permit is required for an electric sign, bill board or
sign board the permit fee shall be the same as that,provided in Chapter 1
of this Code. -
Paragraph 12-1-4. Bond Required.
Every person, firm or corporation desiring to erect an electric sign,
bill board or sign board, wherever a permit is necessary, shall first
execute a bond to the City of Fort Worth conditioned for the payment
of not less than One Thousand ($1,000.00) Dollars, and for such addi-
tional amount as may be determined upon by the City Council; said
bond being further conditioned to indemnify and hold,the City of Fort
Worth harmless from any and all damage, loss, judgments and costs
which may arise, occur or be sustained by said City of Fort Worth by
reason of the erection, hanging or maintenance of such electric sign,
bill board or sign board, and conditioned further that such person, firm
or corporation will appear for the City of Fort Worth, and at his, their
or its expense defend any action or proceedings against it in any court
where such action or proceedings arose out of the erection, hanging or
maintenance of such electric sign, bill board or sign board; and condi-
tioned further that such person, firm or corporation will also promptly
repay to the City of Fort Worth, any and all expense and outlay incurred
by it, by reason of any of the provisions of this Code.
Said bond is to be approved by the City Council and renewed
annually before the first day of April of each year.
Paragraph 12-1-5. Inspection and Acceptance.
When the electric sign, sign board or bill board has been erected,
the Building Commissioner shall be notified and if upon inspection, he
finds same to have been erected according to regulations of this Code,
he shall issue a certificate of acceptance without further charge; pro-
vided, however, that for the inspection of electric signs the following
inspection fee shall be paid at the office of the Electrical Inspector:
(1) For electric signs containing less than one hundred lamps $1.00.
(2) For each additional one hundred lamps or fraction thereof $1.00.
Service shall not be turned on until written notice of acceptance
from the Building Commissioner has been obtained, which written notice
.shall not be issued in the case of electric signs until electrical inspec-
tion has been completed and the fees for electrical inspection paid.
All sign boards, bill boards or electric signs attached to or erected
on any building, and larger than sixty (60) square feet in area, shall
be examined by the Building Commissioner once each year as to their
safety.
Paragraph 12-1-6. Hanging on Fire Escapes Prohibited.
No part of any electric sign, sign board or bill board shall be
attached to a fire escape or placed so as to interfere with egress or
ingress from windows used and designated as fire exits. This condi-
tion shall apply to existing sign boards, signs and bill boards.
Paragraph 12-1-7. All Swinging Signs Prohibited.
Swinging signs are absolutely prohibited.
64 $�J7L3?iNG (r9BT
Paragraph 12-1-8. Alterations and Repairs.
No alterations shall be made in any electric sign unless authorized
by the Building, Commissioner, and no other sign or sign board shall
be hung or attached to any existing sign.
All signs of every kind must be kept in good and proper repair
by the owners of same, and whenever the Building Commissioner shall
notify an owner in writing that any certain sign is in need of repair
of any kind, it shall be the duty of the owner to take immediate steps
to have such repairs made. In case the owner after receiving such
notice, shall fail or refuse to have such repairs made within ten days
from receipt of such notice, the Building Commissioner shall condemn
said sign as not complying with this Code, and order the owner to have
same removed; then if said owner shall fail or refuse to remove said
sign the Building Commissioner may cause same to be removed by other
parties, and the expense thereof shall be recovered from the owner or
under the terms and conditions of the bond hereinbefore provided for.
However, if any sign is found to be in a dangerous condition, the
Building Commissioner may remove, or cause same to be removed at
once and without notice to the owner thereof, and the City of Fort
Worth shall recover the expense of such removal in the same manner
as provided above.
Paragraph 12-1-9. Existing Signs.
Within twelve (12) months after the adoption of this Code, all
electric signs, sign boards and bill boards, which do not meet the
requirements of'this Code, shall be considered condemned and shall be
removed as provided above for condemned signs, or shall be altered to
meet with the provisions of this Code.
Paragraph 12-1-10.
The term "Outdoor Advertising" as used in this Code is defined
to be advertising-on any board, fence or structure, or the placing thereon
of any poster, bill, printing, painting, device or any advertising.matter
of any kind whatsoever, and the pasting, posting, painting, printing,
nailing or tacking or otherwise fastening of any hand-bill, card, banner,
sign, poster, advertisement or notice of any kind upon any property or
place.
Paragraph 12-1-11.
The term "Outdoor Advertiser" as used'in this Code is defined to
mean any person, firm or corporation who or which affixes or displays
any kind of advertisement or sign or notice to or on any object natural
or constructed outside of the confines of a roofed and walled inclospre;
but'this definition shall not be held to include any board, sign or sur-
face used to display notices issued by any court or public office or officer,
or posted by any officer in the performance of a public duty, nor such
sign boards and bill boards as are described in Paragraph 12-1-2 hereof.
Paragraph 12-1-12.
No person,firm or corporation, except an outdoor advertiser licensed
and otherwise complying with the provisions of this Code shall engage
in or carry on the business of outdoor advertising; but this paragraph
does not apply to a bona fide employee of a licensed outdoor advertiser. A
Application for such license shall be made to the Building Commissioner
and the City Secretary and upon payment of a fee of $25.00 such license
shall be issued which license shall expire on the 31st day of December
next succeeding the date of its issuance.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 65
Paragraph 12-1-13.
There shall be placed and maintained in plain view on each electric
sign, sign board and bill board, the name of the person, firm or corpora-
tion owning or in possession, charge or control of same.
Paragraph 12-1-14.
The scattering, daubing or leaving of any paint, paste or litter upon
any public street or sidewalk by any outdoor advertiser shall be unlawful.
Paragraph 12-1-15.
No outdoor advertiser shall affix or display any outdoor advertising
on any object other than a bill board, sign board or electric sign as
defined in this Code.
No person shall paste, post, paint, print, nail or otherwise fasten
any handbill, sign, poster, advertisement or notice of any kind whatso-
ever, or cause the same to be done, on any curbstone, flagstone or any
other position or part of any sidewalk or street, or upon any tree, lamp
post, hitching post, telegraph pole, telephone pole, hydrant, bridge, pier
or upon any structure within the limits of any street in the City of Fort
Worth, except such as may be required by the ordinances of the City of
Fort Worth; without the express consent of the Building Commissioner
and no person shall paste, post, print, paint, nail or otherwise fasten
any handbill, sign, poster, advertisement or notice of any kind, or cause
the same to be done, upon any private wall, window, door, gate, fence,
advertising board, or upon any other private structure or building, unless
he is the owner thereof, and when any handbill, sign, poster, advertise-
ment or notice of any kind shall be found posted, painted, printed, nailed
or otherwise fastened on any curbstone, flagstone or any other position
on any sidewalk, tree, lamp post, hitching post, telephone pole, telegraph
pole, hydrant, bridge or pier or upon any private wall, window, door,
gate, fence, in violation of this Code the finding of such handbill, sign,
poster, advertisement or notice shall be prima facie evidence that it was
affixed, displayed or delineated by the person, firm or corporation
thereby advertised; however, posters, handbills and other advertising
matter on paper or other inflammable material may be affixed or dis-
played on walls, buildings or structures only upon a metal surface
affixed to such wall or building in compliance with Paragraph 12-3-4
of this Chapter of this Code, and no such outdoor advertising shall be
so affixed or displayed on private property unless the consent thereto
of the property owner be first obtained.
Section 12-2.
ELECTRIC SIGNS.
Paragraph 12-2-1. Definition.
An electric sign shall be one the letters or advertising design of
which are outlined in electric lights or else signs having approved
letters or advertising designs of glass illuminated from within the sign.
The face or faces of such sign shall be completely covered with non-
inflammable material. No sign shall be construed as an electric sign
within the-meaning of this Code unless the same is completely illum-
inated from dusk to 10 p. m. each night, except Sundays and legal
holidays.
Paragraph 12-2-2. Material.
(a) All electric signs shall have a structural frame work of iron,
steel or other substances of equal strength and the body and other parts
86 zn'<'rta c'a»�
of such sign shall be of non-inflammable materials throughout. The
sign shall be of such weight and strength as may be approved by the
Building Commissioner.
(b) All sign supports, brackets, guys, turnbuckles, bolts, anchors
and fastenings, shall be figured strong enough to safely hold and sup-
port all loads and other stresses which may come upon them. The
minimum diameter of any supporting wires or cables shall be not less
than 3/16-inch galvanized wire or cable for signs projecting less than
5 feet and the minimum diameter of such supporting wire or cables shall
be not less than 74-inch galvanized wire or cable when the sign projects
5 feet or more. All guy wires shall be at least 3/16-inch galvanized
wire or cable. All guy and supporting wire of cables shall be provided
with approved galvanized turnbuckles. All other supports, brackets,
screw eyes, strap irons, etc., shall be galvanized or given two heavy
coats of protective non-corrosive paint.
Paragraph 12-2-3. Location, Erection, Height and Maintenance.
(a) Electric signs as herein defined existing or hereafter erected
in compliance with.this Code may overhang public sidewalks, but in no
event shall such electric signs extend over public property beyond the
curb line. On all streets where public municipally owned lighting sys-
tems consisting of lights on standards set in public property now exist
or shall be hereafter erected, no electric sign shall be erected or main-
tained which shall extend over public property more than two-thirds of
the distance from the building line or outer plane of the wall of the
adjacent building more than two-thirds of the distance from such build-
ing line or outer plane to the curb. However, electric signs, the lower
edge of which is at least thirty-six inches above the top of the struc-
tures of such public light system may extend to the curb, but not beyond
it. All electric signs extending over public property shall be at least
eleven feet above the surface of such property.
(b) Electric signs can be rigidly attached to canopies or marquise,
but such signs shall not be less than eight feet above the sidewalk
and shall not extend below the canopy or marquise.
(c) Electric roof signs shall conform to the requirements of
Paragraph 12-3-2.
(d) No barber poles, or posts for the purpose of supporting any
sign shall be set in any public property unless.the same be upon the
building line or firmly fixed against the outer plane of the wall of the
adjacent building.
Section 12-3.
SIGN BOARDS AND BILL BOARDS ON BUILDINGS.
Paragraph 12-3-1. Definition.
(a) The term "Sign Board" shall apply to display boards and
screens used as such, having letters or illustrations painted, written,
cut or projected thereon.
(b) The term "Bill Board" shall apply to display.boards and
screens used as such, having attached thereto or pasted thereon, paper
or other material with letters or illustrations painted or printed thereon.
In order for a "Sign Board" or "Bill Board" to come within the provi-
sions of this Code relative to "Electric Signs," the same must be con-
structed, maintained and illuminated as required in section 12-2 of this
chapter.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 67
Paragraph 12-3-2. Location.
Sign boards and bill boards at any angle to the plane of the face of
any building and overhanging public property are prohibited.
Sign boards can be fastened flat against the wall, and when they
are erected on the roof of a building, they shall be placed so that the
face of the sign shall not be closer than three feet from the inner plane
of the outer wall of such building, and it shall be constructed so that
the bottom of such roof sign board or bill board shall be not less than-
five feet above the surface of said roof.
Paragraph 12-3-3. Dimensions.
No sign board erected upon or above the roof of any building shall
be higher than eighteen feet over all unless construction of building is
such as to afford the sign substantial and permanent support.
Paragraph 12-3-4. Material.
All sign boards and bill boards upon the roof of any building shall
be completely constructed of metal or other non-combustible material,
except that the same may have a wooden border not exceeding sixteen
(16) inches in width. Sign boards and bill boards attached or placed upon
any wall or the wall of any building shall have a surface of metal or
other non-combustible material, but may have a wooden border not
exceeding sixteen (16) inches in width and may be supported by wooden
stringers.
Paragraph 12-3-5. Unsafe Sign Boards and Bill Boards.
Unsafe sign boards and bill boards are to be made safe to the
approval of the Building Commissioner and this Code, or removed in
accordance with Paragraph 12-1-8 above.
Paragraph 12-3-6. Anchorage.
(a) Wall Boards. All sign boards and bill boards shall be securely
anchored to the wall by means of long expansion bolts or through bolts
held by washers having an area of at least four square inches. Wooden
plugs are prohibited.
(b) Wind Stresses and Braces. All roof sign boards or bill boards
shall be built and braced to withstand a horizontal wind pressure of
thirty pounds for every square foot of surface.
Section 12-4.
SIGN BOARDS AND BILL BOARDS ON THE GROUND.
Paragraph 12-4-1. General Requirements.
All bill boards and sign boards hereafter erected within the city
limits shall conform to the following specifications:
(a) Height from ground.
All bill boards and sign boards shall be at least eighteen inches from
the ground—this distance being measured from the ground to the bottom
of the body of the sign.
(b) Posts.
The size of the posts shall be dependent on the size of the sign,
but no posts shall be less than 4x6 inches in their least dimension if
built of wood, and such part of the posts as are placed in the ground
shall be treated with creosote or given other treatment to prevent decay.
(c) Border.
The border of sign boards and bill boards may be of wood.
68 BUILDING CODE
(d) Body of sign.
The body of any sign board or bill board shall be made of or covered
with non-combustible materials, except that in the Third Zone as defined
in Chapter 4 hereof, sign boards or bill boards used exclusively for
displaying outdoor advertising thereon by painting such outdoor adver-
tising on the surface thereof, may be constructed of wood, the advertis-
ing surface of which shall be not less than one inch in thickness.
Paragraph 12-4-2.
It shall be unlawful to place or maintain any bill board or sign
board on the ground upon any lot or premises in such a manner that
any portion of such bill board is nearer to the line of a public walk,
street or alley than the front line or face of the building nearest the
bill board or sign board, except where said nearest building is more than
twenty-five (25) feet from such public street, walk or alley, in which
case the bill board or sign board shall not be placed nearer than twenty-
five (25) feet from the said public property. No paper cloth or adver-
tising matter shall be allowed or permitted to hang loose from any
bill board or sign board. No person, firm or corporation engaged in
outdoor advertising or who erects, constructs, owns or controls any
bill board shall fail, refuse or neglect to remove or cause to be removed
at all times weeds, rubbish or any inflammable waste or material from
the base of any bill board.
Paragraph 12-4-3.
This chapter of this Code is cumulative of all other ordinances of
the City of Fort Worth relating to the subject matter hereof except
where such ordinances or parts thereof are in conflict with the provi-
sions of this chapter in which event such ordinances or parts of ordi-
nances so conflicting are hereby expressly repealed.
Paragraph 12-4-4.
In the event any section or paragraph'of this chapter is held invalid,
the same shall not affect the other provisions of this chapter not held
invalid which shall remain in full force and effect.
Chapter 13.
LOADS, MATERIALS, STRESSES.
Section 13-1.
LOADS.
Paragraph 13-1-1. Definitions.
The "Dead Load" shall consist of the weight of all permanent por-
tions of the building.
The "Live Load" shall include all superimposed loads other than
the dead loads.
Paragraph 13-1-2. Prescribed Live Loads.
The minimum allowable live load in pounds per square foot of
horizontal area, for each occupancy shall be as follows:
Load—Lbs.
Occupancy— Per Sq.Ft.
Places of assemblage, including theatres, churches, etc.:
Auditoriums with fixed geats.............................................................. 75
Lobbies, stairways, passageways and auditoriums without fixed
seats ..........................................................................I.,.................I........ 100
CITY OF FORT WonTH 69
Load—Lbs.
Per Sq.Ft.
Drill"ham... .»..» .... «....,................»_.»---------_,........_. 150
Theatreatsge.,. »,.- . »...» ..,»,..»...._................. ..... .... 150
School buildings, libraries and museums:
Class rooms and rooms for similar use....................»»__...._..._....... 50
Laboratories ............................................................................................ 60
Stack rooms (in.addition to the estimated weight of the loaded
mbwj a) ---•................ .. 20
Private _........... 40
Hotels, apartments, tenement houses, club houses, hospitals, places
of detention:
Floors for guest rooms, wards, etc.......»....... ....................._........__. 40
Public lobbies, dining roams, etc...,-.._............................................... 75
Office buildings:
Firstfloor ..............................._.....-....................................................... 125
Officefloors •..................•-•--••-,...................---...----................-••-•-_............ 50
Grandstands.. ......._ ,:....._._..»..».................................. ......... 100
Industrial and commercial Buildings:
Garages:
For passenger cars, and light commercial trucks...................:.... 75
For all types of cars and truc]ss..........._......................I...............•.... 100
Manufacturing:
Light ..........................•--.....................................-•---•---........................_. 100
General ........................................................................................»....... 200
Heavy (as required to fully cover the weight of machinery
including impact, and of the raw material, and finished
product).
Sales rooms........__._»..». ..».... »_.....» •-••»......»............................. IN
Storage purposes:
Light .................•-•-...................-•-•-•-----•--..............................._........•. 100
General ..........................................•.......................................................... 250
Heavy '(as required to fully cover the weight of the materials
to be stored.
Sidewalks ......-•-•-•..........................»......---...........----...........................--••-•--•--... 300
Roofs:
Pitch less than 45 degrees...................................................................... 25
Pitch more than 45 degrees (wind load only).
In addition to the uniformly distributed loads tabulated above, spe-
cial provision must be made for any concentrated loads.
Paragraph 13-1-3. Live Load Reductions.
Except in buildings for storage purposes the following reduction in
assumed total floor live loads are permissible:
Per Cent
Beams and girders carrying in excess of 300 square feet.................... 10
Columns, piers or walls and foundations and for girders or trusses
supporting columns:
Supporting roof..................................................._................._......._ 0
...........
a " and one flout.:.-•-.._......................
it it
and two f4'oora.......:...........•------...........-•-•----•-•-.........» 15
is 94
and three floors.......................................................... 20
44 is
and four floora_....................._...................... 25
" It " and five floors...,.......... ..... 30
Is is and six floors............................... .......... 35
It it and seven floors............ 40
is is and eight floors................»......................_............... 45
" Is and nine or more floors........................................... 50
70 BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 13-1-4. Wind Pressure.
All buildings shall be designed to resist a horizontal wind pressure
of not less than 20 pounds for every square foot of exposed surface.
If the overturning moment due to wind pressure exceeds 75 per cent
of the moment of stability of the structure due to dead load only, the
structure shall be anchored to its foundation. Such anchorage and the
weight of the foundations shall be sufficient to insure the stability of
the structure.
The wind pressure upon exposed tanks, sky signs, stacks and upon
similar exposed structures and their supports shall be assumed as not
less than 30 pounds for every square foot of exposed, plane surface. On
circular tanks and stacks, the pressure shall be assumed to act on six-
tenths the projected area.
Stresses due to wind pressure may be increased as provided in
Paragraph 13-3-5.
Paragraph 13-1-5. Live Loads to Be Posted.
The live loads for which each floor, or differing parts thereof, of
a commercial or industrial building is designed, shall be certified by
the Building Commissioner and shall be conspicuously 'posted in that
part of each story where they apply, using metal signs furnished by
the Building Commissioner.
The occupant of the building shall be responsible for keeping the
actual loads within the certified limits.
Section 13-2.
QUALITY OF MATERIALS.
Paragraph 13-2-1. Brick.
All brick used in bearing walls, piers, buttresses, etc., may be
clay, sand-lime, or concrete brick, and shall conform to the requirements
of Chapter 14.
Second-hand bricks shall be thoroughly cleaned before being used.
Paragraph 13-,2-2. Building Blocks.
All building blocks used in bearing walls, piers, buttresses, etc.,
shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 14.
Paragraph 13-2-3. Mortar.
Portland cement mortar used in laying up masonry shall be mixed
in the proportion of one part of Portland cement to not. more than
three parts of sand, measured by volume. Hydrated lime or lime putty
may be added to an amount not exceeding 15 per cent by volume of the
Portland cement used.
Cement and lime mortar shall be mixed in the proportion of one
part of Portland cement and one part of lime to not more than 6 parts
of sand, all by volume.
'Lime or natural cement mortar shall be mixed in the proportion of
one part of lime or cement to not more than three parts of sand, meas-
ured by volume.
Paragraph 13-2-4. Lime. }
Slacked lime (lime putty) shall be made from well-burned quick
lime, free from ashes, clinkers, and other foreign material.
Dry hydrated lime shall be the finely divided product resulting `
from meCh4nically slacking pure quicklime at the place of manufacture.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 71
Lime shall be of a quality to meet the specifications of the American
Society for Testing Materials—Standard C 6-24 or C 5-24 T.
Paragraph 13-2-5. Cement.
Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of the standard
specifications and tests for-Portland cement of the American Society
for Testing Materials (serial designation C-9-21).
Paragraph 13-2-6. Sand.
Sand used for mortar shall be clean and silicious with grains graded
in size.
Paragraph 13-2-7. Concrete and Reinforced Concrete.
Materials for concrete and reinforced concrete shall conform to the
requirements of Chapter 17.
Paragraph 13-2-8. Terra Cotta Floor Tile.
Terra cotta floor tile, when tested on end, shall give an average
compressive strength of not less than 2,500 pounds per square inch of
net area. The average strength shall be computed from the results of
tests of 10 average tile. The allowable extreme fibre stress in com-
pression in hollow tile floor tile shall be taken as 500 pounds per square
inch of net section.
Paragraph 13-2-9. Structural Steel and Cast Iron.
Structural steel shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 15.
Cast iron shall conform to the requirements of the "Standard Speci-
fications for Gray Iron Castings" adopted by the American Society for
Testing Materials." (Serial designation A-48-18.)
Paragraph 13-2-10. Timber.
All timber for structural purposes shall conform to the "Current
Specifications for Structural Timber" of the American Society for Test-
ing Materials." (Serial designation D-245-26-T).
Paragraph 13-2-11. Tests.
The quality and structural fitness of new or other materials not
specifically covered in this code shall be determined by tests made by
an independent testing laboratory under the supervision of the Building
Commissioner and at the expense of the owner, producer or other
interested person. Such tests shall determine the strength (including
elastic limit where practicable), desirability and other characteristics
upon which its fitness as a structural material may depend. Where
methods of testing, for the material under consideration, have been
prescribed by the-American Society for Testing Materials, such methods
shall be used.,
thel Building Commissioner may require tests by an independent
testing laboratory to determine if materials being used for structural
purposes„ conform to the requirements of this code. Any tests thus
required shall be made at the expense of the owner of the building in
which the material tested is being incorporated.
72 BUILDING CODE'
Paragraph 13-2-12. Weights of Materials.
The following shall be assumed to be the weight of various mate-
rials:
Lbs.Per
Cubic Foot
Brick work, ordinary.................................................................... 120
Brick work, pressed brick.......................................................... 130
Concrete, cinder, used for filling, not tamped.................... 60
Concrete, stone or gravel, plain-.......................................... 144
Concrete, stone or gravel, reinforced...................................... 150
Granite dolomite and marble.................................................... 170
Limestone ._................................................... 160
Sandstone ......................................._............................................... 145
Cypress ............................................................................................ 35
DouglasFir.................................................................................... 35
Hemlock .......................................................................................... 30
Oak, ........... .......... 50
Maple .............................................................................................. 43
Birch ...............•................................................................................ 45
Pine, long leaf ygllow........,——...................._._ 40
Section 13-3.
ALLOWABLE WORKING STRESSES.
Paragraph 13-3-1. Masonry.
For the allowable working stresses for the various classes of
masonry, see Chapter 14.
Paragraph 13-3-2. Concrete and Reinforced Concrete.
For the allowable working stresses for concrete and reinforced con-
crete, see Chapter 17.
Paragraph 13-3-3. Structural Steel.
For the allowable working stresses for structural steel for build-
ings, see Chapter 15.
Paragraph 13-3-4. Cast Iron.
Structural members of cast iron shall be so proportioned that the
sum of the maximum static stresses in pounds per square inch shall
not exceed the following:
Extreme Fibre Stress.
Compression side ......................................... ..................... .
Tension side ..............................................._......
...
........ .....
Shear ......................................................................................
Direct compression (short blocks)....................................16,000
401
Columns ........................................................................91108— —
r
where "1" = the unsupported length of the column and
"r" = the least radius of gyration, both in inches.
The maximum allowable ratio of "1" to "r" shall not exceed 90,
except that when the allowable working stresses computed by the above
formula are reduced one-third the ratio of "I" to "r" may be increased,
but shall not exceed 120.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 73
Paragraph 13-3-5. Timber.
Structural members of timber shall be so proportioned that the
sum of the maximum static stresses in pounds per square inch, com-
puted on the actual dimensions and not the nominal dimensions, shall
not exceed the following:
More or Less
Occasionally Wet, Continuously All Conditions
Continuously Dry but Quickly Dried Damp or Wet of Exposure
Compres- Compres- Comprea-
Sion pppp eion eion
C C tl C ' C
SPECIES— a cy w A a m p m 0 m U2
f�Fi s 0 f� a � f:M m o
V K rCK k ' �wm p
d c
G �N
a wa P
Select Grade—
FmAApp7
wU2 P. NW a.S
Cypress—
Southern ............18% Iwo 350 980 1000 250 800 850 225 100 1,20U,000
Douglas Fir—
Coast Region:
Select ..............1600 1175 345 1235 1065 240 950 905 215 90 1.600,000
Dense Select....1750 1285 380 1350 1165 265 1040 990 235 100 1,600,000
Rocky Mountain
Region ..............1100 800 275 800 800 225 625 700 200 85 1,200,000
Oak—
Red and White__..1400 1000 500 1070 900 375 890 800 300 125 1,500,000
Pine—
Southern:
Select ................1600 1175 345 1285 1065 240 950 905 215 110 1,600,000
Dense Select_...1750 1285 380 1350 1165 265 1040 990 235 120 1,600,000
California, Idaho
a n d Northern
White Pondosa
and Sugar........ 900 1000 250 710 900 150 670 770 125 85 1,000,000
Redwood ..................1200 1000 250 890 900 150 710 750 125 70 1,200,000
Spruce ..__...............1100 800 250 800 750 150 710 650 125 85 1,200,000
Common Grade—
Cypress—
Southern..............1040 850 350 825 770 250 675 650 225 80 1,200,000
Douglas Fir—
Coast Region......1200 880 325 980 800 225 750 680 200 72 1,600,000
Rocky Mountain
Region.............. 880 640 275 675 640 225 '525 560 200 68 1,200,000
Oak—
Red and White....1120 800 500 900 720 375 750 640 800 100 1,500,000
Pine—
Southern ..............1200 880 825 980 800 226 750 680 200 88 1,600,000
California, Idaho
a n d Northern
White Pondoss
and Sugar........ 720 800 250 600 720 150 565 600 125 68 1,000,000
Redwood .................. 960 800 250 750 720 150 600 600 125 56 1,200,000
Spruce .................... 880 640 250 675 600 150 600 520 125 68 1,200,000
Columns.
1
80d
Y where "1"=the unsupported length of the column in inches
"d"=the least side or diameter in inches
"c the allowable compressive strength in pounds per
square inch parallel to the grain in accordance with
the preceding table.
The maximum allowable ration of "1" to "d" shall not exceed 30.
74 ' BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 13-3-6. Soil Pressure.
Except for such unyielding material as solid rock, cemented gravel y
or well consolidated shale, the allowable bearing value.. of a soil shall
preferably be determined by tests made under the direction of the,
Building,Commissioner. r
The record of such tests shall show the relation between settle-
ment, unit load and period of application. In determining the allow-
able bearing value from the results of the tests, the character of the
structure and the maximum allowable settlement for such structure
shall be considered, but in no case shall the allowable bearing value
exceed one-half the value, shown by a compression diagram, between
the point where the soil is merely compacted and that where displace-
ment begins.
In the absence of tests the allowable bearing value of natural
soils shall not exceed the following, in tons per square foot:
Softclay ...-•-----••.........................................................•--------_------.._. 1
Ordinary clay and sand together in layers, wet................. 2
Clay or fine sand, firm and dry.................................................... 3
Sand, compact and well cemented...-,-:.......,........................... 4
Gravel and coarse sand, well packed......................................____ 5
Rock, in ledges, with clay between......................................::.... 5
Hardpan, or shale......................................................• _..:_._.._.._ 8
Solidrock ---••---••-•---------•----••--•-•.....................•----....-----• ........ 15
Paragraph 13-3-7. Piles.
The allowable load on piles shall not exceed that specified in Chap-
ter 20.
Paragraph 13-3-8. Wind Stresses.
For combined stresses, due to wind and other loads, the allowable
working-stress may be increased 50 per cent, provided the section thus
found is not less than that required by the dead and live loads alone.
For members carrying wind stresses only, the permissible working
stresses may be increased 50 per cent.
Chapter 14.
MASONRY. CONSTRUCTION.
Section 14.1.
SOLID BRICK WALLS.
Paragraph 14-1-1. Quality of Materials.
Brick, and sand lime brick, used for bearing walls or piers shall
be of quality at least equal to the "medium brick" described by the
Standard Specifications for Building Brick of the American Society for'
Testing Materials, except that when the average compressive strength
of brick grading "soft"by the absorption test, is more than 2,500 pounds
per square inch, the requirements as to absorption may be waived.
When used for non-bearing purposes and not exposed to the weather,
brick may be of quality not inferior in any respect to the "soft brick"
described in the above specifications.
The average compressive strength of concrete brick 28 days after
being manufactured or when delivered on the job, shall be not less than
1,500 pounds per square inch of gross cross-sectional area tested in the
position as laid in the wall, and the compressive strength of any indi-
CITY OF FORT WORTH 75
vidual brick thus tested shall be not less than 1,000 pounds per square
inch.
Concrete brick subjected to a 24-hour immersion test shall absorb
not more than 12 per cent of their dry weight, except that for such
weighing less than 125 pounds per cubic foot the average absorption
in per cent by weight shall be not more than 12 multiplied by 125 and
divided by the unit weight in pounds per cubic foot of the concrete under
consideration.
All cements and limes used in mortar shall conform to the require-
ments of the standard specifications for these materials issued by the
American Society for Testing Materials.
Sand used in mortar shall be clean and free from animal or vege-
table matter.
Paragraph 14-1-2. Lateral Support.
Solid brick walls"shall be supported at right angles to the-wall face
at intervals not exceeding eighteen times the wall thickness in the top
story or twenty times the wall thickness elsewhere. Such lateral support
may be obtained by cross walls, piers, or buttresses, when the limiting
distance is measured horizontally, or by floors when the limiting dis-
tance is measured vertically. Sufficient bonding or anchorage shall be
provided between the wall and the supports to resist the assumed wind
force, acting in an outward direction. Piers or buttresses relied upon
for lateral support shall have sufficient strength and stability to trans-
fer the wind force, acting in either direction to the ground. When walls
are dependent upon floors for their lateral support, provision shall be
made in the building to transfer the lateral forces resisted by all floors
to the ground.
Paragraph 14-1-3. Working Stresses.
The maximum allowable compressive stresses in brick masonry, due
to combined live and dead loads shall not exceed the following limits:
MAXIMUM UNIT WORKING
STRESSES (LBS. PER SQUARE INCH)
Portland Natural Cement
BRICK MASONRY STRESSES— Cement or Cement Lime
Mortar Lime Mortar Mortar
Brick (clay), medium grade................200 150 100
Sand-lime brick ....................................200 150 100
Concrete brick ..................._..._...a ..__200 150 90
Where the effects of eccentric loading and Iateral forces are fully
analyzed and allowance made for them in the design, or under local
concentrated loads applied to-a limited proportion of the total area of
the wall, the working stresses in this table may be increased by 50%.
Paragraph 14-1-4. Thickness of.Exterior Walls Other Than in Skeleton
Construction.
The thickness of solid brick bearing walls shall be sufficient at all
points to keep the combined stresses due to live and dead loads for which
the building is designed within the limits prescribed by the preceding
paragraph.
The minimum thickness for solid brick exterior bearing or party
walls shall be 12 inches for the two uppermost stories not (exceeding 35
feet) of their height, and shall be increased 4 inches for each succes-
sive two stories (not exceeding 35 feet) or fraction thereof measured
downward from the top of the wall; except that the wall of a one-
story commercial or industrial building may be 8 inches thick, provided
that such 8-inch wall does not exceed 12 feet unsunDorted height and
76 BUILDING CODE
that the roof beams are horizontal; and except that exterior solid brick
bearing walls of one and two-family dwellings may be 8 inches thick
when not more than 30 feet in height. When gable construction is used
for such dwelling, an additional 5 feet is permitted to the peak of the-
gable.
Where solid brick exterior bearing or party walls are stiffened at
distances not greater than 12 feet apart by cross walls, or by internal
or external offsets or returns, at least 2 leet deep, they may be 12 inches
thick for the uppermost 50 feet, measured downward from the top of
the wall, and shall be increased 4 inches in thickness for each succes-
sive 50 feet or fraction thereof.
The minimum thickness of solid brick exterior non-bearing walls
shall be 12 inches for the uppermost 50 feet of their height, and shall
be increased 4 inches for each successive 35 feet or fraction thereof,
measured downward from the top of the wall, except that the wall of
a one-story.commercial or industrial building may be 8 inches thick,
provided that such 8-inch wall does not exceed 12 feet of unsupported
height, and that the roof beams are horizontal; and except that solid
brick non-bearing walls of one and two-family dwellings may be 8 inches
thick when not more than 30 feet in height. When gable construction
is used for such dwellings an additional 5 feet is permitted to the peak
of the gable.
Paragraph 14-1-5. Bond.
In all brick walls at least every sixth course on both sides of the
wall shall be a header course or there shall be at least one f ull length
header in every 72 square inches of each wall surface. In walla more
than 12 inches thick the inner joints of header courses shall be covered
with another header course which shall break joints with the course
below.
Where running bond is used, every sixth course on each face shall
be bonded into the backing by cutting the face brick course and using
diagonal headers behind it or by using a split brick.
Paragraph 14-1-6. Piers.
The unsupported height of piers shall not exceed ten times their
least dimension.
Paragraph 14-1-7. Chases and Recesses.
There shall be no chases in 8-inch walls or within the required
area of any pier, and no chase in any wall or pier shall be deeper than
one-third the wall thickness. No horizontal chase shall exceed 4 feet in
length, nor shall the horizontal projection of any diagonal chase exceed
4 feet.
Recesses for stairways or elevators may be left in walls, but in no
case shall the walls at such points be less than the required thickness
of walls of the fourth story above the ground floor unless reinforced by
additional piers, by steel or reinforced concrete girders, or steel or re-
inforced concrete columns and girders, securely anchored to the walls
on each side of such recesses. Recesses for alcoves and similar pur-
poses shall have not less than 8 inches of material at the back. Such
recesses shall be not more than 8 feet in width and shall be arched over
or spanned with lintels.
The aggregate area of recesses and chases in any wall shall not
exceed one-fourth the whole area of the face of the wall in any story.
No chases or recesses shall be permitted in fire or fire division walls
that will reduce the thickness below the minimum specified in this code.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 77
Openings for doors and windows shall have well-buttremed arelzes
or lintels of masonry, or of metal with bearing at each end of not mess
than 4 inches on the wall. On the inside of openings less than 4 feet
wide, in which the thickness of arches and lintels is less than that of
the wall supported, timber may be used, which will rest at each end
• not more than 2 inches on the wall and be chamfered or cut to serve
as arch centers.
Section 14-2.
WALLS OF HOLLOW TILE, CONCRETE BLOCK OR TILE, AND
HOLLOW WALLS OF BRICK.
Paragraph 14-2-1. quality of Materials.
Hollow Tile. Hollow tile used for exterior bearing walls or piers
or for party walls shall be of quality at least equal to the "medium
class" as prescribed by the Standard Specifications for Hollow Burned-
Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile of the American Society-for Testing Ma-
terials.
When used for non-bearing purposes and not exposed to the weather,
hollow tile may be of quality not inferior in any respect to the "soft
class"described in the above specifications.
Concrete Block or Concrete Tile. The average compressive strength
of concrete block or tile for exterior or party walls or piers shall be
not less than 700 pounds per square inch of gross sectional area tested
in position as used in the wall. The absorption of concrete block or tile
shall not exceed 10 per cent under a 24-hour immersion test, except that
where concrete block or tile have an average compressive strength of
over 1,200 pounds per square inch gross area, or where they are not
exposed to dampness, or where they are coated with stucco, the require-
ment as to absorption may be waived. For block or tile made of concrete
weighing less than 140 pounds per cubic foot, the average absorption in
per cent by weight shall be not more than 10 multiplied by 140 and di-
vided by the unit weight in pounds per cubic foot of the concrete under
consideration.
Tests on concrete block shall be conducted in accordance with the
Standard Specifications of the American Concrete Institute.
Brick. Brick for hollow walls shall conform to requirements of Sec-
tion 14-1.
Mortar. Either Portland cement mortar as defined, or a special
cement-lime mortar mixed in proportions of 1 part of Portland cement,
1 part slaked lime (lime putty) or dry hydrated lime, and not more than
4 parts sand, shall be used for walls of hollow unit construction or hollow
walls of brick.
Paragraph 14-2-2. Lateral Support.
Walls of hollow tile or of concrete block or tile, and all hollow walls
of brick shall be supported at right angles to the wall face at intervals
not exceeding sixteen times the wall thickness in top stories, or eighteen
times the wall thickness elsewhere. Such lateral support may be in the
form of cross walls, piers, or buttresses when the limiting distance is
horizontal, or by floors when the limiting distance is vertical. Sufficient
bonding or anchorage-shall be provided between the wall and the sup-
ports to resist the assumed wind force acting in an outward direction.
Piers or buttresses relied upon for lateral support shall have sufficient
strength and stability to transmit the wind force, acting in either direc-
tion,to the ground. When walls are dependent on floors for their lateral
78 BUILDING CODE
support provision shall be made in the building to transfer the lateral
force resisted by all floors to the ground.
.Paragraph 14-2-3. Working Stresses.
The maximum allowable compressive stresses in masonry of hollow
tile, concrete block or concrete tile, or hollow walls of brick, due to com-
bined live and dead loads, shall not exceed 80 pounds per square inch of
gross sectional area, when laid with Portland cement mortar, and 70
pounds per square inch of gross sectional area when laid with special
cement-lime mortar.
Paragraph 14-2-4.- Thickness and Height of Exterior Walls Other Than
in Skeleton Construction.
Walls of hollow tile, concrete block or tile, or hollow walls of brick
shall not exceed 50 feet in height above the top of foundation walls.
The thickness of walls of the above materials and types shall be
sufficient at all points to keep the stresses, due to combined live and
.dead loads for which the building is designed, within the limits pre-
scribed by Paragraph 14-2-3.
The minimum thickness of exterior walls of hollow tile, or concrete
block or tile, or of hollow-wall construction shall be. 12 inches for the
uppermost 35 feet of their height,and at least 16 inches for the remaining
lower portion; except that exterior walls of one and two-family dwell-
ings may be 8 inches thick for the uppermost 20 feet. When gable
construction is used for such dwellings an additional 5 feet is permitted
to the peak of the gable.
Where walls are stiffened at distances not greater than 12 feet
by cross walls or by internal or external returns at least 2 feet deep,
the thickness may be 12 inches throughout, except for one and two-
family dwellings the uppermost 20 feet may be 8 inches, as previously
provided.
Paragraph 14-2-5. Bond.
Where two or more hollow units are used to make up the thickness
of a wall,the inner and outer courses shall be bonded at vertical intervals
not exceeding three courses by lapping at least one cell completely over
P. cell of the unit below.
Paragraph 14-2-6. Beam Supports.
Suitable provision shall be made at each line of floor beams in hol-
low walls or walls of hollow units,to shut off the space above from those
.below, and to ensure good bearing for beams and uniform distribution
of loads.
Paragraph 14-2-7. Piers.
Hollow tile or hollow concrete block or tile shall not be used for
isolated piers unless solidly filled with concrete. The unsupported height
of such piers shall not exceed 10 times their least horizontal dimension.
Paragraph 14-2-8. Chases and Recesses.
Chases and recesses in walls of hollow tile, hollow concrete block
or tile, or in hollow walls of brick shall not exceed in extent those per-
mitted for solid brick walls under the same condition. Chases and re-
cesses shall not be cut in walls of the above types, but may be built in.
No chases or recesses shall be permitted in fire walls that will reduce
the thickness below the minimum specified in this code.
Openings for doors and windows shall have well-buttressed arches
or lintels of masonry or metal with bearing at each end of not less than
4 inches on the wall. On the inside of openings less than 4 feet wide,
CITY OF FORT WORTH 79
in which the thickness of arches and lintels is less than that of the wall
supported, timber may be used, which will rest at each end not more
than 2 inches on the wall and be chamfered or cut to serve as arch
centers.
Section 14-3.
WALLS OF PLAIN CONCRETE.
Paragraph 14-3-1. Concrete Material.
Monolithic concrete construction containing not more than two-
tenths of 1 per cent of reinforcement shall be classed as plain concrete.
Materials for bearing walls and piers of plain concrete shall be
mixed in proportions of 1 part of Portland cement to not more than 3
parts of sand and 5 parts of coarse aggregate, by volume, or a mixture
of fine and course aggregate giving an equivalent strength and density.
Course aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, or crushed
slag, 85010 of which is retained on a'No. 4 screeh, and shall be graded
in size from small to large particles. The particles shall be clean, hard,
durable and free from deleterious material.
Cement for plain concrete shall conform to the requirements of the
Standard Specifications and Tests for Portland Cement of the American
Society for Testing Materials.
Fine aggregate shall consist of sand, washed stone screenings or
other similar inert materials, or a combination thereof, having clean,
hard, strong, durable uncoated grains and free from injurious amounts
of dust, lumps, soft or flaky particles, shale, alkali, organic matter,
loam or other deleterious substances; and shall range from fine to coarse.
Not less than 950/c shall pass a No. 4 sieve, and not more than 30 per
cent shall pass a No. 50 sieve, when tested, according to standard prac-
tice prescribed by the American Society for Testing Materials.
Paragraph 14-3-2. Lateral Support.
Plain concrete walls shall be supported at right angles to the wall
face at intervals of not exceeding twenty times the wall thickness. Such
lateral support may be in the form of cross walls, piers, or buttresses
when the limiting spacing is horizontal, or by floors when the limiting
distance is vertical. Sufficient bonding or anchorage shall be provided
between the wall and the support to resist the assumed wind force
acting in an outward direction. Piers or buttresses relied upon for lateral
support shall have sufficient strength and stability to transfer the wind,
force,acting in either direction to the ground. When walls are dependent
upon floors for their lateral support provision shall be made in the build-
ing to transfer the lateral force resisted by all floors to the ground.
Paragraph 14-3-3. Working Stresses.
The maximum allowable stresses in masonry of plain concrete of
the proportions specified in Paragraph 14-3-1 as a minimum due to
combined dead and live loads shall not exceed 400 pounds per square
inch in compression, 35 pounds per square inch in tension or diagonal
tension; or 90 pounds per square inch in punching shear. When plain
concrete of greater strength is used the foregoing stresses may be in-
creased to 20% of the ultimate compressive strength for concrete in com-
pression,2010 in tension or diagonal tension, and 4%% in punching shear.
Paragraph 14-3-4. Thickness of Wall.
The minimum thickness of plain concrete bearing walls shall be 10
inches for the uppermost 35 feet of their height and shall be increased
4 inches for each successive 35 feet or fraction thereof, measured down-
80 13UILDING CODE
ward from the.top of the wall, except that the wall of a one-story com-
mercial or industrial building may be 8 inches thick, provided that such
8-inch wall does not exceed 12 feet unsupported height and that the roof
beams are horizontal, and except that exterior bearing walls of one and
two-family dwellings may be 6 inches thick when not more than 30 feet
in height. When gable construction is used for such dwellings an ad-
ditional 5 feet is permitted to the peak of the gable.
When plain concrete bearing walls of buildings more than three
stories high are stiffened at points not more than 12 feet apart by cross
walls, or by internal or external offsets or returns at least 2 feet deep,
they may be 10 inches thick for the uppermost 50 feet of their height
and shall be increased 4 inches in thickness for each successive 50 feet
or fraction thereof.
The minimum thickness of plain concrete exterior non-bearing walls
shall be 10 inches for the uppermost 50 feet of their height, and shall
be increased 4 inches for each successive 35 feet or fraction thereof,
measured downward from the top of the wall; except that the top story
wall of a building not exceeding three stories or 40 feet in height, or
the wall of a one-story commercial or industrial building may be 8 inches
thick, provided that such 8-inch wall does not exceed 12 feet unsupported
height, and that the roof beams are horizontal; and except that exterior
non-bearing walls of one and two-family dwellings may be 6 inches thick
when not more than 30 feet in height. When gable construction is used
for such dwellings an additional 5 feet is permitted to the peak of the
gable.
Hollow monolithic walls of plain concrete shall have the same net
cross sectional area of material, irrespective of the space within the
wall, as required for solid walls. The inner and outer parts of such
wall shall be securely braced and tied together with non-corrodible ties
or other means to bring them into common action. Where floor and
roof systems are carried by such walls, provision shall be made for
the distribution of these loads to the full cross section of the wall. For
interior wall requirements see Paragraph 14-7-1 to 14-7-4 and also 14-7-6
and 14-7-7.
Paragraph 14-3-5. Reinforcement.
Reinforcement, not less than two-tenths of 1010 computed on a ver-
tical height of 12 inches, shall be placed over all wall openings and at
corners of the structure to prevent cracks. Floor and roof connection
details shall be designed to transmit safely the vertical and horizontal
loads imposed.
Paragraph 14-3-6. Piers.
The unsupported height of isolated piers of plain concrete shall not
exceed ten times their least dimension.
Paragraph 14-3-7. Chases and Recesses.
Chases and recesses in plain concrete walls shall not exceed in ex-
tent those permitted for solid brick walls under the same conditions.
Section 14-4.
STONE WALLS.
Paragraph 14-4-1. Working Stresses.
The maximum allowable compressive stresses in rubble stonework,
due to combined live and dead loads, shall not exceed 140 pounds per
square inch when laid in Portland cement mortar, 100 pounds per square
CITY OF FORT WORTH 81
inch in natural cement or cement-lime mortar, and 70 pounds per square
inch in lime mortar.
The maximum allowable compressive stress in ashlar masonry, due
to combined live and dead loads, shall not exceed the following limits:
Maximum Unit Working Stresses
(pounds per square inch) Laid in—
Portland Cement Lime
UNIT—. Cement or Natural Lime
Mortar Cement Mortar Mortar
Granite ....................................................800 640 400
Limestone ................................................5W 400 250
Marble .........................................----------50 400 250
Sandstone .................................................400 320 160
Paragraph 14-4-2. Lateral Support and Thickness.
Rubble stone walls shall be 4 inches thicker than is required for solid
brick walls of the same respective heights, but in no part less than 16
inches.
The minimum thickness for walls or piers of ashlar masonry prop-
erly bonded shall be the same as required for solid brick walls and piers
under similar conditions.
The lateral support for stone walls shall conform to the same re-
quirements specified for solid brick walls. See Paragraph 14-1-2.
Paragraph 14-4-3. Bond.
Bond stones extending through the wall and uniformly distributed
shall The provided to the extent of not less than 10% of the area, and
there shall be at least one bond stone for every eight stretchers.
Paragraph 14-4-4. Chases and Recesses.
Chases and recesses in stone walls shall not exceed in extent those
permitted for solid brick walls under the same conditions.
Section 14-5.
VENEERED WALLS.
Paragraph 14-5-1. Quality of Materials.
Materials used in the backing and veneering of veneered walls shall
conform in all respects to the requirements prescribed for such materials.
Stone or architectural terra Gotta ashlar, or other approved masonry ma-
terial used for veneering, shall be not less than 3 inches thick. In stone
ashlar each stone shall have a reasonably uniform thickness, but all
stones need not necessarily be the same thickness.
Paragraph 14-5-2. Working Stresses.
The maximum allowable compressive stresses on the backing of
veneered walls, due to combined live and dead loads, shall not exceed
those elsewhere prescribed for masonry of the type which forms such
backing. In no case shall the veneering be considered a part -of the
wall in computing the strength of bearing walls, nor .shall it be con-
sidered a part of the required thickness of the wall.
* Paragraph 14-5-3. Attachment of Veneering.
When walls are veneered with brick, terra cotta, stone or concrete
trim stone the veneering shall be tied into the backing either by a header
for every 300 square inches of wall surface, or by substantial non-cor-
rodible corrugated metal wall ties, not less than 1 inch x 8 inches x 1/16.
82 BUILDING CODE
•
inch,. spaced not farther apart than 1 foot vertically and 2 feet hori-
zontally. Headers shall project at least 394 inches into the backing, and Y
anchors shall be of substantial pattern. When veneering is used special
care shall be taken to fill all joints flush with mortar around wall
openings.
s
In the case of brick, stone, terra-cotta or artificial stone veneer
facing on concrete, such galvanized iron ties shall consist of a galvanized
iron dovetail channel cast into the concrete and with such channel so
formed and constructed that it will rigidly and securely hold in place a
galvanized iron strip having one end thereof dovetailed to fit into said
channel. Such dovetail channels shall be at least 1 inch x % inch and
not less than No. 24 United States standard gauge and shall be spaced
not to exceed seventeen (17) inches on centers horizontally and extend
from the bottom to the top of the facing. Such dovetail strips shall be
at least two (2) inches wide and have a %-inch lug at the end oppo-
site the dovetail end, and shall be not less than No. 16 United States
standard gauge and shall be placed and laid in every forth course in
the vertical height of the wall and spaced not more than seventeen (17)
inches on centers horizontally. No metal tie of any kind shall be placed
or laid over a joint between adjoining bricks.
Paragraph 14-5-4. Height of Veneered Walls.
Veneered walls shall not exceed 40 feet in height above foundation,
or other structural supports.
Paragraph 14-5-5. Veneered Frame Buildings.
Where veneer of any type is used on frame buildings the outside
of the studs shall be storm sheeted solid throughout with matched boards
not less than 25/32 inches in thickness.
Section 14-6.
FACED WALLS.
Paragraph 14-6-1. Quality of Materials.
Materials used in the backing and facing of faced'walls shall con-
form in all respects to the requirements prescribed for such materials in
Section 14-1. ,
Materials used for facing shall be not less than 33, inches thick, and
in no case less in thickness than one-eighth the height of the unit, ex-
cepting that spandrel and other recessed panels, when approved, may
be higher than eight times their thickness, provided they are of the
minimum thickness required.
Paragraph 14-6-2. Working Stresses.
The maximum allowable compressive stresses on faced walls, due
to combined live and dead loads, shall not exceed those elsewhere pre-
scribed for masonry of the type which forms the backing. Where bonded
to the backing as provided in Paragraph 14-6-4, the full cross section of
the facing may be considered in computing bearing strength.
Paragraph 14-6-3. Thickness.
Faced walls shall be not less in thickness than is required for ma-
sonry walls of the type which forms the backing. Where bonded to the
backing as provided in Paragraph 14-6-4, the facing may be considered
a part of the wall thickness.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 83
Paragraph 1&6-4. Bond.
Brick facing shall be bonded to walls of brick or of hollow tile, or
of concrete block or tile with at least one header course in every six
courses, or there shall be at least one full length header in every 72
square inches of wall surface.
Stone ashlar facing shall have at least 24 per cent of the superficial
area not less than 3%-inch thicker than the remainder of the facing to
form bond stones, which shall be uniformly distributed throughout the
wall.
Section 14-7.
FIRE WALLS, FIRE DIVISION WALLS AND PARTITIONS.
Paragraph 14-7-1. Brick and Plain Concrete Fire Walls.
Solid brick or plain concrete fire walls shall be not less in thickness
than required for exterior bearing walls of corresponding height, but
not less than 12 inches, except that solid brick fire walls for buildings
of residential occupancy shall be not less than 8 inches thick for the
uppermost 24 feet of height and shall be at least 12 inches thick for
the remaining lower portion; and except that plain concrete fire walls
for such structures may be 8 inches throughout. No 8-inch fire wall
shall be broken into, subsequent to building, for the insertion of struc-
tural members.
Party walls which function also on fire walls shall conform to the
requirements for fire walls.
A separation of at.least 4 inches of solid-masonry shall be provided
in all fire and party walls between combustible members which may
enter such walls from opposite sides.
Paragraph 14-7-2. Fire Walls of Hollow Tile, Concrete Block or Con-
crete Tile, or of Hollow Wall Construction.
Fire walls of hollow tile or concrete block or concrete tile shall be
not less than 16 inches thick in any part, except that for residential
buildings they may be not less than 12 inches thick throughout Hollow
walls of brick used as fire walls shall be not less than 12 inches thick
throughout. No fire walls of the above type shall be broken into, sub-
sequent to erection,for the insertion of structural members.
Where combustible or unprotected steel building members frame
into hollow party or fire walls of thickness not greater than 12 inches,
they shall not project more than 4 inches into the wall and shall be so
spaced that the distance between embedded ends is not less than 4 inches.
The space above, below, and between them shall be filled solidly with
burnt-clay materials, mortar, concrete, or equivalent fire-resistive ma-
terials, to a depth of not less than 4 inches on all sides of the members.
All open cells in tile or blocks occurring at wall ends shall be filled
solid with concrete for at least a depth of 6 inches, or closure tile set
in the opposite direction shall be used.
Party walls which function also as fire walls shall conform to re-
quirements for fire walls.
L Paragraph 14-7-3. Fire Division Walls.
Fire division walls of solid brick or plain concrete shall be not less
than 8 inches thick.
Fire division walls of hollow tile, or of concrete block or tile, shall
: be not less than 12 inches thick in any part, and for buildings of storage
and heavy manufacturing occupancy they shall be not less than 16 inches
84 DUILDING CODE
thick throughout. Hollow walls of brick used as fire division walls shall
be not less than 12 inches thick throughout.
Paragraph 14-7-4. Alternate Requirements for Fire and Fire Division
Walls.
Wall constructions that in fire tests conducted according to accepted
standards develop safe fire-resistance periods of one and one-half hours
may be permitted for fire walls and fire division walls between residence
occupancies,if otherwise adequate in point of strength and stability. For
general mercantile and manufacturing occupancies, excluding buildings
or portions of buildings used for storage, wall construction developing,
on the same basis, a safe fire-resistance period of three hours shall be
similarly permitted.
Paragraph 14-7-5. Parapet Walls.
In commercial or industrial buildings and in residential buildings
over three stories high, all fire or party walls shall project above the
roof as parapets.
Where not otherwise specified parapet walls shall be at least 32
inches high, but not higher than four times their thickness unless
laterally supported. They shall be at least as thick as the top story
wall, except that they need not in .any case be more than 12 inches
thick.
In residential buildings not more than three stories high parapet
walls shall extend through combustible roofs to a height of at least 12
inches above the roof. All parapet walls shall be coped with approved
stone, concrete or vitrified clay in not less than 18-inch lengths.
Paragraph 14-7-6. Bearing Partitions.
All interior bearing walls, except fire walls, fire division walls, and
party walls, are considered as bearing partitions.
For bearing partitions, materials meeting the ordinary accepted
local standards for the purpose may be used.
Where not utilized as party, fire, or fire division walls solid brick
bearing partitions shall be not less than 8 inches thick, and those of
hollow tile, concrete block or concrete tile, or hollow walls of brick shall
be not less in thickness than one-eighteenth of the height between
floors or floor beams. (For conditions governing concentrations see
Paragraph 14-1-3.)
Paragraph 14-7-7. lion-Bearing Partitions.
For non-bearing partitions, materials meeting the ordinary accepted
local standards for the purpose may be used.
Brick non-bearing partitions shall be not less than 3% inches thick
for a height not exceeding 12 feet between floors or floor beams and
for a length not exceeding 20 feet between vertical supports. Non-
bearing partitions of hollow tile, concrete block or concrete tile, hol-
low walls of brick or of gypsum block or other similar materials shall be
built solidly against floor and ceiling construction below and above, and
shall not exceed the following unsupported heights:
Thickness Maximum Thickness Maximum
Exclusive Unsupported Exclusive Unsupported
of plaster Height of Plaster Height
Inches Feet Inches Feet
2 8 6 20
3 12 8 25
4 15
CITY OF FORT WORTH
Section 14-8.
FOUNDATION WALLS.
Paragraph 14-8-1. Foundation Walls.
w
Foundation walls for solid-wall construction shall be of stone, solid
brick, concrete (plain, rubble, or reinforced), or solid concrete block.
Solid brick foundation walls and those of concrete blocks or coursed stone
shall be not less in thickness than the walls immediately above them
and in no case less than 12 inches thick, except that when the inclosure
is not -excavated, they may be 8 inches thick if included within the
allowable height of 8-inch walls. When built of concrete cast in place,
foundation walls shall be at least as thick as the walls supported, but
in no case less than $ inches. When built of rubble stone, they shall
be at least 16 inches thick. Rough or random rubble without bonding
or level beds shall not be used as foundations for walls exceeding 35
feet in height nor shall coursed bonded rubble walls be used as founda-
tions for walls exceeding 75 feet in height.
Foundation walls for hollow tile, concrete block or tile, hollow walls
of brick, or frame eonstruction, shall be of the same materials and
thickness, respectively, as required in the paragraph above.
When the stresses, due to earth pressure and superposed building
load, exceed the maximum working stress elsewhere specified for brick
masonry, and the additional stresses are not otherwise provided for,
the wall thickness shall be increased to bring them within these limits.
Foundation walls for frame construction shall extend at least 8
inches above the adjoining ground surface.
All foundation walls shall extend below the level of frost action.
Materials for foundation walls shall be equal in quality in all re-
spects to those required for exterior bearing walls, except that mortar
containing lime in greater proportions by volume than 1 part to 1 part
of cement and 6 parts of sand shall not be used for exterior foundation
walls below grade.
Section 14-9
SKELETON CONSTRUCTION.
Paragraph 14-9-1. Panel and Inclosure Walla.
Panel walls in buildings of skeleton construction shall be not less
than 8 inches thick if of solid brick, hollow tile, concrete block or tile,
plain concrete, or hollow walls of brick. Inclosure walls shall be not
less than 8 inches thick nor less in thickness than one-twentieth the
horizontal distance between anchors.
Section 14-10.
NEW TYPES OF MASONRY CONSTRUCTION.
Paragraph 14-10-1. New Masonry Construction.
The use of new or improved masonry materials or methods not
covered by this code may be permitted, providing that they conform to
' specifications, insuring reasonable uniformity of the product; and that
the stability and durability of such construction, and its resistance under
fire exposure shall have been satisfactorily demonstrated. Working
stresses shall be fixed at not more than 20010 of the average ultimate
strength of masonry walls constructed of such materials, as determined
by responsible authorities.
86 BUILDING CODE
Section 14-11.
MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS. +
Paragraph 14-11-1. Anchoring Walls.
All walls shall be securely anchored and bonded at points where
they intersect.
Paragraph 14-11-2. Use of Existing Walls.
An existing brick wall may be used in the renewal or extension of
a building; or may be increased in height beyond that allowed by this
code for walls of its existing thickness and materials of construction,
provided that such wall is structurally sound or can be made so by
reasonable repairs. Walls increased in height shall be at least 4 inches
thicker than is required by this code for newly constructed walls of
such increased .height, and in no case shall linings be less than S inches
thick and laid in Portland cement mortar. The foundations and lateral
support shall be equivalent to those elsewhere required for newly Con-
structed walls under similar conditions. All linings shall be thoroughly
bonded into existing masonry by toothings of brick or stone to assure
combined action of wall and lining. Such toothings shall be distributed a
fairly uniformly throughout the wall and shall aggregate in vertical
cross-sectional area not less than lb% of the total vertical area of tbo
lining.
No existing wall shall be used for renewal or extension of a building
or increased in height without special written permission from the.Build-
ing Commissioner.
Paragraph 14-11-3. Corbeling of Chimneys.
No brick wall less than 12 inches thick shall be used to support a
corbeled chimney. Such corbeling shall not project more than 6 inches
from the face of the wall, and in all such cases the corbeling shall con-
sist of at least five courses of brick. No chimney shall be corbeled from
a wall built of hollow tile, hollow concrete block, concrete'tile, or hollow
walls of brick.
Paragraph 14-11-4. Cornices.
The centers of gravity of stone cornices shall be inside of the outer
wall face. Terra cotta or metal cornices shall be structurally supported
from the roof of the building.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 87
Chapter 15.
. STEEL CONSTRUCTION,
Section 15-1.
MATERIAL.
Paragraph 15-1-1. Requirements.
Structural steel shall conform to the Standard Specifications of the
American Society for Testing Materials for Structural Steel for Build-
ings, Serial Designation A-9-21, as amended to date.
Section 15-2.
LOADING.
Paragraph 15-2-1. Design.
Steel structures shall be designed to sustain the dead weight im-
posed upon them, including the weight of the steel frame itself, and, in
addition, the maximum live load as specified in each particular case.
Proper provision shall be made for temporary stresses caused by erec-
tion.
_ Paragraph 15-2-2. Impact.
In cases where live loads have the effect of producing impact or
vibration, a proper percentage shall be added to the static live load
stresses to provide for such influences, so that the total stress found
in any member is an equivalent static stress.
Paragraph 15-2-3. Wind Pressure.
Proper provision shall be made for stresses caused by wind both
during erection and after completion of the building. The wind pres-
sure is to be assumed in accordance with the requirements of
Chapter 13.
Paragraph 15-2-4. Reactions.
Proper provision shall be made to securely fasten the reaction
points of all steel construction and transmit the stresses to the founda-
tion of the structure.
Section 15-3.
ALLOWABLE STRESSES.
Paragraph 15-3-1. General Requirements.
All parts of the structure shall be so proportioned that the sum of
the maximum static stresses in pounds per square inch shall not exceed
the following:
(a) Tension, rolled steel, on net section............. .....--..--..18,000
(b) Compression, rolled steel, on short lengths or where
deflection is prevented..............................................................18,000
On gross section of columns,
18,000
1'
1+
18,000r,
With a maximum of...... ............_......,-----------•--- --............_ _....Ikoo0
In which 1 is the unsupported length of the column, and r is the cor-
responding least radius of gyration of the section, both in inches.
88 BUILDING CODE
For main compression members, the ratio 1/r shall not exceed 120, V
and for bracing and other secondary members, 200.
(c) Bending: On extreme fibres of rolled shapes, and built up
sections, net section, if lateral deflection is prevented......................18,000
When the unsupported length 1 exceeds 15 times b, the width of #
the compression flange, the stress in pounds per square inch in the
latter shall not exceed
20,000
1'
1+
2,000b'
The laterally unsupported length of beams and girders shall not
exceed 40 times b, the width of the compression flange.
On extreme fibres of pins, when the forces are assumed as acting
at the center of gravity of the pieces.........-.».........._........._..,..,,..,.,27,000
(d) Shearing:
On pins . ...........
.........
....................
...._,...:Au"
On power-driven rivets...........................................................ISA00
On turned bolts in reamed holes with a clearance of not
more than 1/50 of an inch................................_.............
�.]3,T
On hand-driven rivets..............................................................1000
On unfinished bolts....,.._............._............,...............................10,000
On the gross area of the webs of beams and girders,
where h, the height between flanges in inches, is
not more than 60 times t, the thickness of the web
ininches ............................:....._.............................------...._.._1
On the gross area of the webs of beams and girders if the web is
not stiffened where h, the height between flanges in inches, is
more than 60 times t, the thickness of the web, the maximum
shear per square inch, S/A shall not exceed
18,000
h'
1
7,200t'
In which S is the total shear,and A is gross area of web in square inches.
(e) Bearing: Double Single
Shear Shear
Onpins ..................................................................30.000 24,000
On power-drivel rivets ......................................80,000 24,000
On turned bolts in reamed holes..............:.........30,000 24,000
On hand-driven rivets..........................................20,000 16,000
On unfinished bolts..............................................20,000 16,000
On expansion rollers per lineal inch, 600
times the diameter of the rollers in inches.
(f) Combined Stresses: For combined stresses due to wind and
other loads, the permissible working stress may be increased 50% pro-
vided the section thus found is not less than that required by the dead
and live loads alone.
(g) Members Carrying Wind Only: For members carrying wind
stresses only, the permissible working stresses may be increased fifty
(50%) per cent.
CITY OP FORT WORTH 89
Section 15-4.
a
SYMMETRICAL MEMBERS.
Paragraph 15-4-1. In General.
a Sections shall preferably be symmetrical.
Section 15-5.
BEAMS AND GIRDERS.
Paragraph 15-5-1. Proportioning.
Rolled beams shall be proportioned by the moment of inertia of
their net section. Plate girders with webs fully spliced for tension and
compression shall be so proportioned that the unit stress on the net
section does not exceed the stresses specified in section five (5) as
determined by the moment of inertia of the net section.
Paragraph 15-5-2. Plate Girder Webs.
Plate girder webs shall have a thickness of not less than 1-160 of
the unsupported distance between the flanges.
Paragraph 15-5-3. Web Splices.
Web splices shall consist of a plate on each side of the web capable
of transmitting the full stress through the splice rivets.
Paragraph 15-5-4. Stiffeners.
Stiffeners shall be required on the webs of rolled beams and plate
girders at the ends and at points of concentrated loads, and at other
points where h, the clear distance between flanges, is greater than
85 t V 18,000 CA) — 1 in which t is the thickness of the web.
S
When stiffeners are required, the distance in inches between them shall
not be greater than 85 t V 18,000 �A� — 1 or not greater than•
S
6 feet. When h is greater than 60 times t, the thickness of the web
of a plate girder, stiffeners shall be required at distances not greater
than 6 feet apart. Stiffeners under or over concentrated loads shall be
proportioned to distribute such loads into the web.
Plate girder stiffeners shall generally be in pairs, one on each side
of the web, and shall have a close bearing against the flange angles
at points of concentrated loading; stiffeners over the end bearing, or
under concentrated loads, shall be on plate fillers. The pitch of rivet
in stiffeners shall not exceed 6 inches.
Paragraph 15-5-5. Flange Plates.
Flange plates of all girders shall be limited in width so as not to
extend more than 6 inches or more than 12 times the thickness of
thinnest plate beyond the outer row of rivets connecting them to the
angles.
4
Paragraph 15-5-6. Crane Runway Girders.
Crane runway girders and the supporting frame work shall be
proportioned to resist the greatest horizontal stresses caused by the
operation of the cranes.
90 BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 15-5-7. Rivets.
a
Rivets connecting the flanges to the web at points of direct load
on the flange between stiffeners shall be proportioned to carry the
resultant of the longitudinal and transverse shears.
Rivets connecting the flanges to the webs of plate girders and of
columns subjected to bending shall be so spaced as to carry the in-
crement of the flange stress between the rivets.
Section 15-6.
COLUMN BASES.
Paragraph 15-6-1. Distribution.
Proper provision shall be made to distribute the column loads on
the footings and foundations.
Paragraph 15-6-2. Planed Surfaces.
The top surface of all column bases shall be planed for the column
bearing.
Paragraph 15-6-3. Setting.
Column bases shall be set true and level, with full bearing on the
masonry, and be properly secured to the footings.
Paragraph 15-6-4. Grillage Beams.
Steel grillage beams for foundations shall be provided with separa-
tors and bolts, and shall always be imbedded in masonry construction.
Section 15-7.
ECCENTRIC LOADING.
Paragraph 15-7-1. Provisions For.
Full provision shall be made for stresses caused by eccentric
loading.
Section 15-5.
COMBINED STRESSES.
Paragraph 15-5-1. Direct and Bending.
Members subject to both direct and bending stresses shall be so
proportioned that the greatest combined stresses shall not exceed the
allowed limits.
Paragraph 15-5-2. Tension and Compression.
All members and their connections which are subject to stresses
of both tension and compression due to the action of live loads-shall
be designed to sustain stress giving the largest section, with 50% of
the smaller stress added to it. If the reversal of stress is due to the
action of wind, the member shall be designed for the stress giving the
largest section and the connections proportioned for the largest stress.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 91
Section 15-9.
ABUTTING JOINTS.
Paragraph 15-9-1. Splicing.
Compression members when faced for bearings shall be spliced
sufficiently to hold the connected members accurately in place. Other
joints in riveted work, whether in tension or compression, shall be fully
spliced.
Section 15-10.
NET SECTIONS.
Paragraph 15-10-1. Riveted Members.
In calculating tension members, the net section shall be used, and
in deducting the rivet holes they shall be taken %-inch greater in
diameter than the nominal diameter of the rivet.
Paragraph 15-10-2. Pin Connected Members.
Pin connected tension members shall have the section through
the pin hole 25% in excess of the net section of the member, and a
net•section back of the pin hole equal to 75% of that required through
the pin hole.
Section 15-11.
RIVETS AND BOLTS.
Paragraph 15-11-1. Diameter.
In proportioning rivets, the nominal diameter of the rivet shall
be used.
Paragraph 15-11-2. Grip.
Rivets carrying calculated stresses, and whose grip exceeds five
diameters, shall have their number increased 1% for each additional
1/10-inch in the rivet grip. Special care shall be used in heating and
driving such rivets.
Paragraph 15-11-3. Impact and Reversal.
Rivets shall be used for the connections of main members carry-
ing live loads which produce impact, and for connections subject to
reversal of stresses.
Paragraph 15-11-4. Bolts.
Finished bolts in reamed holes may be used in shop or field work
where it is impracticable to obtain satisfactory power-driven rivets.
The finished shank shall be long enough to provide full bearing, and
s washers used under the nuts to give full grip when turned tight.
Unfinished bolts may be used in shop or field work for connections
in small structures used for shelters, and for secondary members of all
structures such as purlins, girts, door and window framing, alignment
bracing and secondary beams in floor.
92 BUILDING CODE
Section 15-12.
RIVET SPACING.
Paragraph 15-12-1. Minimum and Maximum.
The minimum distance between centers of rivet holes shall be
three diameters of the rivet; but the distance shall preferably be not
less than 4% inches for 11/4-inch rivets, 4 inches for 1%-inch rivets,
3% inches for 1-inch rivets, 3 inches for 7/s-inch rivets, 2% inches for
%-inch rivets, 2 inches for %-inch rivets, and 114 inches for %-inch
rivets.
The maximum pitch in the line of stress of compression members
composed of plates and shapes shall not exceed 16 times the thinnest
outside plate or shape, nor 20 times the thinnest enclosed plate or shape
with a maximum of 12 inches, and at right angles to the direction of
stress the distance between lines of rivets shall not exceed 30 times
the thinnest plate or shape.
For angles in built sections with two gage lines, with rivets stag-
gered, the maximum pitch in the line of stress in each gage line shall
not exceed 24 times the thinnest plate with a maximum of 18 inches.
Paragraph 15-12-2. Stitch Rivets.
In tension members composed of two angles, a pitch of 3% feet
will be allowed, and in compression members, 2 feet, but the ratio 1/r
for each angle between rivets shall not be more than % of that for
the whole member.
Paragraph 15-12-3. Compressiori Members.
The pitch of rivets at the ends of built compression members shall
not exceed four diameters of the rivets for a length equal to one and
one-half times the maximum width of the member.
Paragraph 15-12-4. Edge Distance.
The minimum distance from the center of any rivet hole to a
sheared edge shall be 2% inches for 11/4-inch rivets, 2 inches for I%-
inch rivets, 1% inches for 1-inch rivets, 1% inches for 7/8-inch rivets,
1114 inches for %-inch rivets, 1% inches for %-inch rivets, and 1 inch
for %-inch rivets and to a rolled edge shall be 2 inches, 1% inches, 1%
inches, 1% inches, 1% inches, 1 inch and % inch, respectively. The
maximum distance from any edge shall be 12 times the thickness of
the plate, but shall not exceed 6 inches.
Section 15-13.
CONNECTIONS.
Paragraph 15-13-1. Minimum Rivets.
Connections carrying calculated stresses except for lacing, sag
bars, or angles, hand rails or beam connections, shall not have less than
2 rivets; or for field connections not less than 3 rivets.
Paragraph 15-13-2. Alignment.
Members meeting at a joint shall have their lines of center gravity
meet at a point if practicable; if not, provision shall be made for any ,
eccentricity.
Paragraph 15-13-3. Transmittal of Stresses.
The rivets at the ends of any member transmitting the stresses
into that member should have their centers of gravity in the line of the #
CITY OF FORT WORTH 93
center of gravity of the member; if not, provision shall be made for
the effect of the resulting eccentricity. Pins may be so placed as to
counteract the effect of bending due to dead load.
Paragraph 15-13-4. Continuous Beams.
When a beam or girder "A" is connected to another member in
AO such a manner that "A" acts as a continuous or fixed end beam, proper
provisions shall be made for the bending moments at such a connec-
tion.
Paragraph 15-13-5. Fillers.
Where stress is transmitted from one piece to another, through a
loose filler, the number of rivets shall be properly increased; tight-
fitting fillers shall be preferred.
Section 15-14.
LATTICE.
Paragraph 15-14-1. Tie PIates.
The open sides of compression members shall be provided with
lattice having tic plates at each end and at intermediate points if the
lattice is interrupted. Tie plates shall be as near the ends as prac-
ticable. In main members carrying calculated stresses the end tie
plates shall have a length of not less than the distance between the
lines of rivets connecting them to the flanges, and intermediate ones
of not less than one-half of this distance. The thickness of tie plates
shall not be less than one-fiftieth of the distance between the lines of
rivets connecting them to the segments of the members, and the rivet
pitch shall not be more than four diameters. Tie plates shall be suf-
ficient in size and number to equalize the stress in the parts of the
members.
Paragraph 15-14-2. Lattice Bars.
Lattice bars shall have neatly finished ends. The thickness of Iat-
tice bars shall be not less than one-fortieth for single lattice and one-
sixtieth for double lattice of the distance between end rivets; their
minimum width shall be as follows:
For 15-inch channels, or built sections with 3% and 4-inch angles,
21/4 inches (%-inch rivets) or 2% inches (%-inch rivets).
For 12, 1a/0 and 9-inch channels, or built sections with 3-inch angles,
21/4 inches (%-inch rivets).
For 8 and 7-inch channels or built sections with 2%-inch angles,
2 inches (%-inch rivets) or 21/4 inches (%-inch rivets).
For 6 and 5-inch channels, or built sections with 2-inch angles, 1%
inches (%-inch rivets) or 1% inches (%-inch rivets).
Paragraph 15-14-3. Pitch.
(The inclination of lattice bars to the axis of the members shall
generally be not less than 45 degrees but when the distance between
the rivet lines in the flanges is more than 15 inches, the lattice shall
be double and riveted at the intersection if bars are used, or else shall
be made of angles.
Paragraph 15-14-4. Spacing.
Lattice bars shall be so spaced that the ratio l/r of the flange in-
cluded between their connections shall be not over %-inch of that of
the member as a whole.
94 BUILDING MODE
Section 15-15.
EXPANSION.
Paragraph 15-15-1. General.
Proper provision shall be made for expansion and contraction.
Section 15-16.
MINIMUM THICKNESS.
Paragraph 15-16-1. General.
No steel less than 5/16-inch thick shall be used for exterior con-
struction, nor less than 1/4-inch for interior construction, except for
linings or fillers and rolled structural shapes.
For light structures such as skylights, marquise, fire escapes, light
one-story buildings or light miscellaneous steel work, the thickness of
metal shall not be less than 3/16-inch.
For trusses having end reactions of 35,000 pounds or over, the
gusset plates shall be not less than %-inch thick.
Section 15-17.
ADJUSTABLE MEMBERS. '
Paragraph 15-17-1. General.
The initial stress in adjustable members shall be assumed as not
less than 5,000 pounds.
Section 15-18.
WORKMANSHIP.
Paragraph 15-18-1. Quality.
All workmanship shall be equal to the best practice in modern
structural shops.
Paragraph 15-18-2. Drifting.
Drifting to enlarge unfair holes shall not be permitted.
Paragraph 15-18-3. Built Up Sections.
The several pieces forming built sections shall be straight and fit !1
close together; and finished members shall be free from twists, bends
or open joints.
Paragraph 15-18-4. Heating.
Rolled sections, except for minor details, shall not be heated.
Paragraph 15-18-5. Annealing.
Wherever steel casings are used, they shall be properly annealed.
Paragraph 15-18-6. Punching.
Materials may be, punched 1/16-inch larger than the nominal
diameter of the rivets, whenever the thickness of the metal is equal to
or less than the diameter of the rivets, plus %-inch. When the metal
is thicker than the diameter of the rivets, plus %-inch, the holes shall
be drilled, or sub-punched and reamed.
CITY OF FORT WOBT11 9b
Paragraph 15-18-7. Riveting.
Rivets are to be driven hot, and wherever practicable, by power.
Rivet heads shall be of hemispherical shape and uniform size through-
out the work for the same size rivet, full, neatly finished, and concentric
with the holes. Rivets, after driving, shall be tight, completely filling
the holes, and with heads in full contact with the surface.
Paragraph 15-18-8. Milling.
Compression joints depending upon contact bearing shall have the
bearing surfaces truly faced after the members are riveted. All other
joints shall be cut or dressed true and straight, especially where ex-
posed to view.
Paragraph 15=18-9. Burning.
The use of a burning torch is permissible if the burned metal is
not carrying stresses during the burning. Stresses shall not be trans-
mitted into the metal through a burned surface.
Section 15-19.
PAINTING.
Paragraph 15-19-1. Protection.
Parts not in contact, but inaccessible, after assembling, shall be
properly protected by paint.
Paragraph 15-19-2. Cleaning.
All steel work except where encased in concrete, shall be thoroughly
cleaned and given one coat of acceptable metal protection well worked
em into the joints and open spaces.
Paragraph 15-19-3. Corrosion.
Machine finished surfaces shall be protected against corrosion.
Paragraph 15-19-4. After Erection.
After the structure is erected, the work shall be thoroughly pro-
tected by painting, parging with Portland cement, completely encas-
ing in concrete, or other equivalent method.
Section 15-20.
ERECTION.
Paragraph 15-20-1. Bracing.
The frame of all steel skeleton buildings shall be carried up true
and plumb; and temporary bracing shall be introduced wherever neces-
sary to take care of all loads to which the structure may be subjected,
including erection equipment, and the operation of same. Such brac-
ing shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety.
Paragraph 15-20-2. Bolting.
As erection progresses the work shall be securely bolted up to
take care of all dead load, wind and erection stresses.
Paragraph 15-20-3. Temporary Loading.
Wherever piles of material, erection equipment, or other loads are
carried during erection, proper provision shall be made to take care of
stresses resulting therefrom.
Q6 $uu,.pzrzc SAE �
Paragraph 15-20-4. Plumbing.
No riveting shall be dons until the structure has been properly 4
aligned.
Paragraph 15-20-5. Field Rivets.
Rivets driven in the field shall be heated and driven with the same
care as those driven in the shop.
Paragraph 15-20-6. Limiting Erection.
Erection shall not precede complete riveting of main connections
by more than three tiers nor more than 70 feet.
Paragraph 15-20-7. Temporary Staging.
At least one entire floor not more than two stories below the erec-
tion operations shall be kept tightly boarded, each board of which shall
be capable of safely sustaining a center load of 300 pounds; and ladders
of ample strength, firmly secured, and in flights from floor to floor
with ample stages, shall be maintained from the ground level to the
level of the erection operations.
Paragraph 15-20-5. Flying Pieces.
In driving pins, cutting of rivet heads and backing out rivets, a
soft and resilient back shall be used to stop the flying pieces; and
each gang engaged in such operations or in riveting shall have a stout
metal pail in which shall be carried and received all rivets, bolts, nuts, r
pins and other small articles required.
Paragraph 15-20-9. Precautions.
Care shall be exercised in setting and securing forges, which shall
be located near the riveting gangs on platforms sufficiently tight to -
prevent the passage of live coals and hot ashes, and of size and strength
to afford safe and ample quarters for the workmen and their tools.
Paragraph 15-20-10. Mill Building. r
In erecting one-story steel framed mill buildings in which the
frame work consists of successive bents each composed of a pair of
posts carrying a truss, unless otherwise braced, a tower, four posts
and two trusses securely braced together and down to the ground shall
be first erected, to which the succeeding bents shall be securely braced
as the erection proceeds.
Section 15-21.
INSPECTION.
Paragraph 15-21-1. Special.
Wherever the Building Commissioner deems it necessary, he shall
have power to require the owner, architect, engineer or contractor to
provide inspection of the work of erection of structural iron or steel
framework by a recognized, disinterested testing and inspecting labora-
tory fully equipped and competent for this kind of work.
Section 15-22.
FIRE ESCAPES.
Paragraph 15-22-1. Workmanship and Proportions.
The workmanship and proportions of metal fire escapes, including
the balconies, stairs, ladders, etc., in connection therewith, shall con- :
CITY OF FORT WORTH 97
form to the requirements of the Texas State Fire Escape Law in effect
at the time of erection.
Paragraph 15-22-2. Standpipe Load.
` When a standpipe is attached to a fire escape, the 2weight of'said
standpipe when full of water shall be included in the computation.
Section 15-23.
SMOKE STACKS.
Paragraph 15-23-1. Isolated.
Metal smoke stacks, when isolated, shall have base plates of ample
strength securely anchored to the foundations. If not designed to be
free standing, they shall be braced at least every 50 feet in height from
at least three sides by means of guys or rods or wire ropes. Guy rods
shall not be less than %-inch in diameter and guys of wire rope shall
not be less than %-inch in diameter.
Paragraph 15-23-2. With Building.
Where metal stacks are built in connection with buildings, they
shall be securely anchored or guyed to the framework, or walls, and
proper provision shall be made for expansion. If the stack is con-
structed of cast iron, the sections shall have tight flange joints and
shall be securely bolted together. If the stack is constructed of rolled
iron or steel, all joints shall be securely riveted and no rivets less than
%-inch in diameter shall be used; for stacks 900 square inches in cross
section and smaller, no plate less than %-inch in thickness will he
allowed; for stacks of greater cross section, no plate less than 3/16-
inch in thickness shall be used. ,
Paragraph 15-23-3. Condensation.
Smoke stacks not enclosed 90% of their height from the bottom
located within 150 feet of a public street, highway or sidewalk, shall
be so constructed that the condensation of stack gases shall be retained
within the stack. In such cases proper provision for drainage shall be
made at the base of the stack.
Chapter 16.
CAST IRON CONSTRUCTION.
Section 16-1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
Paragraph 16-1-1. Materials and Stresses.
Materials, stresses and methods of computation shall be as pro-
vided in Chapter 13.
Paragraph 16-1-2. Cast Iron Columns.
Cast iron columns shall not be used in the structural frames of
buildings whose height exceeds two times the least width of base, nor
in any building over 100 feet high. Cast iron columns shall be faced
at ends to a true surface perpendicular to the axis to give full bearing
for the cross section of the column.
98 BUILDING CODE
All hollow cast iron columns shall have two %-inch holes drilled
on the top or bottom side of column as cast, if the columns are cast on
side, one hole about %-inch each side of the center of the length of the
column, to exhibit thickness of the shell. Columns cast on end shall
have two %-inch holes drilled by the maker, at an angle of 90 degrees to
each other at the middle of the column, to exhibit thickness of shell.
Additional holes shall be drilled when required by the Building Com-
missioner.
The minimum material dimension of cast iron columns shall not
be less than 4.75 inches and the minimum wall thickness shall not be
less than one-twelfth the outside diameter, nor less than 0.4 inch.
The maximum tolerance in wall thickness shall not exceed 0.08 inch
and whenever the core of a cast iron column has shifted more than 0.08
inch the column shall be rejected.
Cast iron columns shall not be used in any case where the load is
so eccentric as to cause tension in the cast iron; nor shall they be used
for parts of the structural frame of buildings which are required tQ
resist wind.
Paragraph 16-1-3. Painting Cast Iron.
No structural cast iron shall be painted until after delivery to the
building site and proper inspection.
Paragraph 16-1-4. Cast Iron Bases and Lintels.
1. Cast iron bases or shoes shall be planed on top. Bases which
rest on structural, steel or cast iron shall be planed top and bottom.
The thickness of metal shall be not less than 1 inch. The inclination of
the outer edge of the ribs with the horizontal shall be not less than
15 degrees. Whenever one side of the bed plate exceeds 3 feet in length
a reinforcing flange shall be provided.
2. Cast iron lintels'shall be not less than % inch in thickness and
shall not be used for spans exceeding 8 feet.
Chapter 17.
REINFORCED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION.
Section 17-1.
GENERAL.
Paragraph 17-1-1. Definitions.
"Concrete" is a mixture of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse
aggregate and water.
"Reinforced Concrete" is concrete in which metal is embodied in
such a manner that the two materials act together in resisting forces.
Paragraph 17-1-2. Indeterminate Systems.
Systems of construction or of reinforcement which do not admit
of a reasonable mathematical analysis of stresses will not be allowed
under the-provisions of this code.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 99
_ Section 17-2.
QUALITY OF MATERIALS.
Paragraph 17-2-1. Portland Cement.
Portland cement shall conform to the Standard Specifications and
Tests for Portland Cement (Serial Designation C 9-21) of the Ameri-
can Society for Testing Materials and subsequent revisions thereof.
Paragraph 17-2-2. Fine Aggregate.
Fine aggregate shall consist of sand or other approved inert
materials with similar characteristics, or a combination thereof, having
clean, hard, strong, durable, uncoated grains and free from injurious
amounts of dust, lumps, soft or flaky particles, shale, alkali, organic•
matter, loam or other deleterious substances.
Paragraph 17-2-3. Coarse Aggregate.
,Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, or other
approved inert materials with similar characteristics, or combinations
thereof, having clean, hard, strong, durable, uncoated particles free
from injurious amounts of soft, friable, thin, elongated or laminated
pieces, alkali, organic or other deleterious matter.
Except in minor structures, "crusher run" stone, "bank run" gravel
or prepared mixtures of fine and coarse aggregate shall not be used
unless the methods of handling are satisfactory to the Building Com-
missioner and are such as to insure uniformity of the mixture from
batch to batch.
Quartz gravel or stone shall not be used as coarse aggregate in
parts of concrete structures where the contents of the building or the
exposures are such that the fire hazard must be considered.
Paragraph 17-2-4. Water.
Water for concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts
of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substance.
Paragraph 17-2-5. Metal Reinforcement.
Metal reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of the
Standard Specifications for Billet Steel, Concrete Reinforcement Bars
of Structural, Intermediate or Hard Grade (Serial Designation A 15-14)
of the American Society for Testing Materials. Rail steel meeting the
requirements for Rail Steel Concrete Reinforcement Bars, (Serial
Designation A 16-14) of the American Society for Testing Materials,
may be used. The provision in these specifications for machining de-
formed bars before testing shall be eliminated.
Metal reinforcement, to receive the rating of "deformed bars" which
permits the use of higher bond stresses than for plain bars, shall show
a bond strength 25% greater than that shown by plain bars of equiv-
alent cross-sectional area.
Paragraph 17-2-6. Concrete Quality and Proportions.
(a) Concrete Quality.
Provisions for the design of structures embodied in this code are
based on the presumption of concrete of certain strength. To produce
concrete of the required strength, the proportion of the mixing water
to the cement shall be accurately controlled. To obtain the strengths
indicated in the following table, the ratio of water to cement shall be
2 in the proportions shown. The strengths indicated represent the mini-
mum ultimate strength in compression which may be expected at 28 days.
100 BUILDING CODE
when cured and tested in accordance with the Standards of the Ameri-
can Society for Testing Materials in effect on the date of the adoption
of this code:
PROPORTIONS OF MIXING WATER TO CEMENT.
Ultimate Strength Water Cement Ratio
Used in Design U.S.Gal.of Water
Lb.Per Sq.In. Per Sack of Cement
1500 8 Y4
2000 7 Y4
2500 6%
3000 5%
• Water or moisture contained in the aggregates must be included in
determining the ratio of water to cement.
All structural drawings and plans submitted for approval shall
show the strength of concrete to be used.
(b) Concrete Proportions and Consistency.
The proportions of aggregates to cement for concrete of any water-
cement ratio shall be such as to produce concrete that will work readily
into the corners and angles of the form and around the reinforcement
without excessive puddling or spading and without permitting free water
to collect on the surface. The combined aggregate shall be of such
composition of sizes and that when separated by the No. 4 standard sieve,
the weight retained on the sieve shall not be less than one-half nor '
more than two-thirds of the total nor shall the amount of coarse mate-
rial be such as to produce harshness in placing or honey-combing in the
structure. When forms are removed, the faees and corners of the
members shall show smooth and sound throughout.
(c) Control of Proportions.
The methods of measuring concrete materials shall be such that
the proportion of water to cement can be accurately controlled during
the progress of the work and easily checked at any time by the Build-
ing Commissioner, or his authorized representative. A tolerance of
Yi-gallon of water per sack of cement in any batch of concrete will be
allowed provided that the average for any 10 consecutive batches does
not show a water content greater than that shown in the table.
Section 17-3.
DESIGN.
Paragraph 17-3-1. Assumption.
The design of reinforced concrete members under this code shall
be based on the following assumptions:
(a) Calculations are made with reference to working stresses and
safe loads rather than with reference to ultimate strength and ultimate
loads.
(b) A plane section before bending remains plane after bending,
shearing distortions being neglected.
(c) The modulus of elasticity of concrete in compression is con-
stant within the limits of working stresses and the distribution of com-
pressive stress in beams is rectilinear.
(d) The moduli of elasticity of concrete in computations for the
position of the neutral axis, for the resisting moment of beams, and for
compression of concrete in columns, are as follows:
CITY u FORT WORTH 101
(1) One-fifteenth that of steel, when the compressive strength of
the concrete at 28 days exceeds 1,500 and does not exceed 2,200 pounds
per square inch.
(2) One-twelfth that of steel, when the compressive strength of
the concrete at 28 days exceeds 2,200 and does not exceed 2,900 pounds
per square inch.
(3) One-tenth that of steel, when the compressive strength of the
Concrete at 28 days is greater than 2,900 pounds per square inch.
(e) In calculating the moment of resistance of reinforced concrete
beams and slabs the tensile resistance of the concrete is neglected.
(f) The bond between the concrete and the metal reinforcement
remains unbroken throughout the range of working stresses. Under
compression the two materials are therefore stressed in proportion to
their moduli of elasticity.
(g) Initial stress in the reinforcement due to contraction or ex-
pansion of the concrete is neglected, except in the design of reinforced
concrete columns, where the effect of shrinkage stresses has been given
consideration in the design formulas and allowable working stresses.
Paragraph 17-3-2. Notation.
The symbols and notation used in these regulations are defined as
follow :
a = Width of face of column or pedestal.
a = Angle between inclined web bars and axis of beams.
A = Total net area of column, footing, or pedestal, exclusive of fire-
proofing.
A'= Loaded area of pedestal, pier or footing.
Ac = A (1 — p) equals net area of concrete core of column (core
area minus reinforcement).
A'c = Net area of concrete in columns with lateral ties (total col-
umn area minus area of reinforcement).
A,, = Effective cross-sectional area of metal reinforcement in ten-
sion in beams or compression in columns; and the effective cross-sectional
area of metal reinforcement which crosses any of the principal design
sections of a flat slab.
An = Total area of web reinforcement in tension within a distance
of s, (sl, s:, se, etc.) or the total area of all bars bent up in any one
plane.
b = Width of rectangular beam or width of flange of T-beam.
c = Projection of footing from face of column.
d = Depth from compression surface of beam or slab to center of
longitudinal tension reinforcement.
Ec = Modulus of elasticity of concrete in compression.
& = Modulus of elasticity of steel in tension = 30,000,000 pounds
per square inch.
fe = Compressive unit stress in extreme fibre of concrete.
f'c = Ultimate compressive strength of concrete at age of 28 days,
based on tests of 6x12-inch or 8x16-inch cylinders made and tested in
accordance with the Standard Methods of Making and Storing Specimens
of Concrete in the Field and the Tentative Methods of Making Compres-
sion Tests of Concrete, of the A. S. T. M.
fr= Compressive unit stress in metal core.
t L, = Tensile unit stress in longitudinal reinforcement.
fc = Tensile unit stress in web reinforcement.
102 BUILDING CODE
F = Total tension in a bar.
F' = Totaf tensile stress in a bar developed in the length "y." See
Paragraph 17-6-3.
h = Unsupported length of columns.
I = Moment of inertia of a section about the neutral axis for '
bending. If, i
1 = Span length of beam or slab (generally distance from center to
center of supports); for special cases see Paragraph 17-4-3.
L = Span length of flat slab, center to center of columns.
M = Bending moment or moment of resistance in general.
n = Ee/Ea = Ratio of modulus of elasticity of steel to that of
concrete.
2:o = Sum of perimeters of bars in one set.
p = Ratio of effective area of tension reinforcement to effective
As
area of concrete in beams = — ; and the ratio of effective area of
bd
longitudinal reinforcement to the area of the concrete core in columns.
P Total safe axial load on column whose h/R is less than 40.
P' = Total safe axial load on long column.
ra. = Permissible working stress in concrete over the loaded area
of a pedestal, pier or footing.
R = Least radius of gyration of a section.
s = Spacing of web members, measured at the mid-depth of the
beam and in the direction of the longitudinal axis of the beam.
t = Thickness of flange of T-beam.
u = Bond stress per unit of area of surface of bar.
v = Shearing unit stress.
V = Total shear.
w = Uniformly distributed load per unit of length of beam or slab.
w = Upward reaction per unit of area of base of footing.
w' = Uniformly distributed dead and live load per unit of area of a
floor or roof.
W = Total dead and live load uniformly distributed over a single
panel area.
.x = Length of bar added for anchorage, including the hook, if any.
y= Distance from the point at which the tension is computed to the
point of beginning of anchorage.
Paragraph 17-3-3. Unit Stresses in Terms of Ultimate Strength of
Concrete.
As specified in Paragraph 17-2-6, the structural drawings and plans
shall show the ultimate strength of concrete for which the several por-
tions of the structures were designed. The working stresses to be used
in the computations shall be based on the ultimate strength indicated on
the drawings and in the ratios shown in the succeeding.sections of these
regulations. The ultimate strength is designated as Fe and refers to the
ultimate strength at 28 days, based on 6x12-inch or 8x16-inch cylinders
made, cured and tested in accordance with the Standard Methods of
Making and Storing,Specimens of Concrete in the Field and Tentative
Methods of Making Compression Tests, of the American Society for Test-
ing Materials in effect at the time of adoption of these regulations.
These working stresses in the concrete are here summarized together with r
the permissible working stresses in the reinforcement.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 103
SUMMARY OF WORKING STRESSES.
Direct Stresses in Concrete.
In columns; varies, see Paragraphs 17-8-3 and 17-8-4.
In long columns, see Paragraph 17-8-8.
` In piers and pedestals.:..........._...............
........................................... 0.25f'c
Flexural Stresses in Concrete.
Extreme fibre stress in compression in flexure...................._.......... 01375f'c
Extreme fibre stress in compression in flexure adjacent to sup-
ports of continuous beams...........................................................•.. 0.45f'c
Shearing Stresses in Concrete.
Beams without special anchorage of longitudinal reinforcement:
With no web reinformment............................_.-•_....-.-_ •--•----.._..--•--
._ .-----_. 0.02f'c
With stirrups or bent-up bars or combinations of
the two ......:..................... ..0.09t" to 0.06f'c
Beams with special anchorage of longitudinal reinforcement:
With no web reinforcement---------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.03f'c
` With stirrups or bent-up bars or combinations of
the two .. _............... .....................*._0.03f'o to 0.10re
In flat slabs: See Paragraph 17-7-6.
In footings:
Where longitudinal bars have no special anchorage.......................... 0.02f'c
Where longitudinal bars have special anchorage:................................. 0.03f1c
Bond Between Concrete and Reinforcement.
In beams and slabs, plain bard.........._:.,..,. _... .......::....... .,. 0.04f1c
In beams and slabs, deformed bars:....................._........................•...._.. 0.05f'c
In footings, plain bars, one way............................................................ 0.04f'o
In footings, plain bars, two ways........................................................ 0.03f1c
In footings, deformed bars, one way.................................................... 0.05f'c
In footings, deformed bars, two ways................................................0.037&f'o
Stresse3 in Reinforcement.
Tension.
(a) Billet-steel bars:
(1) Structural steel grade_________________________-------16,000 lbs.per sq.in.
(2) Intermediate grade ------------------------------------18,000 " "
(3) Hard grade -------------------------------..................18,000 " «
(b) Rail steel bars......................................................18,000 «
cStructural steel shapes......................................16,000
(d) Other steel reinforcement, 45 per cent of
the yield point stress but not to exceed..........18,000
Compression.
(a) Bars --•-•-......-•-•----••--•-••-•-------------•-.......--......_......... nfc
(b) Structural steel core of composite column----16,000lbs.per sq.in.
Reduced for slenderness ratio....................(See Paragraph 17-8-6)
(c) Structural steel column_.....__..:........................16,000 lbs.per sq.in.
Reduced for slenderness ratio....................(See Paragraph 17-8-7)
(d) Composite cast iron column.............................10,000 lbs.per sq.in.
Reduced for slenderness ratio....................(See Paragraph 17-8-6)
Paragraph 17-3-4. Combined Stresses.
For combined stresses, due to wind and other loads, the permissible
working stress may be increased 50 per cent, providing the section thus
found is not less than that required by the dead and live loads alone.
For members carrying wind stresses only, the permissible working
stresses may be increased 50 per cent.
104 BUILDING CODE
Section 17-4.
FLEXURAL COMPUTATIONS AND MOMENT COEFFICIENTS.
Paragraph 17-4-1. Formulas for Flexure.
Computations of flexural resistance of reinforced concrete beams
and slabs shall be based on the assumptions of Paragraph 17-3-1. The
customary formulas or their equivalent shall be used.
Paragraph 17-4-2. Working Stresses in Flexure.
See Paragraph 17-3-3.
Paragraph 17-4-3. Span Length.
The span length of freely supported beams and slabs shall be the
clear span plus the depth of beam or slab but shall not exceed the dis-
tance between the centers of the supports.
The span length for continuous or restrained beams built to act
integrally with supports shall be the clear distance between faces of
supports.
For continuous or restrained beams having brackets built to act
integrally with both beam and support and of a width not less than
the width of the beam and making an angle of 45 degrees or more with _
the horizontal the span shall be measured from the section where the
combined depth of the beam and bracket is at least one-third more than
the depth of the beam. No portion of such a bracket shall be considered
as adding to the effective depth of the beam.
Maximum negative moments are to be considered as existing at the
ends of the span, as defined above.
Paragraph 17-4-4. Unsupported Length of Beams.
The distance between lateral supports of the compression area of
a beam shall not exceed 24 times the least width of compression flange.
Paragraph 17-4-5. Requirements for T-Beams.
In T-beam construction the slab shall be built integral with the
beam. The effective flange width to be used in the design of symmet-
rical T-beams shall not exceed one-fourth of the span length of the
beam, and its overhanging width on either side of the web shall not
exceed eight times the thickness of the slab nor one-half the clear dis-
tance to the next beam.
For beams having a flange on one side only, the effective flange
width to be used in design shall not exceed one-tenth of the span length
of the beam, and its overhanging width from the face of the web shall
not exceed six times the thickness of the slab, nor one-half the clear
distance to the next beam.
Where the principal slab reinforcement is parallel to the beam,
transverse reinforcement, not less in amount than 0.3 per cent of the
sectional area .of the slab, shall be provided in the top of the slab and
shall extend across the beam and into the slab not less than one-fourth
of the clear span of the slab measured parallel to the beam. The spac-
ing of the bars shall not exceed 18 inches.
Provision shall be made for the compressive stress at the support
in continuous T-beam construction.
The overhanging portion of the flange of the beam shall not be
considered as effective in computing the shear and diagonal tension
resistance of T-beams.
Isolated beams in which the T-form is used only for the purpose
of providing additional compression area, shall have a flange thickness
not less than one-half the width of the web and a total flange width
not more than four times the web thickness. "
CITY OF FORT WORTH 105
Paragraph 17-4-6. Moment Coefficients for the Usual Conditions.
A. FREELY SUPPORTED OR SLIGHTLY RESTRAINED CON-
TINUOUS BEAMS OR SLABS OF EQUAL SPAN; UNIFORM LOAD.
Beams and slabs of equal spans freely supported or built to act
integrally with beams, girders or other slightly restraining support, or
beams and slabs built into brick or masonry walls in a manner which
develops only partial end restraint, and carrying uniformly distributed
loads shall be designed for the following moments at critical sections:
(a) Beams and slabs of one span.
Maximum positive moment near center,
wl'
M = ..................................................._......._.._..._...(1)
8-
(b) Beams and slabs continuous for two spans only,
(1) Maximum positive moment near center,
wl'
M = ._................................:(2)
10
(2) Negative moment over interior support,
wl'
8
(c) Beams and slabs continuous for more than two spans,
(1) Maximum positive moment near center and negative
moment at support of interior spans,
wl'
12
(2) Maximum positive moment near center of end spans and
negative moment at first interior support,
wl'
M = .................................................................. ..(5)
10
(d) Negative moment at end supports for cases (a), (b), (c), of
this section,
wl'
Mnot less than ....................................................(6)
16
B. FULLY RESTRAINED CONTINUOUS BEAMS OR SLABS
OF EQUAL SPAN; UNIFORM LOAD.
Beams and slabs of equal span built to act integrally with columns,
walls, or other restraining supports and assumed to carry uniformly
distributed loads, shall, [except as provided in (A) ] be designed for the
following moments.at critical sections:
(a) Interior spans. `
(1) Negative moment at interior supports except the first,
wl'
M = 12 .......: . ..... ... ............... .
(2) Maximum positive moment near centers of interior spans,
wl'
M = ...................................... ................(8)
16
106 BUILDING CODE
(b) End spans of continuous beams and slabs and beams and slabs •
of which I/1 is less than twice the sum of the values of I/h
for the exterior columns above and below which are built into
the beams:
(1) Maximum positive moment near center of span and
negative moment at first interior supports,
wl'
M — ....... ( )
12
(2) Negative moment at exterior supports,
wl'
M = .................. --------.-----.._....... .(10)
12
(c) End spans of continuous beams, and beams of one span, in
which I/1 is equal to or greater than twice the sum of the
values of I/h for the exterior column above and below which
are built into the beams: -
(1) Maximum positive moment near center of span and
negative moment at first interior support, -
wl'
M = ........-.........................................---........--(11)
16
(2) Negative moment at exterior support,
wl'
M = -----••.............................................................(12)
16
In (b) and (c), "I" represents the moment of inertia which, for
those calculations, shall be computed on the assumption that the mem-
ber is homogeneous, neglecting the reinforcement but including.that
portion of the concrete section outside of the reinforcement which is
ordinarily considered as fireproofing. "1" and "h" are the span length
and column height respectively as defined in Paragraphs 17-4-3 and
17-8-2.
C. CONTINUOUS BEAMS OR SLABS OF UNEQUAL SPAN OR
WITH NON-UNIFORM LOADS.
Continuous beams with unequal spans, or with other than uniformly
distributed loading, whether freely supported or restrained, shall be
designed for the actual maximum moments under the conditions of
loading and restraint.
Provision shall be made where necessary for negative moment near
the center of short spans which are adjacent to long spans, and for the
negative moment at the end supports, if restrained.
D. SLABS REINFORCED IN TWO DIRECTIONS.
For square or rectangular slabs reinforced in two directions and
supported by beams on all four sides, the ratio of load carried by one
system of reinforcing to load carried by the other system of.reinforcing
shall vary inversely as the fourth power of the spans.
F,ach system shall be designed using the moment coefficients speci-
fied above for the case applicable.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 107
Section 17-5.
SHEAR AND DIAGONAL TENSION.
Paragraph 17-5-1. Shearing Unit Stress.
The shearing unit stress, v, in reinforced concrete beams shall be
computed by Formula 14;
V
v — ------ ................-- •------------- (14)
jbd
The shearing unit stress shall be computed on the minimum width
of rectangular beams and on the minimum thickness of the web in
beams of I or T section.
In tile and joist construction, the shearing unit stress shall be com-
puted on a width equal to the thickness of the concrete web plus one-
half the thickness of the vertical webs of the concrete or clay tile in
contact with the joist.
Paragraph 17-5-2. Types of Web Reinforcement.
Web reinforcement may consist of:
(a) Vertical stirrups or web reinforcing bars.
(b) Inclined stirrups or web reinforcing bars forming an angle of
30 degrees or more with the axis of the beam.
(c) Longitudinal bars bent up at an agle of 15 degrees or more
with the axis of the beam.
Stirrups or bent up bars to be considered effective as web reinforce-
ment shall be anchored at both ends, according to the provisions of
Paragraph 17-6-5.
Paragraph 17-5-3. Spacing of Stirrups or Bent Up Bars.
Where the shearing stress is not greater than 0.06f'o, the distance
"s"measured in the direction of the axis of the beam between two succes-
sive stirrups or bent up bars, shall not exceed the value given by
Formula 15,
45d
)
a
where "a" is the angle in degrees between the inclined web bars and
the axis of the beam.
Bent up bars and stirrups shall be considered effective in reinforc-
ing the web only within the area between two vertical planes distant
s/2 in either direction from the point where the bent up bar crosses
the mid-depth of the beam.
Where the shearing stress is greater than 0.06f'o, the distance "s"
shall not be greater than two-thirds of the value given by Formula 15.
Paragraph 17-5-4. Maximum Shearing Unit Stress in Beams.
In beams in which the longitudinal reinforcement is without special
anchorage, the shearing unit stress computed by Formula 14 shall not
exceed the value given by Formula 16 and in no case shall, it exceed
0.06f'o.
v. fo AV
v = 0.02f'o + -- --- Sin a + Cos a
bs
In beams in which the longitudinal reinforcement is anchored as
specified in Paragraph 17-6-5, the shearing unit stress shall not exceed
1a8 _ BUEEZ"c CODN
the value given by Formula 16 when 0.03f'o is substituted for 0.02f'c
and in no case shall it exceed 0.10f1c.
Where the entire web reinforcement consists of longitudinal bars
bent up in a single plane the allowance for the quantity
fv Av
(sin a plus cos a) in Formula 16 shall not exceed 75.
bs
Such bent up reinforcement shall cross the mid-depth of the beam
at a distance not.greater than s/2 from the face of the support and
shall•not be considered effective in resisting diagonal tension over a
distance greater than "s" from the support, where "s" has the value
by Formula 15 of Paragraph 17-6-3.
Paragraph 17-5-5. Combined Web Reinforcement.
Where two or more types of web reinforcement are used in con-
junction, the total shearing resistance of the beam shall be assumed as
the sum of the shearing resistances computed for the various types
separately. In such computations, the shearing resistance of the con-
crete (the term 0.02f'o or 0.03f'c in Formula 16) shall be included only
once. In no case shall the maximum shearing stress be greater than
the limiting values in Paragraph 17-5-4.
Paragraph 17-5-6. Shear and Diagonal Tension in Footings.
The shearing stress shall be taken as not less than that computed
by Formula 14. The stress on the critical section shall not exceed
0.02f1c for footings with straight bars, not 0.03f'o for footings in which `
the bars are anchored at both ends by adequate hooks or otherwise as
specified in Paragraph 17-6-5.
The critical section for diagonal tension in footings on soil shall
`be computed on a vertical section through the perimeter of the lower
base of a frustum of a cone or pyramid which has a base angle of 45
degrees and which has for its top the base of the column or pedestal
and for its lower base the plane at the centroid of longitudinal reinforce-
ment.
The critical section for diagonal tension in footings on piles shall
be computed on a vertical section at the inner edge of the first row of
piles entirely outside a section midway between the face of the column
or pedestal and the section defined for soil footings, but in no case out-
side of that section.
For piles not arranged in rows, the critical section shall be taken
midway between the face of the column and the section defined for
soil footings.
Section 17-6.
BOND AND ANCHORAGE.
Paragraph 17-6-1. Computation of Bond Stress in Beams.
Where bar reinforcement is used to resist tensile stresses developed
by beam action, the bond stress shall be taken as not less than that
computed by Formula 17.
v
u — (17)
2;ojd
For continuous or restrained members, the critical section for bond
for the positive reinforcement shall be assumed to be at the point of
inflection, that for the negative reinforcement shall be assumed to be
at the face of the support, and at the point of inflection. For simple -
CITY of FORT WORTH 109
beams or at the outer ends of freely supported end spans of continuous
+ beams, the critical section for bond shall be assumed to be at the face
of the support.
Bent up longitudinal bars which, at the critical section, are within
d
a distance —from horizontal reinforcement under consideration may
3
be included with the straight bars in computing 2;o.
In footings only the bars specified in Paragraph 17-9-4 as effective
in resisting bending moment shall be considered as resisting bond
stresses. Special investigation shall be made of bond stresses in foot-
ings with stepped or sloping upper surface, as maximum bond stresses
may occur at the vertical plane of the steps or near the edges of the
footing:
Paragraph 17-6-2. Permissible Bond Stress; Ordinary Anchorage.
In beajns where the ordinary anchorage described in Paragraph
17-8-4 is provided, the bond stress computed by Formula 17 at any sec-
tion shall not exceed the following values:
For plain bars....... . ..,.•--..0 = 0.04f'o
For deformed bars meeting the requirements of Para-
graph 17-2-6........... �.... _.... . ..-....._......0 = 0.05f'c
The permissible bond stress for footings and similar members in
which reinforcement is' placed in more than one direction shall not ex-
ceed 75 per cent of the above values. Small percentages of reinforce-
ment added for temperature or shrinking stresses shall not be in-
terpreted as requiring this reduction.
Paragraph 17.6-3. Permissible Bond Stress; Special Anchorage.
In members in bending, bond stresses (computed by Formula 17)
exceeding those specified in Paragraph 17-6-2, but in no case more than
2% times the latter, may be used, provided that sufficient additional
length of bar is added beyond the theoretical point of zero moment (end
of span or point of inflection) to provide for the development of the
excess in bond stress over that specified in Paragraph 17-6-2. The length
of "x" to be added for this purpose may be expressed algebraically by
Formula 18.
xu2;o = F — F........................................................................................:(18)
where
x=The length of bar added for anchorage, including the hook, if
any.
u=Permissible bond stress specified in Paragraph 17-6-2.
Zo = The perimeter of the bar or bars under consideration.
F=Total tension in the bar or bars under consideration.
F' =The total tension in the bar which would be developed in the
length "y" by the computed bond stresses, except that no values greater
than those specified in Paragraph 17-6-2 be used in the computation.
F' =Bond stress times Toy.
y=the distance from the point at which the tension is computed
to the point of beginning of anchorage.
The point of beginning of anchorage shall be taken at the edge
of support for freely supported beams, and at the point of inflection
(for the loading condition under consideration) for fixed or continuous
beams; anchorage of negative reinforcing to be toward the center of
the beams from this point.
The length of bar added for anchorage may be either straight or
bent. The radius of bend shall not be less than four bar diameters.
110 BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 17-6-4. Ordinary Anchorage Requirements.
In continuous,retrained or cantilever beams, the length of anchorage
"x" of the tensile negative reinforcement beyond the face of the sup-
port shall provide for the full maximum tension by Formula 18 in which
"u" equals the value given in. Paragraph 17-6-2 and, for this case,
since "y" equals 0, "F" equals 0. Such anchorage shall provide a length
of bar at not less than the depth of the beam. In the case of end supports
which have a width less than three-fourths of the depth of the beam,
extra length shall be provided by a semi-circular hook, which has a radius
of not less than four bar diameters. In continuous or restrained beams,
negative reinforcement shall be carried to or beyond the point of in-
flection. Not less than one-fourth of the area of the positive reinforce-
ment shall extend into the support to provide an embedment of ten or
more bar diameters.
In simple beams or at the outer ends of freely supported end spans
of continuous beams at least one-fourth of the area of the tensile rein-
forcement shall extend along the tension side of the beam and beyond
the face of the support to provide an embedment of ten or more bar
diameters.
Paragraph 17-6-5. Special Anchorage Requirements.
Where increased shearing stresses are used as provided in Para-
graph 17-5-4 or increased bond stresses as provided in Paragraph 17-
6-3, special anchorage of all reinforcement in addition to that required
in Paragraph 17-6-4 shall be provided as follows:
(a) In continuous and restrained beams, anchorage beyond points of inflection of at least one-third the area of the negative reinforcement
and beyond the face of the support of at least one-third the area of the
positive reinforcement, shall be provided to develop one-third of the
maximum working stress in tension. The anchorage length "x" shall
be computed by Formula 18 ("y" equals 0, therefore "F" equals 0) with
bond stresses not greater than those specified in Paragraph 17-6-2.
(b) At the edges of footings, anchorage for all the bars for one-
third the maximum working stress in tension shall be provided within a
region where the tension in the concrete,computed as an reinforced beam,
does not exceed 40 pounds per square inch. In any case.the reinforce-
ment bars shall extend jo within 4 inches of the edge of the footing
but not closer than 3 inches.
(c) In simple beams or at the outer ends of freely supported end
spans of continuous beams, at least one-half of the tensile reinforcement
shall extend along the tension side of the beam to provide an anchorage
beyond the face of the support for one-third of the maximum working
stress in tension.
Paragraph 17-6-6. Anchorage of Web Reinforcement.
Web bars shall be anchored at both ends by:
(a) providing continuity with the longitudinal rein-
forcement, or
(b) bending around the longitudinal bar; or
(c) a semi-circular hook which has a radius of not less
than four times the diameter of the web bar.
Stirrup anchorage shall be so provided in the compression and ten-
sion regions of a beam as to permit the development of safe working
tensile stress in the stirrup at a point 0.3d from either face. (Gen-
erally a properly anchored stirrup whose diameter does not exceed one-
fiftieth of the depth of the beam will meet these requirements.)
The end anchorage of a web member not in bearing on the longi-
tudinal reinforcement shall be such as to engage an amount of concrete =
CITY OF FORT WORTH 111
sufficient to prevent the bar from pulling out. In all cases the stirrups
shall be carried as close to the upper and lower surfaces as.fireproofing
requirements permit.
Section 17-7.
FLAT SLABS.
Paragraph 17-7-1. Definitions.
Flat slabs as understood by this ruling are reinforced concrete slabs,
supported directly on reinforced columns with or without plates or
capitals at the top, the whole construction being hingeless and monolithic
without any visible beams or girders. The construction may be such as
to admit the use of hollow panels in the ceiling or smooth ceiling with
depressed panels in the floor.
The column capital shall be defined as the gradual flaring out of
the top of the column without any marked offset.
The drop panel shall be defined as. a square or rectangular depres-
sion around the column capital extending below the slab adjacent to it.
z The panel length shall be defined as the distance c. to c. of columns
of the side of a square panel, or the average distance c. to c. of columns
of the long. and short sides of a rectangular panel.
Paragraph 17-7-2. Columns.
The least dimension of any concrete column shall be not less than
one-twelfth the panel length, nor one-twelfth the clear height of the
column.
Paragraph 17-7-3. Slab Thickness.
The minimum total thickness of the slab in inches shall be de-
termined by the formula:
t= V W (square root of W divided by 44) where t equals total
44
thickness of slab in inches, W equals total live load and dead load in
pounds on the panel, measured, c. to c. of column.
In no case shall the thickness be less than 1/32 of the panel length
(L/32) for floors, nor 1/40 of the panel length (L/40) for roofs (L being
the distance c. to c. of columns).
In no case shall the thickness of slab be less than 6 inches for floors
or roofs.
Paragraph 17-7-4. Column Capital.
When used the diameter of the column capital shall.be measured
where its vertical thickness is at least 1% inches and shall be at least
0.225 of the panel length.
The slope of the column Capital shall nowhere make an angle with
the vertical of more than 45 degrees. Special attention shall be given
to the design of the column capital in considering eccentric loads, and
the effect of wind upon the structure.
Paragraph 17-7-5. Drop Panel.
When used, the drop panel shall be square or circular for square
panels and rectangular or eliptical for oblong panels.
The length of the drop shall not be less than one-third of the panel
length (L/3) if square, and not less than one-third of the long or short
side of the panel respectively, if rectangular.
112 BUILDING CODE
The depth of the drop panel shall be determined by computing it
as a beam, using the negative moment over the column capital specified "
elsewhere in this ruling.
In no case, however, shall the dimensions of the drop panel be
less than required for punching shear along its perimeter, using the
allowable unit shearing stresses specified below.
Paragraph 17-7-6. Shearing Stresses.
The allowable unit punching shear on the perimeter of the column
capital shall be 0.06f'c. The allowable unit shear on the perimeter of
the drop panel shall be 0.03f'c.
Paragraph 17-7-7. Panel Strips.
For the purpose of establishing the bending moments and the re-
sisting moments of a square panel, the panel shall be divided into strips
known as Strip A and strip B. Strip A shall include the reinforcement
and slab in a width extending from the center line of the columns for
a distance each side of this center line equal to one-quarter of the panel
length. Strip B shall include the reinforcement and slab in the half
width remaining in the center of the panel. At right angles to these
strips, the panel shall be divided into similar strips A and B, having
the same widths and relations to the center line of the columns as the
above strips. These strips shall be for designing purposes only, and
are not intended as the boundary lines of any bands of steel used.
These strips shall apply to the system of reinforcement in which
the reinforcing bars are placed parallel and at right angles to the
center line of the columns, hereinafter known as the two-way system,
and also to the system of reinforcement in which the reinforcing bars
are placed parallel at right angles to and diagonal to the center line of
the columns hereinafter known as the four-way system.
Any other system of reinforcement in which the reinforcing bars
are placed in circular, concentric rings and radial bars, or systems with
steel rods arranged in any manner whatsoever, shall comply with the
requirements of either the two-way or the four-way system herein
specified.
Paragraph 17-7-8. Bending Moment Coefficients, Interior Panel, Two-
Way System.
In panels where standard drops and column capitals are used as
above specified, the negative bending moment, taken at a cross-
section of each strip A at the edge of the column capital or over it,
shall be taken as WL/30.
The positive bending moment taken at a cross-section of each strip
A midway between column centers shall be taken as WL/60.
The positive bending moment taken at a cross-section of each strip
B in the middle of the panel shall be taken as WL/120.
The negative bending moment taken at a cross-section of each strip
B on the center line of the columns shall be taken as WL/120.
In the formulas hereinabove given W equals total live and dead
load on the whole panel in pounds, L equals panel length, c. to c. of
column.
Paragraph 17-7-9. Bending Moment Coefficients, Interior Panels, Four-
way System.
In panels where standard drops and column capitals are used as
above specified, the negative bending moment, taken at a cross-
section of each strip A at the edge of the column capital or over it,
$}call be taken as WL/30.
CITY OF FART WORTH 113
The positive bending moment, taken at a cross-section of each strip
A, midway between column centers, shall be taken as WL/80.
The .positive bending moment, taken at a cross-section of each strip
B, taken in the middle of the panel, shall be taken as WL/120.
The negative bending moment, taken at a cross-section of each strip
B, on the center line of the columns, shall be taken as WL/120.
Paragraph 17-7-10. Bending Moment Coefficients, Wall Panels.
Where wall panels with standard drops and capitals carried by
columns and girders built in walls, as in skeleton construction, the same
coefficients shall be used as for an interior panel, except as follows:
The positive bending moments on strips A and B midway between wall
and first line of columns shall be increased 25%.
Where wall panels are carried on new brick walls, these shall be
laid in Portland cement mortar and shall be stiffened with pilasters as
follows: If a 16-inch wall is used, it shall have a 4-inch pilaster. If
a 12-inch wall is used it shall have an 8-inch pilaster. The length of
pilasters shall not be less than the diameter of the column, nor less than
one-eighth of the distance between pilasters. The pilasters shall be
located opposite the columns as nearly as practicable, and shall be
corbeled out 4 inches at the top, starting at the level of the base of the
column capital. Not less than 8-inch bearing shall be provided for the
slab, the full length of wall.
The coefficients of bending moments required for these panels shall
be the same as those for the interior panels except as provided here-
with: The positive bending moments on strips A and B midway between
the wall and first line of columns shall be increased 50%.
Where wall panels are supported on old brick walls, there shall
be columns with standard drops and capitals built against the wall,
which shall be tied to the same in an approved manner, and at least
an 8-inch bearing provided for the slab, the full length. Where this is
impracticable, there shall be built a beam on the underside of slab
adjacent to the wall between columns; strong enough to carry 25% of
the panel load.
The coefficient of bending moments for the two cases of slab
support herein described shall be the same as those specified above for
skeleton and wall bearing condition, respectively.
Nothing specified above shall be construed as applying to a case of
slabs merely resting on walls or ledges, without any condition of
restraint. These shall be figured as in ordinary beam and girder con-
struction specified in these regulations.
Paragraph 17-7-11. Bending Moment Coefficients, Wall and Interior
Columns.
Wall columns in skeleton construction shall be designed to resist a
bending moment of WL/60 at floors and WL/30 at roof, in addition
to the direct load.
The interior columns must be analyzed for the worst conditions of
unbalanced loading. It is the intention of this ruling to cover ordinary
cases of eccentric loads on the columns by the requirement of Para-
graph 17-7-2. Where the minimum size of column therein specified is
found insufficient, however, the effect of the resulting bending moment
shall be properly divided between the adjoining slab and the columns
above and below according to best principles of engineering, and the
columns enlarged sufficiently to carry the load safely.
114 BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 17-7-12. Bending Moment Coefficients, Panels Without
Drops, or Capitals, or Both.
In square panels where no column capital or no depressions are
used, the sum total of positive and negative bending moments shall be
equal to that computed by the following formula: ,
B. M._ (8L)(1.53 — 4K � 4.1810)
where
B.M. = numerical sum of positive and negative bending moments,
regardless of algebraic signs:
W = total live and dead load on the whole panel.
L — length of side of a square panels, c. to c. of columns.
k = ratio of the radius of the column or column capital to panel
length, L.
This total bending moment shall be divided between the positive
and the negative moments in the same proportion as in the typical
square panels for two-way or four-way systems specified above for
interior and wall panels respectively.
Paragraph 17-7-13. Points of Inflection. a
For the purpose of making the calculations of the bending moment
at the sections away from the column capital, the point of inflection
shall be considered as being one-quarter of the distance c. to c. of col-
umns, both cross-wise and diagonally, from the center of the column.
s
Paragraph 17-7-14. Tensile Stress in Steel and Compressive Stress in
Concrete.
The tensile stress in steel and the compressive stress in the con-
crete to resist the bending moment shall be calculated on the basis of
the reinforcement and slab in the width included in a given strip, and
according to the assumptions and requirements given in these regu-
lations. The steel shall be considered as being concentrated at the
center of gravity of all the bands of steel in a given strip.
For the four-way system of reinforcement the amount of steel to
resist the negative bending moment over the support in each strip A,
6hall be taken as the sum of the areas of steel in one cross band and
one diagonal band. The amount of steel to resist the positive bending
moment of each strip B shall be considered as the area of the steel in
a diagonal band. The amount of steel to resist the positive bending
moment in each strip A shall be considered as the area of the steel in
a cross band and the amount of steel to resist the negative moment in
each strip B shall be the steel included in the width of strip B.
For the two-way system of reinforcement the amount of steel to
resist the bending moment in any strip shall be considered as the area
of steel included in the width of the strip.
In both systems of reinforcement the compressive stress in the-
concrete in any strip shall be calculated by taking the area of steel
considered for each strip and applying it in a beam formula.
Where drop panels are used, the width of beam assumed to resist
the compressive stresses over the column capital shall be the width of
the drop.
The width of beam, where no drop panels are used, shall be the
width of steel bands. Where this is found insufficient, the area shall
be increased by introducing compression steel in the bottom of the slab. t
Paragraph 17-7-15. Rectangular Panels.
When the length of panel in either two-way or four-way system
does not exceed the breadth by more than 5%, all computations shall
be based on a square panel whose side equals the mean of the length
C=,or FgaT WORTH 115
and breadth, and the steel equally distributed among the strips accord-
ing to the coefficients above specified.
In no rectangular panel shall the length exceed the breadth by
more than one-third of the latter.
Paragraph 17-7-16. Rectangular Panels, Four-Way System.
In the four-way system of reinforcement, where length exceeds
breadth by more than 5%, the amount of steel required in strip A,
long direction, both positive and negative, shall be the same as that
required for the same strip in a square panel whose length is equal
to the long side of the rectangular panel.
The amount of steel, strip A, short direction, positive and negative,
shall be the same as that required for the same strip in a square panel,
whose length is equal to the short side of the rectangular panel.
The amount of steel in strip B, positive and negative, shall be the
same as that required for similar strip in a square panel whose length
is equal to the mean of the long and short side of the rectangular panel.
In no case shall the amount of steel in the short side be less than
two-thirds of that required for the long side.
Paragraph 17-7-17. Rectangular Panels, Two-Way System.
In the two-way system of reinforcement the amount of steel re-
quired for the positive and the negative moment of each strip A shall
be determined in the same manner as indicated for the four-way sys-
tem above.
The amount of steel in strip B, positive and negative, running in
short direction, shall be equal to that required for the same strip in
a square panel whose length equals the long side of the rectangular
panel.
The amount of steel in strip B, long direction, positive and nega-
tive, shall be equal to that required for the same strip in a square
panel, whose length equals the short side of the rectangular panel.
In no case shall the amount of steel in strip B, long direction, be
less than two-thirds of that in the short direction.
Paragraph 17-7-18. Walls and Openings.
Girders and beams shall be constructed under walls, around open-
ings and to carry concentrated loads.
Paragraph 17-7-19. Marginal Beams.
In panels having a marginal beam on one edge or on each of two
adjacent edges, the beam shall be designed to carry at least the load
superimposed directly upon it, exclusive of the panel load. A marginal
beam which has a depth greater than thee thickness of the dropped
panel into which it frames, shall be designed to carry, in addition to
the load superimposed directly upon it, a uniformly distributed load
equal to at least one-fourth of the total live and dead load for which the
adjacent panel or panels are designed. Slabs supported by marginal
beams on opposite edges shall be designed as freely supported slabs
for the entire load.
Column strips adjacent to and parallel with marginal beams hav-
ing a depth less than the thickness of the dropped panel, shall be
designed to resist the moment specified for a column strip. Column
strips adjacent to and parallel with marginal beams having a depth
greater than the thickness of the dropped panel, shall be designed to
resist a moment at least one-half as great as that specified for a
column strip.
LEI
116 BULLAMP, C=
Paragraph 17-7-20. Placing of Steel.
In order that the slab bars shall be maintained in the position �+
shown in the design during the work of pouring the slab, spacers and
supports shall be provided satisfactory to the Building Commissioner.
All bars shall be secured in place at intersections by wire or other metal
fastenings. In no case shall the spacing of the bars exceed 9 inches. t
The steel to resist the negative moment in each strip B shall extend
one-quarter of the panel length beyond the center line of the columns
in both directions.
Splices in bars may be made wherever convenient, but preferably
at points of minimum stress. The length of splice beyond the center
point, in each direction, shall not be less than 40 diameters of the bars,
nor less than 2 feet. The splicing of adjacent bars shall he avoided as
far as possible.
Slab bars which are lapped over the column, the sectional area of
both being included in the calculations for negative moment, shall ex-
tend not less than 0.25 of the panel length for cross bands and 0.35 of
the panel length for diagonal bands, beyond the column center.
Section 17-8.
REINFORCED CONCRETE COLUMNS.
Paragraph 17-8-1. Limiting Dimensions.
Unless designed as long columns under the provisions of Paragraph
17-8-81 reinforced concrete columns shall not be longer than 40 times
the least radius of gyration (40R). Principal columns in buildings
shall have a minimum diameter or thickness of 12 inches. Posts that
are not continuous from story to story shall have a minimum diameter
or thickness of 6 inches.
Paragraph 17-8-2. Unsupported Length and Radius of Gyration of
Columns.
The unsupported length of reinforced concrete columns shall bP
taken as:
(a) In flat slab construction the clear distance between the floor
and underside of the capital.
(b) In beam-and-slab construction, the clear distance between the
floor and the underside of the shallowest beam framing into the column
at the next higher floor level.
(c) In floor construction with beams in one direction only the
clear distance between floor slabs.
(d) In columns supported laterally by struts or beams only, the
clear distance between consecutive pairs (or groups) of struts or
beams provided that to be considered an adequate support, two such
struts or beams shall meet the column at approximately the same level
and the angle between the two planes formed by the axis of the column
and the axis of each strut respectively is not less than 75 degrees nor
more than 105 degrees.
When haunches are used at the junction of beams or struts with
columns, the clear distance between supports may be considered as
reduced by two-thirds of the depth of the haunch.
The radius of gyration of a column shall be computed from the con-
crete area of the core and the transformed section of the longitudinal
steel area, that is,the actual area of steel multiplied by n, this assumed
to be distributed uniformly around the periphery of the core.
LUX QF F = W(MTH 117
Paragraph 17-8-3. Design of Spiral Columns.
' The safe axial load on columns reinforced with longitudinal bars
and closely spaced spirals enclosing a circular core, shall not be greater
than that determined by Formula (22).
P = A [1 + (n— 1)p] [300+ (0.10-�-4p) f',.].. ......... .... ....(22)
y where
P = total safe axial load on column in which h/R (the unsup-
ported length divided by the radius of gyration) is less
than 40;
A = area of the concrete core enclosed within the. spiral; the
diameter of the core (or of the spiral) shall be taken as
the distance center to center of the spiral wire;
p = ratio of effective area of longitudinal reinforcement to area
of the concrete core;
Fe = ultimate strength of concrete at 28 days as defined in Para-
graph 17-3-3.
The longitudinal reinforcement shall consist of at least six bars
of minimum diameter of %-inch, and its effective cross-sectional area
shall not be less than 1 per cent nor more than 6 per cent of that of
the core.
The spiral reinforcement shall be not less than one-fourth the
volume of the longitudinal reinforcement. It shall consist of evenly
spaced continuous spirals held firmly in place and true to line by at
least three vertical spacer bars. The spacing of the spirals shall be not
greater than one-sixth of the diameter of the core and in no case more
than 3 inches.
Reinforcement shall be protected everywhere by a covering of con-
crete cast monolithic with the core, which shall have a minimum thick-
ness of 1% inches.
Paragraph 17-8-4. Design of Columns With Lateral Ties.
The safe axial load on columns reinforced with longitudinal bars
and separate lateral ties shall be not greater than that determined by
Formula (23).
P= (Ale + Asn) i . .. ................ ................... . .... . . . ........ .....(23)
where
Ale = net area of concrete in the core (total core area minus
area of reinforcement);
Ae = effective cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement;
and
fo = permissible compressive stress in concrete and shall not
exceed 0.25f'o.
The amount of longitudinal reinforcement shall not be less tban
0.5 per cent nor shall the amount considered in the calculations be more
than 2 per cent of the total area of the column. The longitudinal rein-
forcement shall consist of not less than four bars of minimum diameter
of %-inch, placed with clear distance from the face of the column not
less than 1% inches.
Lateral ties shall be at least Y4-inch in diameter spaced not more
than 8 inches apart.
Paragraph 17-8-5. Bending in Columns.
The bending moments in interior and exterior columns shall be
determined on the basis of loading conditions and end restraint, and
z shall be provided for in the design.
118 BUILDING CODE
For known eccentric loads or uneven spacing of columns, computa-
tion of moments shall be made accordingly. Resistance to these bending
moments shall be provided in the columns immediately above and below
in direct proportion to the values of their ratios of I/h (see Paragraphs
17-4-6 and 17-8-2. In columns supporting roofs the moment shall be
resisted by the column below.
Columns in flat slab construction shall be designed to resist bending
moments as specified in Paragraph 17-7-11.
In wall columns only counter moment due to the weight of the
structure that projects beyond the column center line may be deducted
from the moment computed as just described.
The recognized methods shall be followed in calculating the stresses
due to combined axial load and bending. The limiting unit stresses
shall be as follows:
(a) With Spiral Reinforcement. The compressive unit stress at
the extreme fibre on the concrete within the core area under combined
axial load and bending shall not exceed by more than 20% the value
given by the expression 300 plus (0.10 plus 4p)f'c.
(b) With Lateral Ties. Additional longitudinal reinforcement
may be used if required to provide for the bending stresses, and the
compressive unit stress at the extreme fibre on the concrete under
combined axial load and bending may be increased to 0.30f'o. The
column section, however, shall not be less than that required by the
provisions of Paragraph 17-8-4 where axial load alone is considered.
The total amount of reinforcement considered in the computations shall -
be not more than 4 per cent of the total area of the column.
Tension in the longitudinal reinforcement due to bending of the
column shall not exceed 16,000 pounds per square inch.
Paragraph 17-8-6. Composite Columns.
The safe load on composite columns in which a structural steel or
cast iron column is thoroughly encased in a circumferentially reinforced
concrete core shall be based on a certain unit stress for the steel or
cast iron core plus a unit stress of 0.25f1c on the area within the spiral
core.
The unit compressive stress on the steel section shall be not greater
than that determined by Formula 24.
18,000
fr =
he
1 + ................................. (24)
28,800 Re
but shall not exceed 16,000 pounds per square inch.
The unit stress on the cast iron section shall be not greater than
that determined by Formula 25.
h
fr=10,000—30— ........................ ..(25)
In Formulas 24 and 25,
fr = compressive unit stress in metal core, and
R = least radius of gyration of the steel or cast iron section.
The diameter of the cast iron section shall not exceed one-half of
the diameter of the core within the spiral. The spiral reinforcement
shall be not less than 0.5 per cent of the volume of the care within
the spiral and shall conform in quality, spacing and other requirements
to the provisions for spirals in Paragraph 17-8-3.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 119
Ample section of concrete and continuity of reinforcement shall
be provided at the junction with beams or girders. The area of the
concrete between the spiral and the metal core shall be not less than
that required to carry the total floor load of the story above on the
basis of a stress in the concrete of 0.35f'e, unless special brackets are
arranged on the metal core to receive directly the beam or slab load.
Paragraph 17-8-7. Structural Steel Columns.
The safe load on a structural steel column of a section which fully
encases an area of concrete, and which is protected by an outside shell
of concrete at least 3 inches thick, shall be computed in the same man-
ner as for composite columns in Paragraph 17-8-6, allowing 0.25f'c on
the area of the concrete enclosed by the steel section. The outside shell
shall be reinforced by wire mesh weighing not less than 0.2 pounds per
square foot or by ties or spirals of equal weight, and with a maximum
spacing of 6 inches between strands or hoops. Special brackets shall
be used to receive the entire floor load at each story. The safe load in
steel columns calculated by Formula 24 shall not exceed 16,000 pounds
per square inch.
Paragraph 17-8-8. Long Columns.
The permissible working load on the core in axially loaded columns
which have a length greater than 40 times the least radius of gyration
of the column core (40R) shall be not greater than that determined by
Formula 26.
P' h
......... ( )
P 120 R
where
P' = total safe axial load on long columns;
P =' total safe axial load on column of the same section whose
h/R is less than 40, determined as in Paragraphs 17-8-3 and
17-8-4.
and
R = least radius of gyration of column core as defined in Para-
graph 17-8-2.
Section 17-9.
FOOTINGS.
Paragraph 17-9-1. General.
The requirements for flexure, shear and bond of Sections 17-4 and
17-5 and 17-6 shall govern the design of footings except as hereinafter
provided.
Paragraph 17-9-2. Loads.
Footings resting directly on soil or on piles shall be proportioned
as to area or number of piles on the basis of the total column load plus
the weight of the footing itself. For computations of moments and
shears, an upward reaction per unit area or per pile shall be based on
the total column load (not including the weight of the footing itself)
divided by the area or by the number of piles.
Paragraph 17-9-3. Sloped or Stepped Footings.
Footings in which the thickness has been determined by the re-
quirements for shear as specified in Paragraph 17-5-6, may be sloped
120 BUILDING CODE
or stepped between the critical section and the edge of the footing,
provided that the shear on no section outside the critical section exceeds
the value specified, and provided further that the thickness of the foot-
ing above the reinforcement at the edge shall not be less than 6 inches
for footings on soil nor less than 12 inches for footings on piles. Sloped
or stepped footings shall be cast as a unit.
Paragraph 17-9-4. Bending in Footings.
The critical section for bending in a concrete footing which sup-
ports a concrete column or pedestal, shall be considered to be at the
face of the column or pedestal. Where steel or cast iron column bases
are used, the moment in the footing shall be computed at the middle
and at the edge of the base; the load shall be considered as uniformly
distributed over the column or pedestal base.
The bending moment at the critical section in a square footing sup-
porting a concentric square column, shall be computed from the load
on the trapezoid bounded by one face of the column, the corresponding
outside edge of the footing, and the portions of the two diagonals.
The load on the two corner triangles of this trapezoid shall be con-
sidered as applied at a distance from the face equal to six-tenths of
the projection of the footing from the face of the column. The load on
the rectangular portion of the trapezoid shall be considered as applied
at its center of gravity. The bending moment is expressed by
Formula 27.
w
M = — a ' 1.2 c�C' ......._.......................... .................. ......�
2
where
M = bending moment at critical section of footing;
a = width of face of column or pedestal;
c = projection of footing from face of column; and
w = upward reaction per unit of area of base of footing.
For a round or octagonal column, the distance "a" shall be taken as
equal to the side of a square of an area equal to the area enclosed
within the perimeter of the column.
The reinforcement in each direction in the footing shall be deter-
mined as for a reinforced concrete beam with the limiting stresses
specified in Paragraph 17-3-3, the effective depth shall be the distance
from. the top of the footing to the plane of the reinforcement. The
sectional area of reinforcement shall be distributed uniformly across the
footing unless the width is greater than the side of the column or
pedestal plus twice the effective depth of the footing, in which case
the width over which the reinforcement is spread may be increased to
include one-half-the remaining width of the footing. In order that no
considerable area of the footing shall remain unreinforced. additional
reinforcement shall be placed outside of the width specified, but such
reinforcement shall not be considered as effective in resisting the cal-
culated bending moment. For the extra reinforcement a spacing double
that within the effective belt may be used.
The extreme fibre stress in compression in the concrete shall be
kept within the limits specified in Paragraph 17-3-3. The extreme fibre
stress in sloped or stepped footings shall be based on the exact shape of
the section for a width not greater than that assumed effective for
reinforcement.
Paragraph 17-9-5. Footings Other Than Square.
A rectangular or irregularly shaped footing shall be computed by
dividing it into rectangles or trapezoids tributary to the sides of the
CITY OF FORT WORTH 121
column, using the distance to the center of gravity of the areas as the
moment arm of the upward forces. Outstanding portions of combined
footings shall be treated in the same manner. Other portions of com-
bined footings shall be designed as beams or slabs.
Paragraph 17-9-6. Shearing and Bending Stresses.
See Paragraph 17-5-0 and Paragraphs 17-6-1 to 17-6-5 inclusive.
Paragraph 17-9-7. Transfer of Stress at Base of Column.
The compressive stress in longitudinal reinforcement at the base of
a column.shall be transferred to the pedestal or footing by either dowels
or distributing bases. When dowels -are used, there shall be at least
one for each column bar, and the total sectional area of the dowels
shall be not less than the sectional area of the longitudinal reinforce-
ment in the column. The dowels shall extend into the column and into
the pedestal or footing not less than 50 diameters of the dowel bars for
plain bars, or 40 diameters for deformed bars.
When metal distributing bases are used, they shall have sufficient
area and thickness to transmit safely the load from the longitudinal
reinforcement in compression and bending. The permissible compressive
unit stress on top of the pedestal or footing directly under the column
shall be not greater than that determined by Formula 28.
ra = 0.25E c 3�A .... .... . ....... .(28)
r
where
ra = permissible working stress over the loaded area,
A = total area at the top of the pedestal or footing;
A' = loaded area at the polumn base;
V = ultimate compressive strength of concrete.
In sloped or stepped footings "A" may be taken as the area of the
top horizontal surface of the footing or as the area of the lower base
of the largest frustum of a pyramid or cone contained wholly within
the footing and having for its upper base the loaded area A, and
having side slopes of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal.
Paragraph 17-9-8. Pedestals Without Reinforcement.
The allowable compressive unit stress on the gross area of a con-
centrically loaded pedestal or on the minimum area of a pedestal footing
shall not exceed 0.25f'a, unless reinforcement is provided and the num-
ber designed as a reinforced concrete column.
The depth of a pedestal or pedestal footing shall be not greater
than three times its least width and the projection on any side from
the face of the supported member shall be not greater than one-half
the depth. The depth of a pedestal whose sides are sloped or stepped
shall not exceed three times the least width or diameter of the section
midway between the top and bottom. A pedestal footing supported
directly on piles shall have a mat of reinforcing bars having a cross-
sectional area of not less than 0.20 square inches per foot in each direc-
tion, placed 3 inches above the top of the piles.
Section 17-10.
REINFORCED CONCRETE CHIMNEYS.
Paragraph 17-10-1. Design Assumptions.
L In designing chimneys the following primary assumptions shall
govern:
122 BUILDING CODE '
(a) Wind pressure shall be as provided in Paragraph 13-1-4.
(b) A plane section before bending remains plane after bending.
(c) The tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected when com-
puting tensile stresses in the reinforcing steel.
(d) The compressive strength of the steel shall be neglected when
computing compression stresses in the concrete.
(e) Compressive stress in concrete shall not exceed 0.20f'o.
(f) Tensile stress. in reinforcing steel shall not exceed 18,000
pounds per square inch.
(g) Shearing stress in concrete shall not exceed 0.02f'� unless
shear reinforcement is provided,'in which case the shearing stress
shall not exceed 0.05f'a.
(h) The full strength of the bars shall be assumed to be developed
by the imbedment of the bar equal to forty times its diameter.
Paragraph 17-10-2. General Provisions.
The minimum wall thickness shall be as follows:
Inside Diameter of Minimum Wall Thickness
Shaft at Top. at Top of Shaft.
8 ft.and under ............................................................... 4 inches '
8 ft.to 12 1`t.,._.,_.'_. -._..._-.___.. ......................_....._........ 5 inches
12 ft.to 18 fL...._........._...............................................__. 6 inches
18 ft.and over..................................................................... 7 inches
The wall thickness shall be increased and additional reinforcement
shall be provided at openings so that the strength of the horizontal sec-
tions through the opening is not less than the strength of the horizontal
section immediately below the opening.
Temperature and torsional stresses shall be properly provided for
with reinforcement. The spacing of such reinforcement shall not exceed
6 inches and the distance from the face of the wall to the reinforcement
shall not be more than 2 inches.
Lining of suitable insulating material shall be provided to protect
the chimney walls from the heat of the burnt gasses. The lining shall
begin not less than 2 feet below the flue opening in all cases. Where
the temperature does not exceed 800 degrees F., the lining shall extend
above the flue opening a distance equal to one-fifth of the height of the
chimney but not less than 25 feet. Where the temperature is between
800 degrees F. and 1200 degrees F., the lining shall extend above the
flue opening a distance equal to one-half the height of the chimney, but
not less than 75 feet. Where the temperature exceeds 1200 degrees F.,
the lining shall extend the full height of the chimney above the flue open-
ing. An air space of not less than 2 inches shall be provided between
the chimney wall and the lining. The air space shall be closed at the top
of the lining.'
Paragraph 17-10-3. Reinforced Concrete Foundations for Chimneys.
Foundations shall be proportioned so that the bearing pressure on
the soil under the maximum combination of wind and gravity loads does
not exceed the allowable value provided in Paragraph 13-3-6.
Stress in foundations shall not exceed those provided in Chapter 17.
The foundation and shaft shall be securely bonded together.
- _• .mot
CITY OF FORT WORTH 123
Section 17-11.
PROTECTION OF REINFORCING STEEL.
Paragraph 17-11-1. Minimum.
Reinforcing steel shall be protected by a minimum of 2 inches of
concrete or gunite in girders and columns,1% inches in beams, and 1-inch
in floor slabs and walls. In structures in which the fire hazard is limited,
the minimum protection of reinforcing steel shall be 1% inches in col-
umns, girders and beams, and % of an inch in slabs and walls.
Chapter 18.
MILL CONSTRUCTION.
Section 18-1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
Paragraph 18-1-1. Requirements.
Buildings of structures of mill construction shall meet the require-
ments of the following paragraphs:
r
Paragraph 18-1-2. Wall Construction.
See Chapter No. 14.
Paragraph 18-1-3. Hollow Spaces.
No hollow or concealed spaces shall be allowed in this class of con-
struction.
Paragraph 18-1-4. Roof Construction.
Roof construction shall be of not less than 1%-Inch splined or
tongued and grooved planking spiked directly to heavy roof timbers, not
less than 6 inches in the least dimension, and covered with metal, tar
and gravel, or other approved incombustible roof covering.
Paragraph 18-1-5. Floor Construction.
Floors shall have protected openings and shall be constructed of
not less than 2%-inch sphned, or tongued and grooved planking, cov-
ered with not less than 25/32-inch top flooring laid crosswise or diag-
onally, properly nailed to heavy floor beams. The spacing of floor tim-
bers shall be suitable for the load to be carried, the timbers in no case
being less than 7% inches in the least dimension and resting on top of
girders, or on stirrups, or on iron or steel plates in the walls, or on iron
or steel caps on columns. Each timber at wall bearing shall be anchored
with cast iron anchor plates at least %-inch thick, or with other suitable
anchors and shall be self-releasing. In floors and roofs the timbers
shall be tied together at joints with a %-inch joint bolt or with two
%-inch dog irons so that a continuous tie exists across the building.
Paragraph 18-1-6. Columns, Girders and Beams.
Y The columns and posts shall rest on iron or steel capitals or pintles,
no wooden columns or post being less than 7% inches in the least
dimension, except under roof, which may not be less than 6 inches,
and all columns, girders and beams of wood being of solid material,
those of wrought iron or steel being protected as required for structural
metal.
124• BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 18-1-7. Partitions.
No bearing partitions will be allowed and all partitions shall be
constructed of incombustible material or 2-inch matched plank or double
matched boards with joints broken,.preferably coated with fire-retarding
paint. Thickness of partitions shall vary with height and must be ap-
proved by Building Commissioner.
Chapter 19.
WOODEN CONSTRUCTION.
Section 19-1.
FRAMING REQUIREMENTS FOR TIMBER CONSTRUCTION.
Paragraph 19-1-1. Dimensions.
All wooden structural members shall be of sufficient size and
strength to carry the loads imposed upon them without exceeding the
allowable working stresses. The strength of such members shall be
determined from actual dimensions of the pieces and not from nominal
dimensions. No structural members shall be less than 1%-inch actual
measurement.
Paragraph 19-1-2. Rigidity.
All members shall be so framed, anchored, tied and braced together
as to develop the maximum strength and rigidity consistent with the
purposes for which they are used.
Paragraph 19-1-3. Anchoring.
Each tier of floor joists shall be securely anchored to masonry walls
with T-shaped steel anchors at intervals of not more than 6 feet; and
anchors shall be attached in a way to afford easy release in case of
fire burning through the joists. The ends of lapped joists resting upon
girders or bearipg partitions shall be securely spiked. When butted
they shall be connected with steel straps or dogs.
Paragraph 19-1-4. Joist Bearing.
Every joist supported by masonry shall have bearing at least 3
inches in length. The ends of joists resting in masonry walls shall be
bevelled to release the joist from the wall in case of fire. Approved
joist hangers may be used.
Paragraph 19-1-5. Parallel Anchoring.
Joists running parallel to masonry inclosing walls, including stair
carriages, shall be anchored to the walls at least once between bearings
with steel anchors. Such anchors shall extend back and engage at least
three joists. Girders shall be anchored to the walls and fastened to
each other in a suitable manner with steel straps, and shall be beveled
to release the girder from the wall in case of fire.
Paragraph 19-1-6. Spiking.
When inclosing walls are of wood, each joist, beam and girder en-
tering same shall be securely spiked or anchored to the wall construc-
tion. Where joists rest upon ledger or ribbon boards they shall be se-
curely spiked to the studs. Wooden structures where resting on ma-
sonry foundation or other walls shall have steel anchors not less than
four-tenths square inch in cross section, extending down into the y
wall not less than 2 feet, and spaced not over 6 feet apart.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 125
Paragraph 19-1-7. Bridging.
All floor joists and roof rafters shall be rigidly bridged at intervals
not exceeding 8 feet. Rafters shall be vertically supported near the
ridge when the slope is less than 6 inches per foot, and all rafters shall
be thus supported unless their feet are thoroughly tied at the plate.
Paragraph 19-1-8. Headers.
Each header more than 4 feet long and trimmers for same shall
be at least twice the thickness of the floor joists. Headers and tail
beams shall be hung on approved joist hangers.
Paragraph 19-1-9. Cutting Joists.
Floor timbers shall not be cut for piping or other purposes in such
a manner as to reduce the strength below that required. If changes in,
or repairs to, plumbing pipes are made in existing buildings, no struc-
tural member shall be cut without first obtaining approval from the
Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 19-1-10. Studding.
_ Wood studding, except for private garages, shall be not less than
2x4 inches and spaced not to exceed 16 inches on centers and with long
dimension at right angles with the plane of the wall or bearing parti-
tion. In buildings over 25 feet in height, studding shall not be less than
2 inches x 6 inches and shall be spaced not to exceed 16 inches on centers.
Paragraph 19-1-11. Cutting Walls.
Wooden beams or joists shall not enter any hollow tile or block or
any other 8-inch party walls unless recesses for timbers on both sides
are provided at the time the wall is built. The cutting of such walls
for joists shall not be permitted, and joist hangers shall be used. In all
masonry walls the joist on opposite sides shall be so placed as to pro-
vide at least 334-inch of solid masonry between them.
Paragraph 19-1-12. Ventilators.
Building without cellars or basements shall have at least four
metal wall ventilators located at the foundation walls below any wooden
floor joist and distributed on opposite sides of the building, and no
wood work shall be less than 6 inches clear of the ground.
Paragraph 19-1-13. Plates.
Bearing partitions shall be provided at the top with double plates,
each at least 2 inches thick and of same width as stud. Non-bearing
partitions shall be provided with at least one 2-inch plate on top and
bottom of same width as stud or be otherwise properly fire-stopped at
floor lines. When the studs are placed directly below each joist, a
single top plate may be used. If properly fire-stopped, studs may run
through the floor and rest on girders or on partition plates.
Paragraph 19-1-14. Double Joists.
All partitions not resting upon girders, or of which the studs do
not rest on partition plates below, shall have sole plates of dimensions
not less than the studs. Partitions unsupported by walls shall be sup-
ported on girders or double joists, or on sole plates if placed at an
angle to the joists.
Paragraph 19-1-15. Trusses.
Complete details shall be given for all wooden trusses; such trusses
shall be so detailed as to provide against dangers due to splitting,
shrinking or warping of timbers.
126 BUILDING MODE
Paragraph 19-1-16. Columns and Posts.
Wood columns and posts shall be squared at the ends; shall be pro-
vided with base plates; shall be supported in basements by footing
projecting at least two inches above the finished floor; shall be super-
imposed on approved metal appliances where continuing through more
than one story; shall not rest directly or indirectly on any floor beams.
Paragraph 19-1-17. Bolsters.
Wood bolsters may be used to support a single floor or the roof
beams only.
Paragraph 19-1-18. Preservatives.
Preservatives shall be applied to column ends where necessary to pro-
tect against probable dampness.
Paragraph 19-1-19. Wood Posts.
Wood posts except for minor structures and as piles, shall not be
used as foundations below ground.
Paragraph 19-1-20. Girders and Beams.
Girders and beams where entering or resting on masonry walls shall '
have a bearing of at least four inches on a metal bearing plate. Where
members meet at columns they shall be fitted round or butted up close
and held in place by metal strips unless the post caps provide sufficient
anchorage. Bearing girders entering outside stud walls and not supported
directly by the foundation shall be supported by adequate posts bearing
on the foundation.
Paragraph 19-1-21. Built-Up Timbers.
Built-up timbers shall have members bolted tightly together and
all contact faces shall be treated with approved preservative compound.
Paragraph 19-1-22. Joist and Rafter Ends.
Joist and rafter ends may be supported by a 2x4 wood strip or cleat
spiked or bolted to the girder when the floor loads do not exceed 100
pounds per square foot. Wood strips bolted to the web of a metal I-beam
for the support of wood beams or joists shall rest on the bottom flange
of the metallic member.
Paragraph 19-1-23. Wood Members Entering Masonry Party or Fire
Walls.
Wood members entering masonry party or fire walls shall be sepa-
rated from the opposite side of the wall and from beams entering the
opposite side of the wall by 8-inch masonry. If a right angle masonry
joint exists, the separation may be reduced to 6 inches. The ends of the
beams shall be splayed or fire-cut, to a bevel of not less than 3 inches in
their depth.
Paragraph 19-1-24. Anchors for Beams and Girders.
Anchors for beams and girders shall be provided where they enter
masonry walls as required for joists or in the form of self-releasing
girder boxes.
Paragraph 19-1-25. Floor Joists Shall Be Supported by Girders.
Floor joists shall be supported by girders, bearing partitions and ex-
terior walls. Where entering exterior stud walls, the joists shall be sup-
ported by a ribbon let into the studs if no top plate is provided. Joists
to be'well nailed to the supporting studs. Studs shall be doubled under
the ends of doubled joists.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 127
Paragraph 19-1-26. Joist Bridgiag.
Between joists crossing bearing partitions solid bridging shall be
placed. Solid bridging shall be placed between joists at the edge of floor-
ing when the attic space is only partially covered.
Paragraph 19-1-27. Sub-Floors.
Wherever rough or sub-floors are used, the boards shall be placed
crossing the joists at an angle of not less than 45 degrees. Each board
shall be properly nailed at joist. Sub-floor must extend to and fit
tightly against the wall sheathing and studding, except that subfloor-
ing may be kept one inch from exterior brick walls.
Paragraph 19-1-28.
Angles at corners where stud walls or partitions meet shall be framed
solid so no lath can extend from one room to another.
Paragraph 19-1-29. Stud Partitions Containing Plumbing.
Stud partitions containing plumbing, heating or other pipes shall
be so framed and the joists underneath so spaced or trimmed as to give
proper clearance for the piping. Where a partition containing such pip-
ing runs parallel to the floor joists, the joists underneath such partition
shall be doubled and spaced to permit the passage of such pipes and shall
be bridged with solid bridging.
Paragraph 19-1-30. Openings in Stud Partitions and Walls.
Openings in stud partitions and walls shall be framed around with
double studs at each side and double headers across the top resting on
the short stud at each end. The double header shall be placed on edge
and shall be trussed above for all openings over four feet in width, or
where more than two studs are cut away.
Paragraph 19-1-31. Wooden Furring Prohibited.
No wooden furring or studding shall be placed against any chimney;
the plastering shall be directly on the masonry, or on metal lath.
Paragraph 19-1-32. Walls Behind Wainscoting. '
Behind wainscoting the surface of walls and partitions shall be
plastered flush with the grounds and down to the floor line.
Paragraph 19-1-33. Roof Framing.
Roof framing shall be well built and nailed solid.
Paragraph 19-1-34. Hip and Valley Rafters.
Hip and valley rafters shall be not less than 1%x5% inches in size.
When the span exceeds 16 feet they shall be doubled.
Paragraph 19-1-35. Rafters.
Rafters shall be not less than 1%x3% inches in size. When over
12 feet in length from ridge to plate shall be reinforced with collar beams
not less than lx4 in size placed at intervals of not more than every third
rafter.
Paragraph 19-1-36. Fire Stops.
Fire stops shall be provided at all intersections of interior and ex-
terior walls with floors, ceilings and roof in such a manner as will effec-
tively cut off communication by fire through hollow concealed spaces
and prevent both vertical and horizontal drafts.
Paragraph 19-1-37. Furred Walls.
Furred walls shall have fire stopping placed immediately above and
below.the junction of any floor construction with the walls or shall be
fire stopped the full depth of the joist.
128 BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 19-1-38. Walls. ft
• Walls that are studded off shall have the hollow space fire stopped
at floor levels.
Paragraph 19-1-39. Hollow Stud Partitions and Walls
Hollow stud partitions and walls shall have intermediate fire stop-
ping placed between the studs midway between floor levels. Wood stops
shall be of the same dimensions as the studs. They shall be wedged in
at an angle of not less than 15 degrees, nor more than 30 degrees, from
the horizontal.
Paragraph 19-1-40. Stair Carriages.
Stair carriages shall be fire stopped at least once in the middle por-
tion of each run, and shall be fire stopped by a header beam at top and
bottom, so as to effectively prevent the passage of fire.
Paragraph 19-1-41. Sliding Door Pockets, Etc.
When sliding doors are pocketed in partitions such pockets shall be
completely fire stopped at end, sides, top and bottom.
Paragraph 19-1-42. Spaces Between Chimneys and Wood Beams.
All spaces between chimneys and wooden beams sha�l be solidly filled
with refuse mortar, loose cinders or other incombustible material.
Paragraph 19-1-43. Clothes Chutes.
Clothes chutes, dumb waiters, shafts, pipe shafts and other enclosed '
spaces of similar character extending from one story to another, where
not required by this ordinance to be built of fireproof material, shall be
lined on the inside with sheet metal having lock joints. All openings
shall be closed with tight-fitting metal-lined covers or doors. -
Section 19-2.
SPANS FOR, FLOOR AND ROOF JOISTS.
Paragraph 19-2-1. General Note.
Floor spans in this section are for double flooring and plaster ceiling,
but no partitions. Floor joists carrying non-bearing partitions running
in the same direction shall be double. When non-bearing partitions cross
joists near their center, those joists shall be of size required for a span
2 feet greater than the actual span. Roof spans are for 4-ply slag and
sheathing but no ceiling.
Paragraph 19-2-2. Spans for Short Leaf Pine, Etc.
The following maximum clear spans are for standard commercial
sizes of Short Leaf Yellow Pine (N. C.), Red or White Eastern Spruce
and Rocky Mountain Douglas Fir:
Floors for
Nominal Spacing Roofs Dwellings,Etc.
Size Center to 30 Pounds 40 Pounds
of Joists Center Live Load Live Load
2x6 inches 16 inches 10 feet 9 feet
2x8 inches 16 inches 13% feet 12 feet
2x10 inches 16 inches 17 feet 15 feet
2x10 inches 12 inches 19 feet 17 feet
2x12 inches 16 inches 20% feet 17% feet
2x12 inches 12 inches 23 feet 20 feet
3x12 inches 16 inches .... 22 feet
3x12 inches 12 inches .... ...... .... ...... '
CITY OF FORT WORTH 129
Paragraph 19-2-3. Joist Spans for Long Leaf Pine, Etc.
The following maximum clear spans are for standard commercial
sizes of Long Leaf Yellow Pine (Ga.), Red or White Oak and Pacific
Coast Douglas Fir:
Floors for
Nominal Spacing Roofs Dwellings, Etc.
Size Center to 30 Pounds 40 Pounds
of Joists Center Live Load Live Load
2x6 inches 16 inches 11 feet 10% feet
2x8 inches 16 inches 15 feet• 14% feet
2x10inches 16 inches 19 feet 18 feet
2x10 inches 12 inches 21 feet 19 feet
2x12 inches 16 inches 23 feet 21% feet
2x12 inches 12 inches .... ...... 23% feet
3x12 inches 16 inches ._._ ------ ....... ......
3x12 inches 12 inches ._........ ........ ......
3x14 inches 16 inches .... ...... ........ ......
The above spans do not apply to the denser grades of Long Leaf
Yellow Pine and Pacific Coast Douglas Fir, for which an increased fibre
stress is allowed.
Paragraph 19-2-4. Note.
The spans as given above are for the more common use of joists,
and they shall not be used for special cases which will exceed the allow-
able stresses.
Chapter 20.
EXCAVATIONS AND FOUNDATIONS.
Section 20-1.
EXCAVATIONS.
Paragraph 20-1-1. Notice to Adjoining Owners.
Whenever an adjacent excavation shall be carried to a depth so
that adjoining walls will have to be underpinned, it shall be the duty of
the general contractor to give adjoining property owners notice of
this fact.
Paragraph 20-1-2. Caving In of Adjoining Property.
All excavations for buildings shall be .protected by the person, per-
sons or corporations causing same to be made, so as to prevent the
same from becoming dangerous to life and limb, and shall be sheathed
piled whenever it may be necessary to prevent the adjoining soil from
caving in.by reason of any land that may rest upon it.
Paragraph 20-1-3. Suitable Bearing Soil.
All excavations shall be carried down to a suitable bearing and
shall be capable of carrying safely the loads to be imposed upon it. The
bearing soil value shall correspond to tables under Chapter 13.
Paragraph 20-1-4. Rock Excavation—Blasting.
When excavating and explosives are used, extreme care shall
be taken to protect the public and adjoining property. Before each shot,
men shall be stationed at various dangerous points to warn the public,
and all rock to be blasted shall-be thickly covered with mats and heavy
130 BUILDING CODE
timbers or other satisfactory covering. Any person or persons engaged -
in the excavating of rock shall employ a competent man who is familiar
with the uses of dynamite and other explosives and who shall regulate
the shooting of all blasts.
Paragraph 20-1-5. Contractor's Liability—Bond. `
Any person, firm or corporation using explosives shall give a bond
to be approved by the Board of City Councilmen and the City Attorney,
conditioned upon the payment of all damages caused by said excava-
tion or use of explosives in the amount of Five Thousand ($5,000.00)
Dollars. In cases where work is extremely hazardous the amount of
the bond shall be increased at the discretion of the Building Com,
missioner.
Paragraph 20-1-6. Excavations Affecting Adjoining Property.
Whenever an excavation of either earth or rock for buildings or
other purposes shall be made, the person causing such excavation to be
made shall at all times from the commencement until the completion
thereof, if accorded the necessary license to enter upon the adjoining
land, and not otherwise, at his own expense preserve any adjoining or
contiguous wall, structure, yard or bank of earth or rock from injury,
and.support the same by proper foundations or retaining walls, so that
the said wall, structure, yard, or bank of earth or rock shall be and
remain practically as safe as before such excavation was commenced.
For this purpose such approved foundations or retaining walls may
be built upon the property upon which the wall, structure, yard, or
bank of earth or rock is situated. If the necessary license is not ac-
corded to the person or persons making such excavation, then it shall
be the duty of the owner refusing to grant such license at his own
expense to make the adjoining or contiguous wall, structure, yard, or
bank of earth or rock safe, and support the same by proper founda-
tions so that adjoining excavations may be made, and shall be per-
mitted to enter upon the premises where such excavation is being made
for that purpose, when necessary.
Paragraph 20-1-7. Foundations Adjoining Party Walls.
In case a party wall is intended to be used by the person causing
an excavation to be made and the footings and foundations of such party
wall are in good condition and sufficient for the uses of both the exist-
ing:building and the new one, then the person causing the excavation
to be made shall, at his own expense, preserve such party wall from
injury and support the same by proper means, so that said party wall
shall be and remain as safe as before the excavation was begun.
In case the footings and foundations of any said party wall are
not in good condition, or not sufficient for the uses of both the exist-
ing building and the new one, it shall be the duty of the person causing
such excavation to be made to extend such defective or insufficient
footing or foundation, or to replace same with a new'footing or founda-
tion. Such extended or new footing shall project on each side of the
party line such a distance as to bring the center of the footing under
the center of the wall, so that the total load upon,the wall may be uni-
formly distributed over the area of the footing. Any other method may
be used which will adequately support the party wall. In order that
this may be done, the person causing the excavation to be' made shall be
allowed access to the adjoining premises.
In case any excavation or the removal of any existing building
shows any adjoining wall or structure to be unsafe at the time the
excavation was begun, it shall be the duty of the person causing the
CITY OF FORT WORTH 131
excavation to be made, or the building to be removed,.to forthwith report
the fact, in writing, to the Building Commissioner, who shall upon the
receipt of such notice, forthwith cause an inspection of such adjoining
premises to be made, and if such inspection proves the aforesaid wall
or structure to be unsafe, it shall be the duty of the Building Commis-
sioner to declare such wall or structure to be unsafe and cause the
same to be repaired as herein provided.
If the person whose duty it shall be to preserve or protect from
injury any wall or structure shall neglect or fail to do so within 24
hours after the receipt of a notice from the Building Commissioner,
then the Building Commissioner may enter upon the premises and
employ such labor, and furnish such materials and take such steps as,
in his judgment, may be necessary to make the premises safe and se-
cure, or to prevent the same from becoming unsafe or dangerous, at
the cost and expense of the person whose duty it is to keep the same
safe and secure.
Section 20-2.
FOUNDATIONS.
Paragraph 20-2-1. Foundation Walls.
Foundation walls shall be construed to include all walls and piers
built below the curb level, or nearest tier of beams to the curb, or to
the average level of the ground adjoining the walls, to serve as sup-
ports for walls, piers, columns, girders, posts or beams.
If built of rubble stone, they shall be at least 8 inches thicker than
the wall next above them to a depth of 12 feet below the curb level;
and for every additional 10 feet, or part thereof deeper, they shall be
increased 4 inches in thickness.
If built of brick or plain concrete and supporting walls over 30
feet in height, they shall be at least 4 inches thicker than the wall next
above them to a depth of 12 feet below the curb level; and for every
additional 10 feet, or part thereof deeper,they shall be increased 4 inches
in thickness. In buildings not exceeding 30 feet in height, the Build-
ing Commissioner may at his discretion permit the foundation walls
to be the same thickness as the walls above.
Hollow blocks may be used for the foundation walls'of buildings
not exceeding three stories or 40 feet in height, provided said walls
are not less than the thickness required for foundation walls or brick
or plain concrete. All blocks shall be laid to line and level, and care-
fully bonded. When blocks are laid with cells vertical the stability of
the walls and their resistance to water, may be increased by being
filled solidly with wet concrete. Such foundations shall not be stressed
beyond the limits allowed in Chapter 19, taken over combined area of
blocks and fill.
Portland cement mortar only shall be used in footings and founda-
tion walls.
Paragraph 20-2-2. Footings.
The footings for foundation walls, piers and columns shall be con-
structed of plain concrete, reinforced concrete, or of steel grillage beams
resting on a bed of concrete.
Footings shall be so designed that the loads they sustain per unit
of area shall be as nearly uniform as possible, and the stresses shall
conform to the requirements of this code. The dead loads carried by
132 Bul nwyw C4uz
the footings shall include the actual weight of the superstructure and
foundations down to the bottom of the footings. All tanks or other
receptacles for liquids shall be figured as being full. All vaults or
similar built-in structures shall be considered parts of the building.
The live load on column footings shall be assumed to be the same
as the live load in the lowest tier of columns.
'Loads exerting pressure under the footings of foundations of
buildings more than three stories in height, shall be computed as
follows:
(a) For buildings in which the required live load does not exceed
75 pounds per square foot assume the total dead load, plus 60% of the
full live load.
(b) For buildings in which the required live load exceeds 75
pounds per square foot, assume the total dead load, plus 75% of the full
live load.
In no case shall the load per square foot under any portion of any
footing due to the combined dead, live and wind loads, exceed the safe
sustaining power of the soil upon which the footing rests.
Concrete footings shall be not less than 12 inches thick except for
frame buildings, which may be 8 inches thick.
'Concrete for footings shall be made of at least 1 part of Port<
land cement, and not more than 2% parts of sand and 5 parts of broken
stone or gravel, and all materials shall meet with the requirements of
Chapter 13.
Stepped up courses of brick shall have offsets of not more than
�a inch if laid in single courses and 1 inch if laid in double courses.
If the nature of the ground and the character of the building are
such as to make it necessary or advisable, isolated piers may be used
instead of a continuous wall to support the building.
Grillage beams shall be united by bolts and separators, and the
grillage filled solid with concrete. All metal which forms parts of
any footing or foundation shall be protected from rust by a wash of
rich Portland cement grout, or by the use of other approved coating,
and shall be entirely encased with at least 4 inches of concrete.
Paragraph 20-2-3. Wooden Piles.
Wooden piles shall be of approved timber. They shall be sound
and straight.. The diameter at the butt shall be not less than 10 inches,
and the diameter at the point shall be not less than 5 inches. Any pile
over 20 feet in length shall not be less than 12 inches at the butt. The
minimum distance between piles shall be 2 feet.
Piles shall be driven to refusal if possible, and the method of driv-
ing shall be such as not to impair their strength. The maximum load
carried by a pile driven through firm soil to rock or hard pan shall be
computed by multiplying the average area of cross-section in inches
by 500 pounds; but in no case shall such load exceed 15 tons. Piles
driven through loose wet soil to solid rock or hard pan, shall be figured
as columns unsupported laterally for their entire length.
CITY W PORT WORTH 133
The safe sustaining power of a pile not driven to refusal, which
shall in no case exceed 10 tons, shall be determined by calculation based
upon the following formula:
2WH
L =
P.plus 1
in which L = the allowable load in tons (maximum ten tons).
W = the weight of the hammer in tons.
H = the fall of the hammer in feet (maximum 15 feet).
P = the average penetration in inches under the last five
blows after the pile has sunk to a point where suc-
cessive blows produce approximately equal penetra=
tions.
The Building Commissioner shall be notified before any test is
made of the sustaining power of piles, so that he may be present or
represented thereat.
The sustaining power of wooden piles driven by steam or pneumatic
hammers or by jetting shall be determined by test as directed by the
Building Commissioner.
Piles shall be cut so that the tops are always below the level of
mean low water. Portland cement concrete shall be rammed down in
the interspaces between the heads of the piles to a depth of not less
than 8 inches, and laterally for a distance of not less than 12 inches
on each side of the rows of piles.
Under frame buildings piles may be capped with timbers; the tim-
bers shall be sound wood,not less than 6 inches thick and properly joined
together. The top of all such timbers shall be below the level of mean
low water except in the case of frame buildings built over the water or
on soft meadow, or similar land, in which case piles may project above
the water a sufficient distance to raise the building above high tide,
and then the building may be placed directly thereon.
Paragraph 20-2-4. Concrete Piles.
Piles consisting of steel tubes filled with concrete shall have a
minimum inside diameter of 10 inches and the thickness of the metal
tube not less than %-inch. The length shall not exceed forty times
the inside diameter. The ends of the tube shall be faced perpendicular
to its axis. No more than one slice of an approved design shall be used
in the total length of the pile. When driven to rock the load on such
piles shall not exceed over 500 pounds per square inch on the concrete
and 7,500 pounds per square inch on the steel. In computing the effec-
tive area of the steel, %-inch of its thickness shall be deducted from
the thickness of the tube to allow for corrosion.
Concrete piles moulded and cured before driving shall be provided
with not less than 2% nor more than 4010 of longitudinal reinforcement
with bands or hoops not less than % inch in diameter, and spaced not
further apart than 6 inches. The average diameter of the pile shall
not be less than 12 inches, and the diameter at the foot not less than
8 inches. The length shall not exceed thirty times the average diameter
for piles driven through firm soil, and shall not exceed fifteen times
the average diameter•far piles driven to rock through loose, wet soil,
or filled ground. When driven to rock the maximum load carried on
such piles shall not exceed 6,000 pounds per square inch on the longitu-
dinal reinforcement and 500 pounds per square inch on the concrete at
the average cross section.
134 BUILDING CODE
The top of the piles shall be protected with a cushion cap of ap-
proved design, and when driven to rock the foot shall be provided with '
a metal shoe having a square bearing.
When piles of the types described in Paragraphs 1 and 2 are not
driven to rock their carrying capacity shall be determined by means
of one or more test piles, and the working load shall not exceed one-
half the test load under which the pile begins to settle, nor shall the
prescribed unit stresses be exceeded.
Concrete piles cast in place shall be made in such manner as to
insure the seclusion of any foreign matter, and to secure a uniform full-
sized section for the entire length. The average diameter of the pile
shall be not less than 13 inches and the diameter at the foot not less than
8'inches. The length shall not exceed 25 times the average diameter.
The carrying capacity of such piles shall be determined by means of one
or more test piles and the allowable working load shall be not greater
than one-half the test load under which the test pile'begins to settle, nor
greater than 354 pounds per square inch.
Note: Piles freshly cast in place are sometimes seriously injured
by driving the core for a new pile too near. This should be avoided.
The concrete shall be mixed in the proportion of 1 part Portland
cement, 2 parts of clean coarse sand, and 4 parts of broken stone or
gravel of*a size passing through a 1 Y4-inch diameter ring, with suffi-
cient water to produce a plastic or viscous consistency.
The clear space between the heads of concrete piles shall not be
less than 16 inches.
The permissible load upon piles driven out of plumb and the extent
to which piles may be driven out of plumb before being condemned,
shall be determined by the Building Commissioner.
No pile or group of piles shall be loaded eccentrically.
Chapter 21.
FENCING, STORAGE OF MATERIALS, PROTECTION, ETC.
Section 21-1.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
Paragraph 21-1-1. Occupying Streets With Materials.
No person shall store or place materials of construction in any pub-
lic street or alley, for use in construction, alteration or repair of a build-
ing or other structure, unless he shall have first obtained from the
Building Commissioner a written permit to do so. Such permit shall
state the location and limit of the area to be so occupied (which area
shall not exceed in any case one-half of the street width between curbs)
with such other conditions affecting the safety and convenience of the
public as the Building Commissioner may deem desirable; and if the
person to whom the permit has been issued fails to fulfill the.conditions
therein stated, then the Building Commissioner may revoke such permit
until such regulations are complied with.
No material shall be stored in the street at any time in such a
way as to obstruct the flow of storm water in the gutters.
Paragraph 21-1-2. Fences.
In Zone 1 and when deemed advisable by the Building.Commissioner
in other zones, depending upon location, and when the sidewalk and
Crrx op FoRT WORTH 135.
street shall be used' for the storage of materials for buildings to be
erected or reconstructed, or when excavations are being made for oae
week or more,there shall be erected a solid board fence on the street sides
and return sides to the property line, located at the distance allowed
by the Building Commissioner in street permit issued in connection with
• such work.
Where fences are built at street intersections, same shall not be
more than 4 feet high for a distance of at least 20 feet in each direction
from said intersection, and no material shall be piled to more than the
height of the fence within these limits.
Paragraph 21-1-3. Fire Hydrants.
Existing fire hydrants near all buildings being erected or recon-
structed, shall always be left easily accessible, and where a fire hydrant
is located on a site that necessitates the building of a fence, said fence.
shall have a gate opening direct to hydrant and same shall not be kept
locked. The words "Fire Hydrant" shall be painted on the gate and
such letters shall not be less than 6 inches high. At night a red lan-
tern shall be hung on the gate.
Paragraph 21-1-4. Covering Over Sidewalks.
. The sidewalks in front of all buildings being erected or reconstructed
must be kept clear from obstructions and in a passable condition after
the structural part of said first story of building has been completed
and such sidewalks must be covered with a solid plank roof of heavy
construction as approved by the Building Commissioner from the time
such structural part of first story has been completed, and must have
a solid plank floor; same shall be kept in good repair at all times and shall
remain in place until-all danger from falling materials in the construc-
tion of such building no longer exists. This passageway must be at least
5 feet wide and 8 feet in clear height, and must be kept properly lighted.
Paragraph 21-1-5. Occupation of Streets in Front of Abutting Property.
If the contractor first obtain the written consent and waiver of all
claims from damages against the city by the owners of the properties
abutting upon the side of any proposed building, and file same with the
Building Commissioner, together with a bond in the penal sum of Five
Thousand ($5,000.00) Dollars, conditioned upon holding the City of Fort
Worth harmless from any claims or costs incidental thereto, and if said
bond is approved by the Board of Councilmen and the City Attorney,
permission may be obtained to occupy the roadway and sidewalk beyond
the limits of such building under construction or reconstruction, and ex-
tending in front of thg property for which the consent of the owner or
lessee thereof has been secured upon the same terms and conditions 'as
those herein fixed for occupation of sidewalk and street in front of the
site upon which said construction or reconstruction is being carried on.
Paragraph 21-1-6. Earth or Rubbish not to Be Stored in Street.
Earth or other matter taken from the excavation, and rubbish taken
from the buildings shall not be stored either upon the sidewalks, road-
ways or streets, but shall be removed therefrom from day to day as
rapidly as produced. When dry rubbish, apt to produce dust, is being
handled, it shall be kept wetted down so as to prevent its being blown
about by the wind.
Paragraph 21-1-7. Occupation of Street Terminated.
Streets and sidewalks may be occupied for the purpose of building
only in connection with the actual erection, repair, alteration or removal
of buildings, and permission for such occupancy shall terminate with
436 DUlWING CODE
the completion of such operations. It shall be unlawful to occupy any s
sidewalk or street after the completion of the operation for which a
permit has been issued by the Building Commissioner. It shall also be
unlawful to occupy a sidewalk or street under authority of such permit
for the storage of articles not intended for immediate use in connection
with the operation for which such permit has been issued.
All permits for the occupancy of streets and sidewalks shall be is-
sued by the Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 21-1-8. Toilets for Workmen.
At all times during the erection, reconstruction or removal of any
building, the contractor or builder shall provide toilets for the use of
the workmen. Where sewers are available, these toilets must be con-
nected to same, and shall at all times be kept in a sanitary condition.
Chapter 22.
BAYS, BALCONIES, PORCHES, CORNICES, SIDEWALKS,
VAULTS AND OTHER PROJECTIONS.
Section 22-1.
GENERAL CONDITIONS COVERING ISSUANCE OF PROJECTION
PERMITS.
Paragraph 22-1-1. In General.
Projections are a privilege and cannot be claimed as a right. These
regulations are intended to show the maximum projections that,will be
allowed and proposed projections may be restricted or refused if the
Building Commissioner considers such action best for the public interest.
Paragraph 22-1-2. Projections Below Grade.
Permits for projections below grade line must be accepted by the
applicant with the understanding and agreement that any or all of such
projections shall be removed upon notice by the Board of Councilmen of
the City of Fort Worth.
Section 22-2.
PROJECTIONS ABOVE SIDEWALK GRADE.
Paragraph 22-2-1. Projections Over Street.
No part of any building other than those parts mentioned in Chap-
ters 12 and 22, shall project over any street or public way more than
6 inches. However, no projection shall occur within 10 feet of the level
of the curb, except as otherwise provided in Chapter 12 and Chapter 24.
The projection of show windows beyond property line is prohibited.
Paragraph 22-2-2. Amount of Projection.
Cornices, balconies and bay windows may project a distance equal
to 1/20 of the width of the public way on which they occur, provided,
however, that in no case shall they at any point project more than 3 feet
beyond property line.
Window caps and sills, belts and other similar projections may
project Y4 of the distance allowed for a cornice on the wall on which
they occur.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 137
Rain water leaders and conductors shall not project more than seven
(7") niches.
Paragraph 22-2-3. Length and Distance Apart of Certain Projections.
No bay window or covered balcony projecting over a public way
shall be more than 15 feet long and no two such projections in any one
story shall be less than 5 feet apart.
Paragraph 22-2-4. Projection of Fire Escapes.
Fire escapes required or permitted by this Building Code, may
project as approved by the Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 22-2-5. Damage by Fire.
If any existing combustible cornice within Zone 1 is damaged by
fire to an extent exceeding 33%clo of itself, or become unsafe from any
cause, the whole cornice shall be removed and replaced by one con-
structed according to the requirements of this code.
Paragraph 22-2-6. Construction of Certain Cornices.
For construction and anchoring of masonry cornices, see Chapter
No. 14. Wherever metal cornices are used, they may be sheathed on top
with wood covered with metal, but shall be supported on metal look-
outs built into the wall. These lookouts shall be of such size and spacing
as may be necessary to properly support the loads imposed upon them,
but in no event shall be less than 3/16 inch by 11/4 inches. If a cornice
extends above the roof line, the parapet wall shall be carried up its full
thickness to the top of the cornice.
Paragraph 22-2-7. Piazzas and Balconies.
No wooden piazza or balcony more than 8 feet wide or extending
more than 3 feet above the second floor shall be erected on any building
required by this code to be second-class construction, unless the posts,
main supports of joists and railings are built of incombustible ma-
terials, and the cornices and belt courses built of or covered with in-
combustible materials.
Paragraph 22-2-8. Alley Bridges.
Alley bridges may be permitted upon special approval of the Build-
ing Commissioner. In all cases they shall be at least 12 feet in the clear
above the roadwav, limited in width to the width of the door of the
building opening thereon, and constructed throughout with incombustible
materials.
Section 22-3.
PROJECTIONS BELOW SIDEWALK GRADE.
Paragraph 22-3-1. Vaults.
The size and extent of vaults extending beneath sidewalk, street or
alley, will be a matter of special determination in each case, as also will
be the number and size of all openings into such vaults.
All permits issued for the occupancv of public space by vaults are
subject to revocation by the board of Councilmen of the City of Fort
Worth, at any time when the space occupied is needed for public use
or improvement, notwithstanding payment of rent in case such may be
required by the Board of Councilmen.
Vaults may be allowed to proiect beyond the building line in alleys,
but in no case shall the outside of the wall of same be nearer than 2%
feet to the center of the alley.
138 BUILDING CODE .
The application for a vault in public space must be accompanied by
a written agreement, upon official blank furnished for the purpose,
signed by the owner of the abutting property, contracting to release and
relinquish the vault space and to remove, free of expense to the City of
Fort Worth, all structural parts of the vault when so ordered by the
Board of Councilmen. Also plans must be submitted showing the loca-
tion and dimensions of vault, the depth and proposed construction, to-
gether with the proposed location and size of all openings into same.
Vaults shall not be used for public entrances to basements nor for
the housing of boilers.
In new buildings in the business district, in which it is proposed to
install fuel oil apparatus the necessary storage tanks, etc., shall be pro-
vided for within the walls of the structure; the tanks must be placed at
least three feet below the floor of the lowest story and all footings
adjacent to such tanks shall be carried to such levels as may be directed
by the Building Commissioner. Filling pipes may be carried to the curb
and placed in cast iron boxes with proper covers.
In existing buildings where it is proposed to install fuel oil ap-
paratus,the location of said apparatus and tanks necessary to same shall
be a matter of special determination, and shall meet with the require-
ments of the Building Commissioner.
Vaults must be roofed over within a reasonable time or within the
time fixed by the Building Commissioner. Whenever the grade is
changed, the vault must be changed and repaved, at the expense of the
owner of the abutting property, to comply with the new grade.
Vaults shall not be constructed so as to interfere with sewers, water
pipes, manholes, gas pipes, lamp posts, trees, or other public work or
improvement, nor with any electric conduit carrying fire alarm or po-
lice alarm wires.
Owners of abutting property shall notify the public utility companies
concerned where the removal or relocation of any underground con-
struction is made necessary by the construction of a vault.
Chapter 23.
LATHING AND PLASTERING.
Section 23-1.
LATHING.
Paragraph 23-1-1. Metal Lath.
All metal lath shall weigh not less than 2.2 pounds per square yard
and shall be not less than 27 gauge.
Where metal lath is used for ceiling and partitions on wood fram-
ing, joists or studs shall be spaced not more than 16 inches on centers.
The lath shall be lapped at least 1 inch and shall be nailed at all outer
edges and to each joist or stud not over 6 inches on centers with 5d box
nails.
Paragraph 23-1-2. Wood Lath.
All wood lath shall be of good quality and in no case shall it run
through from room to room, not shall it be placed vertically.
Joists and studs on which wood lath is applied, shall not be more
than 16 inches on centers, and each lath shall be nailed to each joist or
stud with no less than 3d "Extra Fine Nails."
CITY QF F'OftT W01MI
Paragraph 23-1-3. Channel Iron and Metal Lath Partitions.
All studding for channel iron and metal lath partitions or walf fur-
ring shall be made from steel stock weighing not less than .276 pounds
per lineal foot, and shall be spaced not over 16 inches on centers; same
shall be securely fastened to the floor and ceiling constructions. Metal
lath shall be securely wired to each stud at least every 6 inches.
Paragraph 23-1-4. Hot Air Pipes.
Metal lath shall be used to cover that portion of all wood parti-
tions in which hot air pipes are located.
Paragraph 23-1-5. Suspended Ceilings.
Where suspended ceilings occur, they shall be supported by metal
furring and hangers or clamps attached to the floor or roof construc-
tion in an approved manner; said support shall be of such section and
weight and so arranged as to support the wet plaster with a deflection
of not more than 1/30 inch per foot of span.
In cases where piping and other mechanical apparatus is placed
above a suspended ceiling, same must be supported independently of the
ceiling strpports, and in all cases where work will probably be necessary
on such apparatus after the ceiling has been erected, the construction of
said ceiling shall be such as to safely withstand the additional loads to
be imposed by such operations.
•
Section 23-2.
PLASTERING.
Paragraph 23-2-1. Plastering on Concrete.
In plastering on concrete, just enough brown coat shall be put on
to straighten up walls or ceilings, and then the finish coat shall be
applied.
Paragraph 23-2-2. Gypsum Plaster.
Plaster, the body of which is made of gypsum, shall not be used in
public lavatories, toilet rooms, or in enclosing walls for public shower
baths.
Paragraph 23-2-3. Back Plastering.
When wood wainscoting is used in any plastered building, the sur-
face of the wall or partition behind such wainscoting shall be plastered
down to the floor line, unless said wainscoting is placed against a brick,
stone, or tile wall or partition.
Paragraph 23-2-4. Key for Plastering.
All ceilings, stud partitions and furred walls, when .plastered with
lime mortar on wood lath, must have not less than %-inch key, leaving
space between ends of lath, and when patent plaster is used, they must
have not lbss than %-inch key.
Paragraph 23-2-5. Three-Coat Work (Lime Mortar).
Three coat work to have Ni-inch grounds or jambs and mortar shall
be mixed as follows:
The first or scratch coat to be mixed or tempered 1 part of thorough-
ly slaked lime to 2% parts of sand and 1% pounds of hair to each 100
square yards, same to be applied with sufficient pressure to insure a
good rive£or clinch on upper side of lath, and to be scratched thoroughly
14U BUILDING CODE
to make key to retain second coat. First coat to be thoroughly dry be- q
fore applying second coat.
Second coat or brown coat-for three-coat work to be mixed with 1
part of slaked lime to 4 parts of sharp sand with a little hair.
Lime mortar for brick or tile work to be mixed with 1 part lime
to 5 parts of sand.
Finish coat may be as desired, but must be made to adhere to the
brown coat.
Paragraph 23-2-6. Two-Coat Laid-Off Work (Lime Mortar).
In two-coat work the first coat shall be mixed and applied the same
as in three-coat work. Brown mortar or second coat shall be mixed or
tempered 1 part of lime to 6 parts of sand and finished as applied.
Grounds shall be % inch.
Paragraph 23-2-7. Finish Coat.
For white coating with lime mortar, lime shall be well slaked and
put through a fine screen or sieve, and mixed thoroughly before apply-
ing, using 2 parts of lime to 1h part of plaster of paris. Any other type
of finish coat may be used but must be made to adhere to the brown
coat.
Paragraph 23-2-5. Patent Plaster and Other Standard Cement Plaster.
For three-coat work, lath to be spaced not less than % inch apart,
joints to be broken every fifth lath,leaving space between ends of lath.
For first coat, plaster is to be mixed as follows: To each measure
of fibered plaster,add two measures of clean,sharp sand,mix thoroughly
and uniformly, and add sufficient water to temper to proper consistency.
Mortar shall be applied promptly with sufficient pressure to form a
good rivet or clinch on upper side of lath. First coat shall be thoroughly
scratched to make a key to retain second coat.
Second coat to be applied when first coat is two-thirds dry, and shall
be mixed as follows: To each measure or fibered cement plaster, add
two measures of clean, sharp sand, mix thoroughly and uniformly, and
add sufficient water to temper to a stiff mortar. Mortar to be applied
promptly with sufficient pressure and when half dry, apply finishing
coat.
Finish coat for smooth finish shall be unfibered cement plaster with
sufficient water added to temper to proper consistency, troweled down
with the least water possible and brushed with a perfectly dry brush.
For sand finish or other finishes, use any desired method but care
must be used to secure perfect adhesion of each coat to the coat below.
Paragraph 23-2-9. Two-Coat Work.
Grounds to be Yz inch. Lath to be spaced not less than % inch.
Joints to be broken every fifth lath, leaving space between ends of lath.
For first coat, to each measure of fibered cement plaster, add two
measures of clean, sharp sand, mix thoroughly and uniformly and add
sufficient water to temper to proper consistency. Apply mortar at once
if coat sufficient in thickness to make walls flush with grounds, and
finish as desired.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 141
Chapter 24.
AWNINGS, MARQUISE, ETC.
` Section 24-1.
AWNINGS.
Paragraph 24-1-1. Height of Awnings.
All fabric awnings to be erected and existing awnings in need of
repair, which have depreciated fifty per cent of their original value,
shall be properly supported without posts, by iron or other metallic
fastenings and supports. Every part of such awning shall be elevated
at least 7 feet at the lowest point thereof above the highest point of the
grade of sidewalk under same, and shall not project over the sidewalk
to exceed three-fourths of the width thereof.
Work on existing awnings as called for in this paragraph must be
done within thirty, days after notification of the necessity of same by
the Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 24-1-2. Existing Awnings.
Every part of every existing awning shall be elevated at least 7 feet
at the lowest point thereof, above the highest point of the grade of the
sidewalk underneath same within twelve (12) months after the passage
of this ordinance.
Section 24-2.
CANOPY OR MARQUISE.
Paragraph 24-2-1. Where Allowed a Height From Sidewalk.
Fixed awnings or marquise may be constructed over sidewalks as
a protection to the entrance of buildings, only when special permission
has been granted by the Building Commissioner, provided such awnings
are constructed of metal frame work covered with fireproof material or
wire glass not less than % inch thick, and supported entirely from the
structure of the building and without posts or other obstructions upon
the side walk. Such awnings shall be well anchored into and through
the wall.
The lowest part of such canopy shall be at least S feet above the
sidewalk under same and such awnings must be provided with gutters
and conductors.
Chapter. 25.
PUBLIC LAVATORIES.
Section 25-1.
FLOORS AND VENTILATION.
All public lavatories hereafter erected or reconstructed, shall have
all floors and base made either of tile, marble, cement, composition or
,r other impervious materials, and such lavatories shall be properly ven-
tilated.
142 BUILDING CODE
Chapter 26. 10
PIPE CHASES AND DUCTS.
Section 26-1.
CHASES AND DUCTS FOR PIPES.
Paragraph 26-1-1. Duct Enclosures.
In. all buildings of first and second-class construction, hereafter
constructed or, reconstructed, the;ducts for pipes, wires, cables and for
similar purposes,shall in all cases be separately enclosed on all sides
with,fireproof material not less than 2 inches in thickness.
Paragraph`26-1=a: Duct Area.
If the area of a duct exceeds four square feet in buildings of any
class, the enclosure of same shall meet with the requirements for shaft-
ways as called for in Chapter 7.
Paragraph 26-1-3. Duct Doors. •
All doors for openings in ducts to be constructed of fireproof•ma-
terial.
Paragraph 26-1-4. Pipes, Wires, etc., in Fireproofing Prohibited.
No pipes, wired, cables, or similar material of any kind shall be in-
eased or embedded in the fireproofing protection of columns or other
structural members.
Section 26-2.
CHASES AND RECESSES.
Paragraph 2672-1. Chases.
There shall be no chases in 8-inch walls or within the required area
of any pier, and no chase in any wall or pier shall be deeper than one=
third the wall thickness. No horizontal chase shall exceed 4 feet in
length, nor shall the horizontal projection of any diagonal chase exceed
4 feet.
Paragraph 26-2-2. Recesses.
Recesses for stairways or elevators may be left in walls, but in no
case shall the walls at such points be less than the required thickness
of walls of the fourth story above the ground floor unless reinforced by
additional piers, by steel or reinforced concrete girders, or by steel or
reinforced concrete columns and girders, securely anchored to the walls
on each side of such recesses.
Recesses for alcoves and similar purposes shall have not less than
8 inches of material at the back. Such recesses shall be not more than
8 feet in width and shall be arched over or spanned with lintels.
Paragraph 26-2-3. Aggregate Area.
The aggregate area of recesses and chases in any wall shall not
exceed one-fourth the whole area of the face of the wall in any story.
No chases or recesses shall be permitted in fire or fire division
walls that will reduce the thickness below the minimum specified in
this code.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 143
Chapter 27.
OUTSIDE STAIRS, AREAS, COAL HOLES,
SIDEWALKS, ETC.
Section 27-1.
OUTSIDE STAIRS.
On any building to be erected or reconstructed, it shall be unlaw-
ful to build any outside stairway where same shall project over lot line
except as herein provided for under "Fire Escapes."
Section 27-2.
OPEN AREAS.
The use of any part of the sidewalks or alleys in the city for open
areas, or areas with railing around same, is hereafter prohibited in con-
nection with any building to be erected or reconstructed. Every area
intended for ventilation shall be covered with a non-slip grating, satis-
factory to the Building Commissioner.
Section 27-3.
OPENINGS IN SIDEWALKS.
Paragraph 27-3-1. Construction and Covers.
The opening in any sidewalk for a coal or ash hole, or other purpose,
shall be covered with a substantial iron plate with a rough surface.
The location and construction of all coal hole and other openings
in sidewalks shall be subject to the direction and supervision of the
Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 27-3-2. Cellar Doors.
Where cellar doors occur in sidewalks, same shall be flush with the
sidewalk and designed heavy enough to prevent same from sagging
under a load of 300 pounds per square foot. They must also be provided
with automatic guard when open.
Section 27-4.
REINFORCED CONCRETE SIDEWALKS.
Paragraph 27-4-1. Construction and Permit.
A special permit shall be obtained for all reinforced concrete side-
walks hereafter built in the City of Fort Worth. All such sidewalks
shall be designed to carry a superimposed live load of at least 300 pounds
+c per square foot.
The surface finish of these walks shall conform to city specifications
for such work, but the structural slabs, beams, etc., shall come under the
S supervision of the Building Commissioner, and shall conform to engineer-
ing requirements as provided in this code for "Reinforced Concrete."
144 BUILDING CODE
Chapter 28.
RECONSTRUCTION AND ALTERATION OF BUILDINGS.
Section 28-1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
Paragraph 28-1-1. Examination of Building Before Permit Is Issued.
The Building Commissioner shall examine all buildings and struc-
tures on which application for approval of plans has been made for
the reconstruction of such building or structure, to determine whether
or not such permit may be granted under this ordinance. The Build-
ing Commissioner shall examine said building or structure for the pur-
pose of determining the strength and condition of various structural
parts as they will be affected by the purpose for which the building
will be used and the load same will have to carry when reconstructed.
No exterior or interior brick walls shall be built upon unless they
conform to the requirements of the Code for Masonry Construction
for the purpose for which they are to be used. In reconstructing
existing buildings, where the classification of occupancy has been
changed, they shall conform in every detail to the regulations for new
structures, and shall be classified according to their location and the
purpose for which they are to be used.
Section 28-2.
ALTERATION OF FRAME BUILDINGS.
Paragraph 28-2-1. Height Limited.
No existing frame building shall be raised to a height exceeding
thirty-five (35) feet; buildings so raised shall comply with all of the
requirements of this code relating to frame buildings.
Paragraph 28-2-2. Extensions or Additions in Fire Limits Forbidden.
No frame building, within Zones 1 or 2 shall be increased in area
by frame additions.
Paragraph 28-2-3. Change of Use Forbidden by Fire Limits.
Within Zones 1 and 2 no frame building more than one-story in
height shall be altered to be used as a factory, warehouse, stable or
garage.
Paragraph 28-2-4. Frame Buildings Converted Into Stores.
Any frame building in Zones 1 and 2 which may hereafter have the
first story converted into a store, shall have the walls, partitions and
ceiling of such first story covered with metal lath or fiber plaster board
and plastered to a total thickness of at least si'a inch; or the plaster
board may be covered with sheet metal. Fire stops shall also be pro-
vided with sheet metal. Fire stops shall also be provided at the line of
the ceiling to cut off all connection to stories above through hollow
stud partitions or side walls,
1
CITY w FORT WORTH 145
r
Section 28-3.
ALTERATIONS OR REPAIRS OTHER THAN FRAME
CONSTRUCTION.
s Paragraph 28-3-1. Incombustible Walls for Buildings to Be Enlarged
or Built Upon in Fire Limits.
No building other than frame construction within Zone 1 or Zone 2
shall be enlarged or built upon unless the building after the addition
is made meets all of the requirements of this code the 'same as if the
building were totally constructed after the passage of this ordinance..
Chapter 29.
UNSAFE BUILDINGS.
Section 29-1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
Paragraph 29-1-1. Inspection of Unsafe Buildings.
When notified or when the Building Commissioner has reason to
believe that a building is unsafe and in a dangerous condition, due to
fire, or due to bad condition of walls, overloaded floors, defective con-
struction, or other causes, he shall have the authority to and shall enter
the said building and determine to his satisfaction whether or not the
building is unsafe.
Paragraph 29-1-2. Report and Procedure.
If a building upon inspection is found to be unsafe, the Building
Commissioner shall notify the owners in writing to this effect, and
shall order them to strengthen the weakened parts as may be neces-
sary to make the building safe for the purpose for which it is used.
The owner shall take immediate steps to comply with the requirements
of such order. Where the public safety requires immediate action the
Building Commissioner may enter the premises with such assistance as
may be necessary and cause such structure to be made secure or taken
down without delay at the expense of owner or party interested. The
Building Commissioner is hereby given full power to order the Fire and
Police Departments to assist in such work.
Paragraph 29-1-3. Floor Loadings.
The Building Commissioner shall also regulate floor loadings in
these buildings and in all buildings used for storage of merchandise,
etc., and the owner shall post a sign furnished by the Building Com-
missioner in various conspicuous parts of the building which shall read
as follows:
.This floor shall not be loaded to more than
.....:....pounds per square foot. Load shall
be distributed evenly.
By Order of Building Commissioner."
Paragraph 29-1-4. Reconstruction of Building Damaged by Fire.
When any building is hereafter damaged by fire or other causes
to an extent exceeding 50% of the amount required to erect a similar
new building on the identical site, the same must be removed within
six months, repaired or rebuilt. If such damaged building is repaired
146 BUILDING CODE
or rebuilt, the requirements of this Building Code shall be conformed
to in every particular, precisely as would be required for new buildings.
Paragraph 29-1-5. Unsafe Buildings Outside of Fire Limits.
A dwelling or structure within the city limits, or any part thereof
which is unfit for human habitation, or dangerous to life or health by -
reason of want of repair, or defects in drainage, plumbing or ventila-
tion, or of the construction of same, and has depreciated seventy (70%)
per cent of its original value, is hereby declared a nuisance,and shall
be condemned. Before condemnation notice is served, the Building Com-
missioner shall receive a written notice from the Board of Health aud..
Fire Chief, stating fully the condition of the structure insofar as their
departments are concerned.
Paragraph 29-1-6. Legal Procedure.
In the case of building which in the opinion of the Building Com-
missioner should be condemned, the Building Commissioner, together
with a committee of three appointed by the Board of Councilmen, shall
make a thorough investigation of said }buildings and report their find-
ings to the Board of Councilmen. If condemnation is approved by this
committee, the Board of Councilmen shall authorize the Building Com-
missioner to prepare and serve the necessary papers on the owner of
said building, commanding him to appear before the Board of Council-
men at a time named, and show cause why said building or structure
shall not be declared a nuisance. Upon the hearing thereof, if the Board
of Councilmen finds that said building or structure is dangerous, due to
various reasons, it shall declare the same a nuisance and order it to be
abated within such time as may be fixed. Upon such order being
made by the Board of Councilman, the Building Commissioner shall
immediately serve notice of same on the property owners.
Paragraph 29-1-7., Wrecking by Fire Chief.
If there is no dispute to a notice by the Building Commissioner to
demolish a certain building or buildings, or if.in case of dispute the
Board of Councilmen decides in favor of the Building Commissioner,
and the owner does not remove said building within the time limit
set in final notice, the fire chief shall carry out the demolition. All
costs shall be assessed against the property. All wreckage shall be
cleared away from the site, and same conditions shall prevail as under
the Wrecking of Buildings, Chapter 31.
Chapter 30.
REMOVAL OF BUILDINGS.
Section 30-1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
Paragraph 30-1-1. Permit and Fee.
No person or persons shall hereafter move any building within the
limits of the;City of Fort Worth, where the same shall be moved in,
through or upon the streets, alleys, avenues, or public grounds, unless ,.
said person shall; before moving said house or building, secure a permit
to do so from the Building Commissioner.
The owner shall pay for said permit the sum of $5.0*for Each and
every'day',or,fraction thereof that the house or building is in_-.or on
the street,-alleys,.avenues:.or public grounds..
CrrX,.or,Four WoltTH 147
Paragraph 30-1-2. Bond and Consent.
r Before said permit is granted by the Building Commissioner, the
party applying therefor shall give a bond in the sum of One Thousand
($1,000.00) Dollars witli good and sufficient sureties to be approved by
the Board of Councilmen and City Attorney, conditioning among other
things that said party will save, indemnify and keep harmless the City
of Fort Worth against all liabilities, judgments, costs and expenses
which may in any way accrue against said city in consequence of the
granting of the said permit, and upon the expiration of the time named
in the permit, or sooner if the use of the streets, alleys, avenues or
public grounds is no longer necessary, he shall clear same of all obstruc-
tion.
Further, the Building Commissioner may refuse to issue a removal
permit in a case where such work will necessitate the removal or cut-
ting of any wires belonging to a public utility company, or to the city,
until such time as the party making application for such permit shall
have made satisfactory arrangements with the party or parties owning
or controlling such wires, either by written agreement or by depositing
with said company a sufficient amount of money to cover the cost of
such work, that is, cutting and replacing the wires so moved or cut,
to the satisfaction of the parties owning or controlling same.
Paragraph 30-1-3. Permit Must State Conditions of Removal.
A permit issued by the Building Commissioner to a house mover
Y shall state specifically all the conditions to be complied with in moving,
shall designate the route to be taken and limit the time for removal and
in no case shall paved streets, alleys, avenues or public grounds be used
for that purpose unless same are on the route designated by the Build-
ing Commissioner.
The removal of a building under a permit, when commenced, shall
be continuous during all the hours of the day, and day by day, and at
night if required by the Building Commissioner, until completed, and
shall be carried on with the least possible obstruction to the thorough-
fares occupied. No building shall be allowed to remain over night upon
any street crossing or intersection, or in such position as to prevent
easy access to any fire hydrant. Lighted lanterns shall be kept in a
conspicuous, place at each end of said building during the night.
Paragraph 30-1-4. Moving of Frame Buildings in Fire Limits.
No person or persons shall move any frame building from one place
to another within Zones 1 and 2 of this city; neither shall they move
a frame building into either Zone 1 or Zone 2.
Paragraph 30-1-5. Removal When Dangerous.
If the Building Commissioner deems it unsafe or dangerous, to
the public to move any certain structure or building over public roads
or grounds, on account of the condition of said building or structure,
no permit shall be issued for said moving.
Paragraph 30-1-6. Report to Building Commissioner and Fire Depart-
ment.
Every person or persons receiving a permit from the Building
Commissioner to move a building shall, within one day after said build-
ing reaches its destination, report that fact to the Building Commis-
sioner, who shall thereupon inspect the streets, alleys, avenues or public
grounds over which said building has been moved and ascertain the con-
dition thereof. If the removal of said building has caused any damage
to the streets, alleys, avenues, or public grounds, the said house mover
148 BUILDING CODE
shall forthwith place the same in as good repair as they were in before
the permit was granted. Upon his failure to do so within ten (10) days '
thereafter, to the satisfaction of the Building Commissioner, said com-
missioner shall repair the damage done to the streets, alleys, avenues
or public grounds and hold Oe sureties of the bonds given by said house
mover responsible for the payment of same.
Every house mover shall report to the Fire Chief or his assistants
at Central Fire Stations each night, the exact location where the build-
ing is to stand on the streets for the night. Failure to report this shall
be considered a misdemeanor and shall lay the responsible parties liable
to fine.
All house movers shall proceed in a careful manner with the re-
moval of a building over a public street, alley, avenue or public grounds,
and shall not in any manner injure or destroy trees, grass plots, curbing,
or sidewalks, nor in any manner interfere with the private property of
individuals. The Building Commissioner shall have the power to re-
voke any permit whenever in his judgment any house mover is proceed-
ing in a reckless and careless manner in the removal of a building.
Chapter 31.
WRECKING OF BUILDINGS.
Section 31-1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
Paragraph 31-1-1. Permits and Fees.
A Special Permit shall be required for the wrecking of all build-
ings. The fee for same shall be $3.00 for each 2500 square foot of floor
area or fraction thereof in said building or portion of building to be
wrecked.
Paragraph 31-1-2. Method of Procedure.
No wrecked material shall be placed 'upon the floor of any such
buildings in the course of demolition which will cause overloading of
said floors, but the bricks, timbers and other structural parts of each
story shall be lowered to the ground immediately upon displacement.
Paragraph 31-1-3. Rights to Stop Wrecking.
The Building Commissioner shall have the right to stop the wreck-
ing or tearing down of any building or structure within the city when
the same is being done in a reckless or careless manner, or in violation
of any ordinance, or in such a manner as to endanger life or property,
and to order any and all persons engaged in said work to stop and desist
therefrom. When such work has been stopped by the order of the
Building Commissioner, it shall not be resumed until said commissioner
is satisfied that adequate precautions have been or will be taken for
the protection of life and property, and that said work will be proceeded
with carefully and in conformity with the ordinances of the city.
i
y
QiTY of FORT WORTii 149
Chapter 32.
SPECIAL STRUCTURES.
Section 32-1.
THEATRES, EXISTING AND NEW.
PART 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
Paragraph 32-1-1. Definition.
The term "theatre" shall apply to any building designed or used
for the entertaining of spectators, and having a permanent stage upon
which movable scenery and theatrical apparatus is employed and having
the space over stage extended to a height of 5 feet or more above the
top of proscenium arch. It shall include theatres, opera houses, music
halls, play houses, pavilions, vaudeville shows and assembly halls which
conform to this definition; provided, however, that club halls and other
halls although occasionally used for theatrical presentations, shall not
be considered as theatres within the meaning of the term as used in
this section, notwithstanding the fact that movable scenery is used
upon the stages thereof on such occasions. Such halls shall be regarded
as Public Assembly Halls.
' Paragraph 32-1-2. Exits.
.(a) Existing theatres and new theatres shall be provided with at
least one direct exit from the main or parquet floor for each 150 seats
or fraction thereof, exclusive of the stage, and with at least one direct
exit from all floors above the main or parquet floor for each 100 seats
or fraction thereof, located and placed on any such floor; provided that
there shall be at least three exits from each other floor. All exits shall
be kept unlocked during every performance. Admissions to all opera
houses, theatres or public halls shall be limited to the permanent seating
capacity thereof.
(b) There shall be sufficient exits to give 5 feet of opening for
each 130 seating capacity.
(c) All doors of exits of theatres now or hereafter erected shall
open outward, and fastenings must be such as to readily yield to pres-
sure from within at all times without the use of a key or similar instru-
ment.
Paragraph 32-1-3. Aisles and Seats.
All aisles shall be not less than 36 inches in width, and the Beat-
ings of such houses shall be so arranged that there shall be no seat at
a greater distance than 8 seats from any such aisle, and rows of seats
shall not be less than 2 feet 8 inches from back to back, in new theatres,
and not less than 2% feet in existing theatres.
Paragraph 32-1-4. Exit Signs.
Each and every exit which can be used in case of fire shall be des-
ignated by the word "EXIT" in plain letters, not less than 6 inches in
height and so situated immediately over-or on exit that they can be
readily seen from any or all parts of the auditorium,.balcony or gallery.
Paragraph 32-1-5. Red Lights.
A red light shall be placed over each of said exits and kept burning
during the time of the performance, and no other fixed red light will
be permitted in the auditorium, balcony or gallery and the fact that
i
150 BUILDING CODE
such red light indicates an exit to be used in case of fire shall be con-
spicuously printed on the programs used in the theatre. These lights
shall be on a separate lighting system from that of the building.
Paragraph 32-1-6. Lighting.
The stage section and every portion of the building devoted to the
uses or accommodation of the public, also all passages leading to streets,
including the open courts and corridors shall be. satisfactorily lighted
during every performance and until the entire audience has left the
premises.
Paragraph 32-1-7. Smoking.
There shall be no smoking permitted in any theatre after the doors
are thrown open for any performance until the conclusion of such per-
formance, and exit of all persons from the auditorium, provided that
smoking may be permitted anywhere in fireproof theatres or in rooms
specially set aside for the purpose in non-fireproof theatres, and pro-
vided further that in non-fireproof theatres any such room so set aside
if located either on, under,or above the stairs, then such room must be
fireproof.
Nothing herein contained shall prohibit casual smoking incidental
to the proper rendition of any performance and exclusively required
thereby.
Paragraph 32-1-8. Standpipes.
Standpipes confirming to the requirements of Chapter 34 shall be
provided with hose connections located as follows:
One on each side of the stage on.each tier.
One readily accessible from the property room, the carpenter shop,
scenery storage rooms, lobbies and elsewhere as may be required by the
Building Commissioner.
A sufficient quantity of approved linen hose and one and one-half
inches in diameter in 50-foot lengths, or enough to cover floor area,
shall be kept attached to each hose connection; 25-foot lengths will be
permitted in fly galleries.
Each standpipe shall be equipped with a pet cock to enable firemen
to make a test of water supply; said pet cock shall be located by Build-
ing Commissioner.
Paragraph 32-1-9. Automatic Sprinkler Equipment.
A standard wet pipe system of approved automatic sprinklers shall
be installed throughout the theatre, except in the auditorium, foyers
and lobbies. Sprinklers will not be permitted over dynamos and switch-
boards or above the fusible links immediately under the automatic
ventilators over stage,
• 1. There shall be at least two independent water supplies to the
automatic sprinklers.
Paragraph 32-1-10. Fire Equipment Necessary.
There shall be on each side. of the stage, axes and hooks as desig-
hated by the fire department.
Paragraph 32-1-11. Duties of Fire Department.
All apparatus for,the extinguishment of fire shall be installed in
accordance with the rules of the fire department and be kept at all times
in condition satisfactory to and under control of the fire department.
It shall be the duty of the fire chief to thoroughly instruct the em-
ployes of such theatre or opera houses in the handling and use of such
CITY OF FORS' WORTH 151
+ fire equipment. A fire alarm box shall be maintained on the stage of
such opera houses, which fire alarm box shall be located by the fire
chief.
Paragraph 32-1-12. Number of Persons Can Be Limited.
` In all cases, under the provisions of this section,whenever the Build-
ing Commissioner may deem it necessary for the safety of the public
to limit the number of persons that shall be permitted to occupy the in-
terior of any building as aforesaid, and if the owner, lessee or manager
neglects or refuses to comply with any order or requirement in relation
thereto, the Mayor of the City of Fort Worth is hereby authorized to
take possession of and close said building or perform such other acts
in the premises as shall prevent the liability of accidents to the public
and retain said possession until the Building Commissioner shall permit
said building to be released from said possession or closing by the Mayor
upon the compliance with the order and requirements. _
Paragraph 32-1-13. Inspectors May Enter.
The Building Commissioner or his representatives shall have power
and is hereby authorized to enter any theatre or other place of amuse-
ment within the limits of the city at anytime, without hindrance from
any one, for the purpose of examinations.and the enforcement of the
provisions of this ordinance.
s Paragraph 32-1-14. Proscenium Walls.
All existing theatres that do not have a fire protected proscenium
wall and necessary ventilation over stage, as set forth in these regula-
tions, shall be changed within a reasonable length of time to comply
with these regulations upon receipt of written notice from the Build-
ing Commissioner. In case of refusal to do so, the theatre shall be
closed until such time as the required work is completed. Said
proscenium walls shall be kept in good repair and shall be inspected
from time to time, and any repairs ordered by the Building Commis-
sioner shall be promptly completed.
PART 2. NEW THEATRES.
Paragraph 32-1.15. Construction.
All buildings defined in this chapter hereafter erected or altered
shall be of construction as specified in Chapter 5.
'Paragraph 32-1-16. Approval.
No such building hereafter erected or altered, for the aforesaid pur-
pose, shall be open to the public until the same has been inspected and
approved by the Building Commissioner, and a certificate of approval
issued thereof, and the Mayor of the City of Fort Worth shall have the
power, with the aid of the police, to take possession of and close said
building or any part thereof, until the Building Commissioner shall
issue such certificate, provided that such inspection must be made within
48 hours after having received written notice from the owner or lessee
that the building is ready for inspection.
Paragraph 32-1-17. Frontage.
Every theatre hereafter erected or any building remodeled for the
aforesaid purpose, shall have all entrances for patrons front upon a
public thoroughfare, with all emergency exits, not directly related to
the main entrance to face directly upon a public thoroughfare or upon
courts leading to same.
152 BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 32-1-18. Fireproof Building Over Auditorium.
f
Nothing herein contained shall prevent the construction of a
-thoroughly fireproof building above a fireproof theatre, providing no
part of such fireproof building shall be placed above that portion of
any such building which is known as the stage section. The portion
containing the theatre, including all passages, lobbies and other ac-
cessories connecting therewith, shall be cut off vertically from such fire-
proof building by unpierced fire walls of solid masonry not less than
12 inches thick and horizontally by unpierced fireproof floors.
Paragraph 32-1-19. Aisles and Exits.
Aisles shall be not less than 3 feet wide at the beginning and all
aisles shall be increased in width toward the exits 3 inches for every
10 feet. For exits and aisles, see Pargaraph 32-1-3 and 32-1-4.
Paragraph 32-1-20. Steps in Aisles in Galleries.
Steps in aisles shall be the full width of the aisles. No risers shall
be.more than 9 inches in height and no tread shall be less than 10 inches
in width, and whenever the rise of seat platforms is 4 inches or less,
the floor of the aisles shall be-made a gradient. Where steps are placed
in passages, they shall be grouped together and shall be clearly lighted.
No stool, seat or other obstruction shall be placed in any aisle.
Paragraph 32-1-21. Additional Exits When Over 1,000 Capacity.
When the seating capacity exceeds 1,000, the Building Commissioner
may require additional emergency exits above those required heretofore,
in which case the same may face upon an open court not less than 8 feet
in width, leading directly to some public thoroughfare without obstruc-
tion.
Paragraph 32-1-22. Exits From Stage Section.
At least two independent interior exits with direct outlets at court
or street grade, shall be provided from the stage level, for the service
of the stage and floors below. These exits shall be at opposite sides of
the stage and may serve also as entrances. Each tier of dressing rooms
shall have an independent emergency exit leading directly to an open
air stairway or to ,a court or street. No ladder fire escapes shall be
permitted. The fly galleries shall be provided with adequate means of
exit. All exits from the stage section shall be independent of the exits
for the audience above the court or street grade. Stairways, if any,
leading down from the stage level shall be enclosed and protected by
fireproof doors.
Paragraph 32-1-23. Capacity of Lobbies, Corridors, etc.
Preceding each division of the theatre, there 'shall be foyers, lobbies,
corridors or passages, the aggregate capacity of which, on each floor or
gallery, shall be sufficient to contain the whole number to be accommo-
dated on such floor or gallery, in the ratio of one square foot of floor
area for each person.
Paragraph 32-1-24. Passages.
The width of passages and hallways shall be computed in the same
manner as that hereinafter specified for stairways, but no passage may
be less than 5 feet in width.
All passages, hallways and stairways leading from any balcony or
gallery in any direction, shall permit of free passage to an exit without
returning.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 153
PART 3. AUDITORIUMS.
Paragraph 32-1-25. Floor Levels.
The floor level of the auditorium or the first story thereof and
where such floors are banked, the lowest bank of same shall not be above
• the sidewalk level.
The level of corridor at street entrance of same shall not be more
than 6 inches above the level of the sidewalk at such entrance.
To overcome any differences of level in and between corridors,
courts, lobbies, passages, auditoriums and aisles on the ground floor,
gradients shall be employed of not over 1 foot in 10 feet, with no
perpendicular risers.
Paragraph 32-1-26. Steps at Exits.
In the auditorium there shall be no steps within 4 feet of the front
of an exit or entrance doorway,nor within 1 foot of the side thereof.
Paragraph 32-1-27. Fire Doors and Windows.
All window frames in walls of auditorium, balcony or gallery, stage
r or dressing rooms must be of metal or of wood covered with metal, or
of such other incombustible material that may be approved by the
Building Commissioner.
All glass if used, must be of standard wire glass.
PART 4. PROSCENIUM WALL AND OPENING.
Paragraph 32-1-28. Thickness of Walls.
The stage shall be separated from the auditorium by a brick wall
not less than 12 inches thick or its equivalent the entire width of the
building and topped off at least 4 feet above the highest roof adjoining
said fire wall.
Paragraph 32-1-29. Openings.
There shall be no openings in this wall, except the curtain or
proscenium opening, and not more than four others which are to
be located at or below the stage level. These latter openings shall
not exceed 21 square feet each, with self-closing fireproof doors.
Paragraph 32-1-30. Lintel Over Openings.
The wall over the curtain or proscenium opening shall be car-
ried by a fireproofed steel or reinforced concrete girder.
Paragraph 32-1-31. Frame of Opening.
The frame around the curtain or proscenium opening shall be
formed entirely of fireproof material. If metal is used, the metal shall
be filled in solid with incombustible material. and securely anchored to
the wall with iron.
PART 5. CURTAIN.
Paragraph 32-1-32. Proscenium Curtain—Fireproof.
The proscenium opening shall be provided with a rigid fireproof
curtain, built in conformity with the following specifications or their
equivalent in efficiency when- approved by the Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 32-1-33. Material of Curtain.
The curtain shall have a rigid, rivet jointed, steel frame work.
The front or audience side of the frame shall be covered with sheet
steel of a thickness not less than No. 16 U. S. gauge. The back shall
154 BUILDING )ODE
be covered with vitrified cellular asbestos boards at least 1 inch thick,
or other material equally fire-resisting. Both coverings shall be se-
curely attached to the frame work and the joints properly sealed. The
curtain shall be designed to resist a wind pressure of 10 pounds per
square foot of surface without flexture sufficient to interfere with
its closing.
Paragraph 32-1-34. Thickness of Curtain
The thickness of the curtain shall be not less than 3 inches where
the width of the proscenium wall opening is 30 feet or lest; curtains
for larger openings shall increase in thickness in proportion to the
increase in width of opening they cover.
Paragraph 32-1-35. Asbestos Smoke Roll.
An asbestos roll of a diameter not less than % the. thickness of
the curtain shall be securely attached to the bottom of the curtain to
form a smoke seal between the curtain and the stage floor.
Paragraph 32-1-36. Overlap.
The curtain shall overlap the proscenium wall opening at least 12
inches at each side of the opening and not less than 2 feet at the top. s
Paragraph 32-1-37. Guide Members.
The guide members at the sides shall be rolled steel shapes, none
of which shall be less than % inch thick, and shall be of such charac-
ter as to form a continuous smoke seal from top to bottom with a
clearance of not over % inch. The guides shall be installed in such
manner that in case of fire on the stage, the pressure of heated gasses
against the curtain will act to close the guide joints tightly. Pro-
visions shall be made to prevent the curtain from getting out of the
guiding channel into which it shall project at least 2 inches.
The proscenium wall shall have an offset at each side of the
opening so located and of such thickness and height as to be suitable
for the attachment of the curtain guides. At least 1 inch shall be
allowed at each edge of curtain to provide for lateral expansion.
Opportunity for expansion of the unprotected structural frame
work of the curtain and guides shall be furnished by slotting the holes
of the connecting bolts.
Paragraph 32-1-38. Wall Over Proscenium and Smoke Seal.
The wall over the proscenium opening shall be smooth and plumb
to approximately the top of the curtain when it is down, and shall then
offset at least 4 inches for the rest of its height, thus leaving a bench
along the line of the top of the curtain between which a smoke seal
shall be formed. Such seal may conveniently be provided by arrang-
ing for the edge of a rolled steel shape attached to the curtain to dip
into a trough of sand resting on the bench.
Paragraph 32-1-39. No Combustible Supports.
No parts of a curtain or any of the curtain guides shall be sup-
ported by or fastened to any combustible material.
Paragraph 32-1-40. Hoisting Apparatus.
The hoisting apparatus for the curtain shall be designed with a
factor of safety of 8.
Paragraph 32-1-41. Points of Suspension.
The points for curtain suspension shall always be an even number,
but never less than 4. Two of the suspension points shall be located
CITY OF FORT WORTH 155
at the extreme ends of the curtain, and the others may be placed at
• such points as to best suit the design, but in no case shall the distance
between any two points of support exceed ten feet.
Paragraph 32-1-42. Operating Mechanism for Curtain.
• Half of the cables attached to these points shall lead to one set
of counterweights and half to another. The curtain shall be operated
by mechanism approved by the Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 32-1-43. Control of Curtain.
The device for controlling the curtain shall be simple in design and
capable of convenient operation from both sides of the stage and
from the fly galleries.
Paragraph 32-1-44. Speed and Emergency Device Curtain.
The drop speed of the curtain shall be uniform and not less than
1 foot per second, but when the curtain is about two and a half feet
from the stage, it shall automatically slow down so as to settle on
the stage without shock. In addition to the regular operating mechan-
ism, there shall be an emergency device which will cut off the power
r and allow the curtain to drop by gravity. This device shall be so ar-
ranged that it can be easily operated by hand from each side of the
stage, under the stage, and in the fly galleries. The device shall also
be so arranged that its operation will be controlled by fusible links
s
located at each of the above named points.
Paragraph 32-1-45. Decoration.
The audience side of the curtain may be decorated with a paint
in which no oil is used. No combustible material shall be applied or
attached to the curtain.
Paragraph 32-1-46. Drawings to Be Approved.
Drawings for every such curtain shall be submitted to the Build-
ing Commissioner, and be approved by him before it is erected.
Paragraph 32-1-47. Counter-Weights for Curtains.
Where counter-weights for curtains are used, they shall be sus-
pended at the extreme side or other walls of the stage section, and
enclosd by guards.
PART 6. STAGE SECTION.
Paragraph 32-1-48. Fireproof Stage Construction.
All that portion of the stage which is not movable shall be of
fireproof construction and designed to safely sustain a live load of
not less than 100 pounds per square foot, but may be covered through-
out with a finished wood floor not less than 1% inches thick.
Paragraph 32-1-49. Overhang of Stage.
All that portion of the stage extending from the stage inside of
the curtain and from the wall separating the space under the stage
from the auditorium, to the center edge of the apron shall be fireproof.
A wood finish floor without air space may be used on the stage in
front of the curtain.
Paragraph 32-1-50. Ventilators Over Stage.
There shall be one or more ventilators constructed of metal or
other incombustible material, near the center and above the highest
part of the stage of every theatre, raised above the stage roof, and of a
combined sectional area equal to at least 10010 of the floor area within
156 BUILDING CODE
the stage walls. The openings in such ventilators shall have an ag-
gregate sectional area equal at least to that required for the ventila-
tors. Detailed drawings showing the construction and operation of
the ventilators must be approved by the Building Commissioner before
installation is begun. The-entire equipment shall conform to the fol-
lowing requirements or their equivalent:
(a) Construction of Cover of Ventilators. The construction of
the cover and its operating mechanism shall be massive and the cover
shall open by force of gravity, sufficient to effectually overcome the
effects of neglect, of rust, dirt, frost, snow or expansion by heat or
warping of the frame work.
(b) Protection From Glass in Ventilators. Glass, if used in
ventilators, must be protected against falling onto the stage. A wire
screen if used under the glass, must be so placed that if clogged it
cannot reduce the required vent area or interfere with the operating
mechanism.
(c) Automatic Opening of Ventilator. The cover shall be ar-
ranged to open instantly after the outbreak of fire by the use of ap-
proved automatic fusible links of the thinnest metal practicable; man-
ual control also must be provided by a cord run down to the stage at
a point designated by the Building Commissioner.
(d) Link and Cord Control of Cover to Ventilator. The link and
cord must hold the cover closed against a force of at least 30 pounds
excess counter-weight tending to open the cover. Fusible links shall
be placed in the ventilator above the roof line and in at least two other
points in each controlling cord. No automatic sprinkler heads shall
be placed in the ventilator space above the fusible links. While theatre
is in use, each ventilator cover shall be operated daily by one of the
cords.
Paragraph 32-1-51. Dressing Rooms, Work Shops, Storage and. Prop-
erty Room.
Actors' dressing rooms, work shops, storage or general property
rooms shall not be placed in or under the auditorium. They shall- be
in a separate section provided for that purpose.
The partitions dividing the dressing rooms, together with the
partitions of every passageway from the same to the stage, shall be
constructed of approved fireproof material, not,less than 4 inches in
thickness. All doorways in any of said partitions shall be protected
by self-closing fire doors.
All dressing rooms shall be ventilated by fire windows to a street
or to a court not less than 24 feet square in area.
Paragraph 32-1-52. Shelving, etc.
All shelving and cupboards in every property room or other stage
rooms shall be of incombustible material.
Paragraph 32-1-53. Fly Galleries.
The entire fly galleries shall be constructed of iron or steel beams,
filled with fireproof materials and no wood boards or sleepers shall
be used as covering over beams; the floors shall be entirely fireproof
and shall be designed for 100 pounds live loads.
Paragraph 32-1-54. Rigging Loft.
The rigging loft shall be fire proof, except the floor cover of the
same.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 157
PART 7. STAIRWAYS.
s
Paragraph 32-1-55. Capacity.
The capacity of all stairways in theatres shall be figured the same
as the capacity of exits. See Paragraph 32-1-2.
Paragraph 32-1-56. Stair Landings.
When stairs turn at an angle or return directly on themselves,
a landing without steps, of the full width of both flights, shall be pro-
vided. The outer line of landings shall be curved to a radius of not
less than 2 feet; this provision, however, shall not apply to emergency
exit stairs on outside of buildings.
When two side stairways connect with one main stairway the width
of the main stairway shall be at least equal to the aggregate width
of the two side stairways. No stairway shall ascend to a greater height
than 12 feet without a level landing, and the length and width of such
landing shall be not less than the width of the stairs; no run of stairs
shall consist of less than 6 risers between platforms,
Paragraph 32-1-57. Stair Rails.
All stairways shall have on both sides strong hand rails. Where
stairways are built between waIIs, rails shall be firmly secured to the
walls about 3 inches distant therefrom. All rails shall be about 3 feet
above the treads. This provision shall also apply to all steps in side
i aisles of galleries. The width of all stairs shall be measured between
hand rails.
All stairways and landings between stories, when 7 feet and over
in width, shall be provided with a center hand rail of metal, not less than
2 inches in diameter, placed at a height of about 3 feet above the treads
and landings. Such rails shall be supported on metal standards securely
bolted to the treads or risers of the stairs. At the head of the stairways
at each story, a newel post shall be provided at least 6 feet.in height, to
which the rail shall be secured.
Paragraph 32-1-58. Entrance Stairways.
No entrance stairway to any tier in the auditorium shall be less than
5 feet wide.
Entrance stairways and passages for the dressing rooms shall be at
least 36 inches wide and extend independently to the street or court.. No
stairs in the stage section shall be less than 30 inches wide..
No door shall open immediately upon a flight of stairs, but a landing
at least the width of the door shall be provided between such stairs and
such door.
Paragraph 32-1-59. Stairway Enclosures.
All entrance stairways for the use of the audience (exceping those
leading to the first gallery only, which may be open on one side) shall
be enclosed with walls same as required in Paragraph 7-21 in the stories
through which they pass. There shall be Iio communication from any
portion of the building above the street or court grade to any of said stair-
way enclosures except from the tier for which the stairway is exclusively
intended. No stairway from a gallery shall communicate with the base-
ment or cellar.
Paragraph 32-1-60. Emergency Exit Stairways and Balconies.
Emergency exit stairways from each gallery shall be placed in smoke-
proof towers, or an approved form of open air stairway may be used.
The minimum width of emergency exit stairways shall be 4 feet, except
158 BUILDING CODE
that their width may be reduced 15% if located in a smoke-proof tower
having no openings except to an outside balcony and extending to court
grade. The stairways for the emergency exits from each tier shall ex-
tend to the court or street grade independently of the stairways or exits
from other tiers. Outside balconies shall be at least as wide as the stair-
ways which they serve,but'in no case less than 6 feet. No riser shall be
nearer than one foot to the door opening.
Paragraph 32-1-61. Construction of Balconies and Stairways for
Emergency Exits.
All emergency exit balconies and stairways shall be constructed of
steel or of other forms of incombustible constructions approved by the
Building Commissioner. Risers, treads, platforms and balconies must be
solid,without slats,and the construction shall be of strength sufficient to
sustain safely a live load of 100 pounds per square foot with a safety
factor of 4. Exterior stairways and balconies of steel construction shall
be designed in conformity with the requirements of Chapter 15.
Sheet metal or other suitable solid material shall be provided to a
height of not less than 4 feet on the outer side of all such open air
stairways,balconies and platforms,and they shall be covered with a metal =
hood or awning constructed in a manner approved by the Building Com-
missioner. There shall be no openings in any theater wall between the
outside balconies or stairways and their covers, except the required exits
from the tier served by said stairways and balconies. No person of the +
audience shall be obliged to pass alongside of more than one exit doorway
after reaching an outside balcony to get to the ground. All exit stairways
and balconies shall be kept free of obstructions of every kind, including
snow and ice.
Paragraph 32-1-62. Treads and Risers.
All stairs shall have treads of uniform width, and risers of uniform
height in each flight. The risers shall not exceed 7% inches in height
nor shall the treads exclusive of nosing, be less than 9% inches wide. No
circular stairs shall be permitted and no windows shall be introduced in
any stairs which may be used for exit purposes.
PART 8. GALLERY.
Paragraph 32-1-63. Gallery Seats.
No seat in any gallery shall,have more than 4 seats intervening be-
tween it and an aisle, or more than 10 seats in a row between any two
aisles.
Paragraph 32-1-64. Gallery Platforms.
No platforms in gallery formed to receive the seats shall be more
than 21 inches in height of riser, nor less than 32 inches in width of
platform. No such platform shall be nearer than 8 feet from the ceil-
ing.
Paragraph 32-1-65. Tunnels or Cross Aisles.
There shall be no more than 11 feet rise,measured vertically, in any
aisle in any gallery without direct exit by tunnel or otherwise to a
corridor or passage with a free opening to the gallery stairs or other
direct discharge to the street. At such elevation of 11 feet or less, an
intervening or cross-aisle leading directly to an exit may be substituted
for the tunnel. No such tunnel or cross-aisle shall be less than 4 feet
wide in the clear.
PART 9. HEATING PLANT.
Paragraph 32-1-66. Location.
Heating plants shall be located outside of the building, or in an
f extension, but in no case under or within any portion of the building;
the space allotted to same shall be enclosed by walls of masonry on all
sides, and the ceiling of such space shall be constructed of fireproof ma-
terials. Each doorway in said wall connecting with the building shall
have automatic fire doors. No boiler or furnace used for heating or
other purposes shall be located within the enclosing walls of a theatre
nor under any passageway, court or stairway used as a means of egress.
Paragraph 32-1-67. Register Coils and Radiators.
No coil or radiator shall be placed in any aisle or passageway used
as an exit, but said coils and radiators shall be placed in recesses formed
in the wall or partition to receive the same.
Section 32-2.
MOVING PICTURE THEATRES—EXISTING AND NEW.
4 Paragraph 32-2-1. Definition.
The term "Moving Picture Theatre" in this ordinance means a
place of public assembly where celluloid or other combustible films are
employed in the projection of pictures or other representations before
an assemblage of people. The term shall apply to the place of assem-
bly and to all rooms, passages and other parts of the building connected
to or used in connection with such places.
Lodge rooms where moving picture machines are used in ritualistic
work shall not be classed as moving picture theatres, .but the moving
picture machine shall be operated in a booth and the films shall be
handled and stored as required by this ordinance.
The term "Moving Picture Machine" in thie ordinance shall apply
to any form of mechanism using celluloid or other combustible films
+ for the projection of pictures as above. Every motion picture theatre
having a seating capacity of 300 or more shall be subject to all the
provisions relating to theatres.
Paragraph 32-2-2. Certificate of Inspection.
Any person or persons, at the present time operating a moving
picture theatre or contemplating operating one in the future, shall be
required to obtain a Certificate of Inspection from the Building Com-
missioner. Said Certificate of Inspection will be issued only after mov-
ing picture theatre has complied with regulations.
Every Certificate of Inspection to moving picture shows and film
exchanges under the provisions'of this ordinance shall, while the same
is in force, be posted in a conspicuous place, at or near the principal
entrance of the premises for which it is issued, so that the same may
be easily seen and read by any person passing ih or out of such en-
trance.
Paragraph 32-2-3. Inspection of Moving Picture Theatres.
° All rooms or buildings which have heretofore been erected for use in
the operation of or which may hereafter be erected for or used in the
opration of moving picture machines, shall be inspected and approved
by the Building Commissioner before being used for this purpose.
1Qdi Bt�aivixQ(3ttl�
Paragraph 32-2-4. Exits Required.
See Paragraph 32-1-2.
Paragraph 32-2-5. Exit Signs and Red Lights.
Every exit doorway leading from the exhibition room shall have R
over the same on the auditorium side, the word "EXIT" in letters not
less than 6 inches high, or an illuminated sign with letters of the same
height. Where illuminated signs are not provided, there shall be at
least one red light over each exit doorway. Lights used in marking
exits or lighting passageways, stairways or inclines leading from them
shall be controlled from the ticket office.
Paragraph 32-2-6. Aisles.
In all moving picture shows, or vaudeville theatres having two or
more aisles, each aisle shall not be less than 36 inches in width and the
seatings of such houses shall be so arranged that there shall be no seats
at a greater distance than eight seats from any aisle.
Paragraph 32-2-7. Seats.
See Paragraph 32-1-3. Under "THEATRES."
Paragraph 32-2-8. Permit.
No motion picture machine or device shall at any time be,operated
in any building or enclosure, nor shall the public be admitted to the
audience room in which such motion picture exhibit is to be given until
the installation of such machine or device and the arrangement of such
audience room and its accessories have been made to fully conform to
all the provisions and requirements of this ordinance, as herein specified,
nor until after approval by the Fire Chief and Building Commissioner
and the issuance of a permit for same.
Paragraph 32-2-9. Machine Booths.
Every motion picture machine or device must before being operated,
be installed in a room, compartment, booth or enclosure constructed
entirely of fire resistive material, which may include brick, tile, con-
crete, galvanized iron, hard asbestos, building lumber, or their equiva-
lent. All such rooms, compartments, booths or enclosures shall he con-
structed in complete conformity with the following conditions and speci-
fications.
Paragraph 32-2-10. Location.
The booth must not be placed directly over an aisle unless sup-
ported on fireproof supports and in all cases be securely anchored or
fastened so as to prevent dislodgment in case of panic.
Paragraph 32-2-11. Size.
Each room, compartment, booth or enclosure in which a motion
picture machine or device is installed, must be not less than 7 feet in
height, with area of floor space varying in accordance with the number
of machines or devices installed in such booths as follows:
One picture machine_.................... � 5 feet
One picture machine and one stereopticgn...............ax 8 feet
Two picture machines and one stereopticon...........6x12 feet
Paragraph 32-2-12. Construction and Arrangement of Booths.
Construction. If the room, compartment, booth or enclosure is con-
structed of galvanized iron, hard asbestos board, asbestos building lum-
ber or their equivalent, it must be constructed and equipped substan-
tially as follows:
CITY 1W.FOW WCATH �
Frame. To be made of at least lY4x1%x1A-inch angle or -tee irons,
as follows:
Four outside horizontal members at top and bottom.
Four corner uprights.
Intermediate uprights and intermediate members on roof, spaced
' at least every 2% feet.
Doors. Doorway to be 2 feet-wide but not more than 5 feet high
with angle iron framing.
Joints. All joints in frame to be made tight, with angle iron or
tee iron connection securely riveted or bolted, and approved by the
Building Commissioner.
Covering. Sides and top of booth, and main entrance door shall be
covered with hard asbestos boards or asbestos building lumber, of at
least 'A-inch thickness, or their equivalent, or with steel or galvanized
sheet iron of not less than Na 20 U. S. gauge. The asbestos or W4
equivalent shall be so cut and .arranged that vertical joints between
boards shall come over an angle or tee iron, to which it shall be securely
fastened by means of proper bolts and nuts, spaced not more than 6
inches apart. The sheet metal shall be so cut and arranged that joints
shall always come over a member, be overlapped and bolted or riveted
to such members. Bolts and rivets to be spaced not more than 3 inches
on centers.
Flooring. Floor shall consist of two parts, an upper and a lower
a floor. Lower floor may be wood, % inch minimum thickness, supported
on lower leg of horizontal angle irons. Resting on this floor shall be a
floor made of hard asbestos board, asbestos building lumber of % inch
minimum thickness, or an equally good non-combustible material. On
top of this floor can be laid cord carpet or rubber matting.
Openings. There shall be not more than three openings in the
booth for each machine, one for observation by the operator, one for
operation of the machine and one 8x8-inch opening for spot light.
Opening for machine shall be not more than 72 square inches.
Opening for operator shall be not more than A inches wide and
more than 12 inches high.
All such openings shall be provided with gravity doors constructed
of metal not less than 3J16-inch in thickness and when closed they shall
overlap the openings at least 2 inches on all sides and be arranged to
slide without binding in properly constructed grooves. Said doors shall
be held open normally by use of a fine combustible cord fastened to a
fusible link which melts at a temperature of 160 degrees Fahr., the
whole being so arranged that the doors may be easily released and closed
by hand. Doors on spring hinges may be substituted for gravity doors
and connected with fusible link,etc., same as specified for gravity doors.
Shelves. All shelves, furniture and fixtures within the booth shall
be constructed of incombustible material.
Paragraph 32-2-13. Ventilation of Booth.
Near the center of the top of the booth shall be a circular opening
of not less than 10-inch diameter, the upper side of said opening to be
provided with an iron flange, which flange is to be securely fastened
,r to the tee irons supporting the roof. Securely fastened on this flange
shall be a metallic vent pipe of not less than 10-inch diameter, said
pipe leading to the outside of the building or to an incombustible vent
flue; all parts of vent pipe to be at least 6 inches from any combustible
material.
162 BUILDING CODE
Paragraph 32-2-14. Brick, Tile or Concrete Booths.
If the room, compartment, booth or enclosure is constructed of a
brick, tile or concrete, it shall have walls not less than 4 inches in thick-
ness, except that if metal lath, studs and plastered walls are used, the
thickness need only be 2 inches. The general arrangement and ventila-
tion of booth and the protection of openings shall conform with the
requirements of Paragraphs 32-2-12 and 32-2-13.
' Paragraph 32-2-15. Lighting of Booth.
No artificial light shall be used in any room, compartment, or
booth in which a motion picture machine is installed except that pro-
duced by electricity.
Paragraph 32-2-16. Exposure of Films in Booth.
No two films shall be exposed in the booth at the same time other
than the one film in process of transfer to, or from the machine or
from the upper to the lower magazine, or in the process of rewinding.
A separate metal case made without solder shall be provided for each
film when the same is not in the magazine or in process of winding.
All films shall be kept in fireproof boxes.
w
Paragraph 32-2-17. Fire Extinguishers in Booth.
At least two standard hand chemical fire extinguishers shall be
provided, one inside the booth and located in an accessible place within
easy reach of the operator, the other located outside of the booth near
the door to same.
Paragraph 32-2-18. Smoking.
Neither smoking, nor use of matches shall be permitted in any
booth, room, compartment or enclosure where a motion picture machine
is installed.
Paragraph 32-2-19. Entrance Door.
The entrance door to the motion picture machine booth shall be
kept closed, but not locked, when an audience is in the building. Two
latches of steel must be provided, one to be placed 12 inches from the
top and the other to be placed 12 inches from bottom of door; latch bar
to be connected by metal rod so that one operation opens both latches.
Paragraph 32-2-20. Portable Booths.
Portable booths shall not be used in any theatre or public hall in
which a permanent booth has been or is installed, but shall be used only
for the temporary one-night exhibitions of motion pictures in places
of assemblage, such as halls belonging to commercial organizations,
churches, schools, etc., where it is deemed impracticable to install per-
manent booths made in accordance with the above specifications.
In constructing a portable booth the specifications for a perma-
nent booth shall be followed, with the exceptions given below:
(a) Intermediate uprights may be spaced every three feet.
(b) Special means for ventilation need not be provided except
that there shall be an opening for ventilation in the top of the booth;
this opening shall be 10 inches in diameter and a metal sleeve at least
18 inches in height, provided with a ventilating cap, shall be attached
thereto.
The booth may be made in a folding type, so constructed that when
assembled it will be rigid and all joints tight so that flames may not
pass through them.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 163
The base of booth shall have a flange extension outward on all four
sides with a sufficient number of holes through which booth may be
fastened to floor.
Paragraph 32-2-21. ' Moving Picture Machine.
s Fastening of Moving Picture Machine. The moving picture ma-
chine must be securely fastened to the floor to prevent accidental over-
turning or moving of same.
Feed Roll for Machine. The moving picture machines must be
equipped with a feed roll enclosed in metal magazine constructed of
No. 20 U. S. gauge metal, with a slot at the bottom only large enough
for film to pass out, and with cover so arranged that slot can be in-
stantly closed. No solder to be used in construction of this box. Door
on side shall be of metal and provided with spring hinges and latch,
which will keep door closed tightly.
Shutter for Machine. A shutter must be placed in front of the con-
denser, so arranged as to be automatically closed when film is stationary.
Are Lamp. The are lamp used'in a motion picture machine must
be substantially constructed and entirely of metal except where the use
s of approved insulating material is necessary and must be so designed
as to provide for proper ventilation and to prevent sparks being emitted
from lamp when same is in operation and mica must be used for frame
insulation. Self-closing doors must be provided on side and rear of
lamp enclosure and observation ports not larger than 2 inches may be
�► provided when closed with glass.
Paragraph 32-2-22. New Moving Picture Theatres.
Construction of Buildings. All buildings hereafter erected for the
purpose of moving picture theatres and any existing buildings recon-
structed for such purposes, shall be made to meet the requirements of
Section 6-2.
Exits. The front and rear exits shall open directly to street and
alley. Additional exits shall be provided for on each side of said build-
ing leading directly to open courts not less than 8 feet in width and said
courts shall open directly onto street or alley.
Section 32-3.
ASSEMBLY HALLS.
Paragraph 32-3-1. Definition.
The term "public assembly hall' shall include every parish hall,
lodge hall, dance hall, banquet hall, skating rink, hall use for exposi-
tion, exhibition or place of assemblage or instruction; provided that
rooms used for assemblage of less than 100 persons shall not be regarded
as public assembly halls.
Paragraph 32-3-2. Exits for Assembly Halls.
In all buildings or parts of buildings occupied for purpose of assem-
bly, other than theatres, the halls, doors, stairways, passageways and
all other exit facilities shall conform to the provisions of this code as
provided in Sections for "Theatres."
Paragraph 32-3-3. Seating Assembly Halls.
All seats shall be spaced as required for theatres. In computing
a the seating capacity of any room or building used for purposes of as-
164 BUILDING CODE
sembly in which the seats are not fixed, an allowance of d square feet
of floor area shall be made for each person and all space between the '
walls or partitions of such room or building shall be measured in this
computation.
Paragraph 32-34. Stage and Scenery, Assembly Halls.
Any assembly hall having a seating capacity of 300 persons or more
and containing a stage shall comply with the requirements for theatres
except that stages, the area of which do not exceed one-fifth the area
of the auditorium and having no transient scenery other than especially
approved by the Building Commissioner, may conform to the following
requirements:
The proscenium wail may be built as required for fireproof parti-
tions- All allowed openings in the proscenium wall, except the curtain
opening shall be protected by approved fire doors. The curtain in such
assembly halls may be of asbestos instead of the rigid theatre curtain,
and shall be hung on incombustible supports. All scenery, borders and
wings shall be rendered non-inflammable.
Section 32-4.
PUBLIC GARAGES AND SALES ROOMS.
Paragraph 32-4-1. Definition.
(a) Where any portion of a building is used for a "garage," the
"garage" shall be deemed to embrace all of the building not separated
from the garage proper by standard fire walls. All openings in such
walls shall be protected on both sides by standard fire doors, constantly
closed except when necessarily temporarily opened for passage.
(b) A "sales room" is a building or portion thereof wherein are
kept three or more autos or motor cars charged with or containing a
volatile, inflammable liquid for fuel or power.
Paragraph 32-4-2. Class of Construction.
Within Zones No. 1 and 2, no frame building shall be used as a
public or commercial garage, and no building exceeding two stories in
height shall be used as such garage unless it be of first-class construc-
tion. No basement or cellar shall be allowed under such garage unless
the floor on which automobiles containing volatile inflammable liquids
are stored, shall be of concrete or other suitable non-combustible mate-
rial. I
However, in Zones No. 1 and 2, buildings with masonry walls and
not over three stories in height, which have wood floors and which are
used as public garages at the time of the passage of this ordinance, may
still eontinue to be used for this purpose provided that a complete
automatic sprinkler system be installed in same.
Paragraph 32-4-3. Volatile Liquids Not to Be Drained to Sewers.
It shall be unlawful to use or attach any garage with the public
sewers where gasoline, oils or other inflammable liquids are stored unless
systems of mud, gasoline and oil basins are installed according to the
provisions of the City Plumbing Ordinance.
Paragraph 32-4-4. Stairways.
There shall be no openings through the floors except in buildings
of more than one story in height, in which stairways and elevator
shafts leading from the upper floors to the first floor may be permitted
if properly enclosed with walls of incombustible material and approved
ire doors.
CITY OF FoaT WORTH 165
Every such building more than one story high shall be provided
r with two stairways leading from the upper floors to the first floor or
ground, at least one of which must be placed on the outside,and be con-
structed of steel or concrete.
• Paragraph 32-4-5. Doors.
All doors in any such building unless otherwise provided for, shall
be constructed of incombustible material and shall open outward.
Paragraph 32-4-6. Windows and Other Openings.
All windows and openings other than doors of buildings hereafter
erected or reconstructed for the purpose of garages, shall have metal
.frames and sash with wire glass: and automatic closing devices as ap-
proved by the National Board of Fire Underwriters.
Paragraph 32-4-7. Doors and Windows in Sales Rooms.
Sales room in any building occupied as a garage, and which is
properly cut off from the garage portion with fire walls and approved
fire doors and windows and fireproof floors, may have wood doors and
windows without wire glass on street fronts, provided that such streets
are as much as forty feet wide.
Paragraph 32-4-8. Charging Apparatus.
Where electric charging apparatus is installed or placed in a public
a or commercial garage or sales room, all such apparatus except the wires
leading to the automobile to be charged shall be placed within a room
separated from the main garage by fireproof walls, which wall shall
not be inferior in fire-resisting qualities to reinforced concrete construc-
tion four inches in thickness; any openings from said room into the
main garage shall be protected by self-closing fire doors and door sills
shall be raised at least 8 inches above the floor level.
Paragraph 32-4-9. No smoking.
No person shall smoke in any garage. A notice in large letters
"NO SMOKING" shall be kept displayed in a conspicuous place and
manner on all floors and at the entrance of all garages.
Paragraph 32-4-10. Sand Required.
On the floor of every garage there shall be constantly kept and
maintained convenient receptacles filled with sand to be used in ab-
sorbing waste oils on the floor. In addition thereto, sand shall be kept
on every floor in buckets or boxes provided with hand scoops to be used
for fire extinguishing purposes only. There shall be one such box or
bucket for each 2,000 square feet of floor area or fraction thereof or in
lieu of such boxes or buckets, there may be maintained a cart on wheels
filled with sand, such cart to hold not less than 4 cubic feet of, sand.
Paragraph 32-4-11. Fire Extinguishers.
There shall be maintained at least two one-gallon chemical fire
extinguishers with Underwriters' label on same for each 2,000 square
feet of floor space or fraction thereof in all existing garages and sales
rooms.
+ Paragraph 32-4-12. Metal Waste Cans Required.
Self-closing approved metal cans set firmly on 4-inch legs shall be
kept on all floors of every existing garage and sales rooms into which.
all inflammable waste materials shall be deposited at all times when not
+ in use, and there shall be at least one such can for each 2,500 square feet
1B8 BUILDING CODY:
of floor area or fraction thereof and as many more as may be deemed
necessary by the Building Commissioner. The contents of all waste
taus shall be removed from the building daily.
Section 32-5.
PRIVATE GARAGES.
The location and type of construction of private garage shall be
approved by the Building Commissioner.
Section 32-6.
CARBIDE.
Calcium carbide shall be kept in air-tight containers of non-com-
bustible material, preferably galvanized iron of not less than 18 U. S.
gauge with bottom at least 6 inches above the floor, and having securely
fastened automatic closing covers. #
Section 32-7.
DRY CLEANING ESTABLISHMENTS. '
Paragraph 32-7-1. Definition.
Every person, firm or corporation keeping or using more than two
quarts of gasoline, naphtha, benzine, benzolene or other light petroleum
of coal tar products for the purpose of dry cleaning for profit or reward
shall be held and is hereby declared and defined to be operating a dry
cleaning establishment.
Paragraph 32-7-2. Certificate of Approval.
Application for a certificate of approval shall be made in writing
to the Building Commissioner and shall contain the name of the appli-
cant, if an individual, and the names of the principal officers, if a cor-
poration, as well as the location of the place at which it is desired or
intended to carry on such business, and a brief description of the place
of business of the applicant for which the certificate of approval is
desired.
A separate application shall be made for each dry cleaning estab-
lishment carried on or conducted by the applicant wherever located within
the City of Fort Worth. Every such application shall be approved by
the Chief of the Fire Department of the city before a certificate shall
be issued. If it shall appear from the application so filed and approved
that the premises in which the applicant proposes to carry on or con-
duct a dry cleaning establishment, conforms to the requirements of this
ordinance, then, upon the payment by the applicant to the Building
Commissioner of an inspection fee of'$15.00 paid annually in advance,
the Building Commissioner shall thereupon issue to such applicant a
certificate of approval authorizing such applicant to engage in or carry
on the business of dry cleaning in the place designated in the certificate
of approval and for the period therein stated.
Paragraph 32-7-3. Height and Construction of Building.
Every building or part of a building used or intended to be used
for the pwrpose of conducting or carrying on the business of dry clean-
• CITY OF FORT WORTH 167
ing, as defined in this ordinance, shall be either First-Class or Second-
Class "A" Construction without basement and not exceeding three
stories in height.
Paragraph 32-7-4. Fire Walls.
• Every such building or part of building shall be detached from all
other buildings or parts of buildings by fire walls with no openings to
the adjacent building or parts thereof, and shall not be occupied for
any purpose other than the conducting of dry cleaning and dry room
' plants.
Paragraph 32-7-5. Floors.
The floors shall be of impervious fireproof construction.
Paragraph 32-7-6. Height of First Floor Above Ground.
The first floor of such building shall be higher than the surface
of the ground surrounding such building, and shall be so laid that there
shall be no space beneath same.
Paragraph 32-7-7. Stairways.
There shall be no openings through the floors, except in buildings
of more than one story in height, in which stairways and elevators
leading from the upper floors to the first floor may be permitted if
properly enclosed with walls of incombustible material and approved
fire doors. Such stairways shall lead to the outside of the building
• without any doors or openings leading into the dry cleaning room.
Paragraph 32-7-8. Stairway to Two-Story Building.
Every such building more than one story high shall be provided
with at least two stairways leading from the upper floors to the first
floor or ground—at least one of which must be placed on the outside,
and be constructed of steel or concrete.
Paragraph 32-7-9. Doors.
All doors in any such building shall be constructed of incombustible
material and shall open outward.
Paragraph 32-7-10. Windows and Other Openings.
All windows, openings other than doors, of buildings hereafter
erected or reconstructed for the purpose of dry cleaning, shall have
metal frames and sash, with wire glass, and automatic closing devices,
and approved by the National Board of Fire Underwriters. However,
office and sales portion if cut off from the main portion of the building
by fire walls, approved fire doors and windows, and fireproof floors,
may have wood doors and windows without wire glass on street fronts
provided such streets are as much as 40 feet wide.
Paragraph 32-7-11. Location of Boiler Room.
Whenever steam power shall be used for the operation of any
machinery contained in any such dry cleaning establishment, the boiler
generating such power shall be located in a separate building so sit-
uated that the line of travel of gases between the boiler and the nearest
opening into the cleaning or drying room shall be not less than 25 feet,
provided, however, that such boiler may be located in the same building
s where said building was used for dry cleaning purposes, prior to the
passage of this code, if such boiler and electric motor are separated from
the dry cleaning or drying room by fire walls having no openings into
such dry cleaning or drying room except such openings as may be're-
quired for shafts in operating the machinery contained therein.
168 BurLDING MODE
Paragraph 32-7-12. Location of Electric Motor.
Whenever electric power is used, the electrical motor furnishing e
such power shall be similarly located.
Paragraph 32-7-13. Vents in Floor.
Walls shall have vent holes at the floor line not less than 16 inches
in area, not more than 6 feet apart, measured from center to center,
which vent holes shall be protected by such walls or by iron bars or
screens of large mesh on the outside of such walls.
Paragraph 32-7-14. Exhaust Fan and Its Location.
Such buildings shall be further ventilated by means of exhaust fans
of sufficient capacity to change the air in the building every three
minutes and shall be kept in operation at all times during the use of such
building. Such exhaust fan shall be located in an air-tight conduit,
whose inlet openings shall be at or near the floor level in the wall
farthest away from any other building or structure and the discharge
end of such conduit shall be carried over the roof of such building.
Paragraph 32-7-15. Fire Prevention Appliances.
{a) Steam Boiler.
Every such dry cleaning plant shall be equipped with high pressure
steam boiler of sufficient capacity to admit of flooding the dry clean-
ing and dry rooms with steam in case of fire.
(b) Steam Pipe Line.
Each room of such building shall be equipped with a 1'/4-inch sup-
ply, leading from such high pressure boiler and having downspouts at
least 2 feet in length, and not less than 10 feet apart distributed over
washers and extractors. The valves operating such lines of pipe shall
in every case be placed outside of such building.
(c) Tanks in Place of Steam Pipes.
Every such dry cleaning plant constructed and maintained prior
to the passage of this code, may, in place of such high pressure bailer
be equipped with a suitable and adequate tank or tanks containing car-
bon dioxide. At least one such tank containing not less than 180 cubic
feet of gas under pressure shall be provided for each 1000 cubic feet or'
fraction thereof of cubic contents of the room to be protected from fires.
The valve or valves operating such tank or tanks shall be located on the
outside of such 'building.
(d) Water Tank.
Every such establishment shall be provided with a tank not less
than 4 feet long, 2 feet wide and 3 feet deep, which shall be placed
near the entrance to the dry cleaning room, and shall be kept filled with
water.
Paragraph 32-7-16. Dry Cleaning Business Not Allowed in Dwelling
Houses or Sleeping Apartments.
It shall be unlawful for any person, firm or corporation to carry
on or conduct the business of dry cleaning as herein defined in any
dwelling house or in any building, any portion of which is used or in-
tended to be used as a sleeping apartment or dwelling place. No person
shall be permitted to sleep_ in any dry cleaning or dry rooms.
Paragraph 32-7-17. Amount of Volatile Substance Allowed in Dry
Cleaning Establishments to Be Stored for Cleaning Purposes.
No volatile substance in excess of 5 gallons shall be used for clean-
ing purposes, except in closed machines, and must be conveyed from
CITY OF FORT WORTH 169
the tanks to the machines in closed pipes, by means of suction pumps
properly controlled by valves.
It shall be unlawful to store or settle any of said substance in open
tanks.
Paragraph 32-7-18. Vent in Dry Room.
Dry room shall have an 8-inch vent opening into the atmosphere
for each 450 cubic feet of space or fraction thereof; said vent pipe shall
be carried up to a height of 2 feet above the roof of building and termi-
nate in an approved ventilator hood.
Paragraph 32-7-19. Inspections.
It shall be the duty of the Building Commissioner to reg}�larly in-
spect all dry cleaning establishments at least once each month.
Section 32-8.
TRANSFORMER VAULTS.
r No transformer vaults shall hereafter be built without a special ,
permit from the Building Commissioner and all transformer vaults built
hereafter shall meet with the requirements of the latest published
rulings of the National Board of Fire Underwriters.
i
Chapter 33.
STORAGE OF INFLAMMABLE LIQUIDS.
Section 33-1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
Paragraph 33-1-1. To What Applicable.
The provisions hereinafter set forth relative to the storage of in-
flammable liquids, shall apply to all new plants, stores, equipments
and installations, and except as otherwise specified, to existing plants,
stores, equipments, installations and other conditions which constitute
a distinct hazard to adjoining property, insofar as the extent of the
paragraphs can be reasonably fulfilled.
All persons and businesses not specifically named in this code,
storing, handling or using inflammable liquids, shall be governed by
this code, where it is applicable to that storing, handling or using.
Paragraph 33-1-2. Permit Required.
It shall be unlawful for any person, firm or corporation to estab-
lish any plant for storage of gasoline or other volatile and inflammable
liquids without first obtaining from the Building Commissioner a permit
to do so.
Paragraph 33-1-3. Volatile and Inflammable Liquids Defined.
By the term "volatile" and "inflammable" liquid is meant any liquid
which, when tested in the open air of any temperature below 100 de-
grees Fah. will give forth any inflammable vapor or gas.
Paragraph 33-1-4. Application for Permit to Establish Storlige Plant.
Each person, firm or corporation desiring to establish any plant for
storing gasoline or' other volatile and inflammable liquid or liquids,
shall file with the Building Commissioner an application for permit to
170 BUILDING CODE
do so, accompanied by a plat drawn to scale, and showing the location
of the premises to be used for such a storage plant, of each storage tank
installed, or to be installed thereon, and of all other structures thereon,
and the location and present use of each building within one hundred
feet of such premises.
The Building Commissioner shall investigate each such application '
and if satisfied that such proposed storage plant will be established in
conformity with this and all other ordinances of this city, he shall
grant such permit, subject to the further requirements hereof, but if he
be not so satisfied, he may refuse such permit'or withhold it until such
time as the applicant shall conform such application to the requirements
of this and the other ordinances of this city.
Paragraph 33-1-5. Inspection Fee.
No storage plant intended for storing gasoline or other volatile or
inflammable liquid or liquids, shall be installed except in compliance
with this ordinance and under permit issued by the Building Commis-
sioner, and upon payment of an inspection fee of $5.00.
Paragraph 33-1-6. Installation of Tanks.
All tanks installed under this ordinance shall be constructed and
provided with connections as herein prescribed. Such tanks above
ground shall be covered or otherwise adequately protected against the
action of the elements and danger of fire. Underground tanks shall
be at least 18 inches below the surface and entirely surrounded by at R
least 6 inches of concrete, clay or sand—the top to be below the level of
the lowest pipe line upon the storage premises. Underground tanks
beneath'any building shall be at least 3 feet below the basement or
cellar floor. No underground tank shall be nearer than 6 inches to any
other tank.
Paragraph 33-1-7. Location of Tanks.
Each tank installed above ground under this ordinance shall be
located at least 300 feet from any dwelling, school, church, theatre or
other place of public assembly, hospital, asylum or other charitable or
public institution, hotel or apartment.building.
Paragraph 33-1-8. Construction of Tanks.
All tanks installed under this ordinance and having a capacity of
not exceeding 500 gallons shall be made of at least 12 gauge galvanized
steel or black open hearth steel at least Y4-inch in thickness; tanks
exceeding such capacity and not exceeding Z000 gallons capacity shall
be made of at least 3/16-inch galvanized steel or 1/4-inch black open
hearth steel; all tanks exceeding 2000 gallons capacity shall•be in-
creased in thickness according to the recognized ratio for steel con-
struction.
All such tanks of galvanized steel shall be properly welded or
riveted and soldered, and tanks of black open hearth steel shall be prop-
erly welded or riveted and caulked. All such tanks shall be heavily
coated outside with tar or other rust-resisting material and shall be
properly vented.
Paragraph 33-1-9. Tank Connections.
All tanks installed under this ordinance and located within or be-
neath anu building shall be provided with a 1-inch galvanized vent pipe
connected with the top by a connection provided with a brass wire
screen of at least 30 mesh, and such vent pipe shall extend at least 4
feet above the roof of such building, terminating in 9 double goose
CITY OF FORT WORTH 171
neck spark protectop provided with a brass wire screen of at least 30
mesh.
All pump-filler pipe connections shall be galvanized and at least
2 inches in diameter, and properly protected throughout. Such pipes
shall connect with underground tanks only at the top and terminate in
a screw cap protected by a cast iron filler box flush with the sidewalk,or
alley or outside of wall of containing structure. Filler pipes connected
with tanks within or beneath any building shall extend to the outside of
such building and terminate in a screw cap. All such screw caps shall
be kept securely locked.
Section 33-2.
FUEL OIL STORAGE TANKS AND EQUIPMENT.
Paragraph 33-2-1. Permit.
No fuel oil storage tanks or equipment for burning of fuel oil shall
hereafter be installed without a special permit from the Building Com-
missioner, and all such tanks and equipment hereinafter installed shall
meet the requirements of the latest published rulings of the National
Board of Fire Underwriters.
Chapter 34.
FIRE PREVENTION.
Section 34-1.
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS.
Paragraph. 34-1-1. Rubbish.
Within the fire limits, it shall be unlawful for any person or per-
sons to allow rubbish to accumulate in any building or in streets or
alleys. Rubbish of an inflammable nature in cellars within the fire
limits, and in non-fireproof buildings shall be removed immediately upon
accumulation.
Paragraph 34-1-2. Rubbish and Debris in Buildings.
The Building Commissioner and Chief of the Fire Department or
their authorized assistants, will inspect all buildings for the purpose of
determining the general character of the premises with respect to the
disposition of debris, rubbish, or other waste and inflammable mate-
rial, and all means of access from one part of the building to another.
All parts of all buildings shall be kept free from combustible materials
not in actual use, and all materials shall be neatly arranged in a manner
to provide passageways or aisles for convenient movement and work of
firemen. All openings shall be kept free from obstructions at all times.
Paragraph 34-1-3. Ashes.
The storage of ashes any place within the city limits is hereby pro-
hibited, unless same are kept in an uncombustible receptacle.
Paragraph 34-1-4. Fire Extinguishers.
(a) Where required.
All hotels, theatres, garages, and other buildings where deemed
necessary by the Building Commissioner or Fire Chief shall be equipped
172 BUILDING'CODE
with approved fire extinguishers, Same shall be located where directed
by the Building Commissioner or Fire Chief.
(b) Number and size.
The number and size of fire extinguishers shall be determined by
the Building Commissioner or Fire Chief.
(c) Recharging. '
All fire extinguishers shall be recharged once each year. A tag
shall be attached to each extinguisher, stating the date of said re-
charging and by whom done. This tag shall be filled out by the parties
doing the recharging.
Paragraph 34-1-5. Gas Shut-Off.
(a) Where required.
All buildings both within and without the fire limits, which require
a gas line of 11h inches or larger.shall be equipped with gas shut-off
as hereinafter provided.
(b) Location.
Such gas shut-off shall be so constructed as to enable firemen to
shut off the supply of gas to any building from the outside thereof, and
shall be located on the outside of the building where designated by
the Building Commissioner. All such devices shall be approved by the
Fire Chief and the Building Commissioner.
(c) Construction.
The specifications of the Underwriters Laboratory shall be fol-
lowed in all shut-offs and they must be approved and labeled by this
body before being accepted by the Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 34-1-6. Scuttle Frames and Covers.
Hereafter all buildings of two stories or more in height shall have
a scuttle hole not less than 2 feet by 3 feet, built in the roof. Said scuttle
hole shall have a suitable cover of either metal or wood covered with
galvanized iron or tin, and shall be fastened on the inside by ;means
of hooks; however, in no case shall. same be fastened with a lock.
If roofs have dormers or other means of egress to such roof, then
scuttle is not necessary.
Paragraph 34-1-7. Pipe in Windows.
Hereafter the .placing of stove pipe or flues of any kind through
a window is absolutely prohibited.
Paragraph 34-1-8. Shaving Vaults.
Walls around shaving }pits or bins must be of solid masonry con-
struction, and if not more than 6 inches above ground, these .walls may
be 8 inches thick; otherwise they must be at least 12 inches thick, and
shall have a fireproof floor. This shall not apply to vaults having a
capacity of 1000 cubic feet or less.
Paragraph 34-1-9. Lights in Halls.
It shall be the duty of each lessee, manager or custodian of any
hotel, flat or apartment house to keep, during all hours of the night,
such numbers of lights burning in hails thereof as to make all public
parts of such hallways visible to persons of ordinary eyesight coming
into same.
9
Paragraph 34-1-10. Elevators at Night.
All elevators,either passenger of freight, shall be on the first floor
during the night, or when not in operation.
CITY QF YCW WORTH 173
Paragraph 34-1-IL Fireproof Receptacles for Inflammable Materials.
All existing buildings in Zone i and Zone 2 shall have a fireproof
receptacle with fireproof cover, in the basement for receiving all in-
flammable materials, such as excelsior, burlap, wrappings from goods,
eta.
Paragraph 34-1-12. Chimneys.
All chimneys in existing buildings shall be kept well pointed up
at all times in case the brick have fallen out or become loose, or the
chimney is poorly constructed so that same is dangerous, it shall be
torn down as far as necessary and be rebuilt, in proper manner.
Section 34-2.
STAND PIPES.
Paragraph 34-2-1. Stand Pipes for Fire Department Use.
1. In new buildings hereafter there shall be provided:
:, (a) For buildings in excess of four stories and not over 75 feet in
height, a stand pipe not less than 4 inches in diameter.
(b) For buildings over 75 feet and not over 100 feetlin height, a
stand pipe not less than 5 inches in diameter.
(c) For buildings over 100 feet in height, a stand pipe not less
than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Stand pipes shall be located within fireproof stairway en-
closures, provided that, where buildings do not have such enclosures,
the stand pipes shall be as near a stairway as possible, or a fire escape,
fire tower or outside exit stairway.
3. One stand pipe shall be provided for each separate fire area
exceeding 2,500 square feet area, with at least one stand pipe within 75
feet of every exterior wall in the building.
4. Where more than one stand pipe is required in a building they
shall be connected at their bases by pipes of size equal to that of the
largest stand pipe, so that water from any source will supply all the
stand pipes.
5. Stand pipes shall extend from cellar to and through the roof,
with a 1%-inch hose connection and 2%-inch gate valve not over 5 feet
above floor level in each story, including tellar, and two 1%-inch hose
connections, with gate valve for each, on the roof; roof connections to
have a controlling gate valve under the roof and arranged to be oper-
ated both from above and below the roof, with %-inch drain pipe and
valve to prevent freezing. The 2%-inch valves shall be provided with
fire department connections to which a reducer shall be attached, and
the hose shall be attached to the outlet of the reducer.
6. Where stand pipes are located inside of buildings, hose suf-
ficient to reach to all parts of the fire section, but not in excess of 100
feet, shall be attached to each outlet, with hose for roof hydrant either
in hose house on roof or on rack in the top story near roof scuttle.
Hose shall be not less than 1% inches in diameter and provided with
standard couplings, in use by fire department.
7. Hose to be 1%-inch approved linen in 50-foot lengths made
under specifications recommended by the National Board of Fire Un-
derwriters, dated 1917.
8. Each line of hose shall be provided with washers at both ends
and be fitted with smooth bore brass play pipe or nozzle at least 12
174 BITMMNG CODE
inches long, with a discharge outlet %-inch in diameter. One spanner
to be located at each hose connection.
9. Stand pipes shall be wrought iron or steel galvanized, and to-
gether with fittings and connections shall be of such strength as to
safely withstand at least 300 pounds water pressure to the square inch
when ready 'for service, without leaking at joints, valves or fittings,
such test to be made by the Chief of the Fire Department.
10. Stand pipes shall be connected to a Siamese steamer connec-
tion outside of the building by a pipe of diameter equal to that of the
largest stand pipe supplied. Such connection shall be made on each
street front, except that corder buildings having one street frontage of
less than 50 feet.may have only one connection. Siamese shall be about
1 foot above the curb level, and shall be provided with check valves
and' substantial caps to protect thread of the connection; the thread
shall be uniform with that used by the local fire department. A suit-
able iron plate with raised letters shall be provided, reading "To Stand
Pipe."
(b) Just inside of the building, in a horizontal section, shall be
placed a straightway check valve. A drip pipe, with valve to same,
shall be placed between said check valve and Siamese connection to
properly drain this section to prevent freezing. s
11. (a) Fire pumps, permanently connected to the stand pipe sys-
tem, shall be provided for buildings 10 stories or more in height, with
capacity as follows:
(b) One 4 or 5-inch stand pipe, pump capacity not less than 500
gallons a minute.
(c) One 6-inch stand pipe or two interconnected 5-inch stand
pipes, pump capacity not less than 750 gallons per minute.
(d) Two 6-inch stand pipes, pump capacity not less than 1,000
gallons a minute.
(e) Pump to have an adequate source of power and be supplied
from street main or from well or cistern containing at least one hour's
full supply; suction piping to be well installed.
(f) Exception: Where a building is equipped with a house pump
having a capacity of not less than 250 gallons per minute, or two house
pumps, which can be operated at once, with a capacity of 125 gallons
per minute each, the .fire pump will not be required.
Paragraph 34-2-2. Stand Pipes for Private Protection.
1. (a) In all new buildings 3 or 4 stories in height, except as given
below, there shall be provided a stand pipe not less than 2% inches in
diameter, with water supply constantly maintained or furnished auto-
matically with the opening of a hose valve; valves may be 1% inches.
(b) Exceptions: Buildings equipped with inside stand pipe for
fire department use and having an automatic water supply.
(c) Other buildings having maximum undivided fire section of.less
than 2,000 square feet area and provided with at least one 21/-.-gallon
.approved chemical extinguisher to each floor.
(d) Sprinkled buildings where the requirements of this section
are met-by connecting hose to sprinkler riser.
2. Supply shall be from one of the following sources: Q
(a) Street main, where pressure is sufficient to maintain not less
than 25 pounds at hose outlet in top story.
(b) Gravity tank of 2,500 gallons capacity, with bottom 25_feet
above outlet in top story. �.
CITY OF FART WORTH 175
(c) Pressure tank of 3,750 gallons capacity.
�► (d) Automatic pump of at least 150 gallons a minute capacity.
('e) Provided that if stand pipe is intended also for fire depart-
ment use, tank capacity shall be at least double that given above.
3. Where a stand pipe is connected to fire pump or provided with
Siamese connection, a straightway check valve shall be provided in
connection to tank, and tank filled by separate pipe; and where water
in such tank is also used for house supply, the house supply pipe shall
extend above the bottom of the tank to such a height as will reserve for
fire purposes not less than the quantities required in "2" of this'section.
4. (a) Stand pipes shall extend from cellar to roof, with a 1%-inch
hose connection and gate valve not over 5 feet above floor level in each
story, including cellar and roof.
(b) Hose sufficient to reach to all parts of the fire section, but not
in excess of 100 feet, shall be attached to each outlet; hose for roof out-
let may be placed in top floor near the scuttle leading to the roof. Hose
shall be 1% inches in diameter and provided with nozzle having %-inch
discharge outlet.
5. Stand pipes and hose shall comply with the requirements of
Section 34-2-1, except that 150 pounds test pressure will be required.
Section 34-3.
a SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS.
Paragraph 34-3-1. Sprinklers.
1. In all new buildings in Zone 1 and Zone 2 an approved auto-
matic sprinkler system so constructed as to protect every square foot
of floor area shall be provided as follows:
(a) In every cellar, basement or sub-basement, including spaces
under sidewalks, used for the manufacture, sale or storage of com-
bustible goods or merchandise.
(b) Exceptions: Type 1 and 2 buildings and office buildings not
otherwise provided for in this section and buildings housing public
utility plants which use or generate electricity.
(c) In calculating the area of basements of fireproof construc-
tion, parts divided by approved partitions with approved fire doors on
all horizontal and vertical openings, shall not be included, unless some
part exceeds the limits of area allowed.by this section.
(d) Throughout all buildings of Type 3 where the height exceeds
five stories, except that in office buildings such system shall be required
only in basements which exceed 1.000 square feet area and contain mer-
chandise, household or other combustible goods, or work shops.
(e) In basements and sub-basements of all buildings of Type 1
and 2 except dwellings, having an area in excess of 3,500 square feet,
and used for the storage of merchandise, household goods or work
shops.
(f) Over all heating furnaces or boilers in Type 1 and 2 buildings
unless in fireproof rooms or in rooms with incombustible ceilings, ex-
cept in dwellings. See "Sprinkler Requirements in Theatres."
2. Automatic sprinklers and accessory appliances and devices shall
be approved by the Bureau of Standards, Washington, D. C., or by the
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., of Chicago; or by the Associated Fac-
tory Mutual Laboratories of Boston.
176 Buimm CoDK
3. (a) Sprinkler heads shall be so placed as to thoroughly protect
all parts of the area in which they are installed, including spaces under f
stairs, inside elevator walls, in belt, cable, pipe, gear and pulley boxes,
inside small enclosures, such as drying and heating boxes, tender and
dry room enclosures, chutes, conveyor trunks and all cupboards and
closets unless they have tops entirely open and are so located that
the sprinklers can properly spray therein.
(b) Area per sprinkler where heads are installed under open
wood joist construction shall not exceed 80 square feet. Area per
sprinkler where heads are installed under fire resistive or mill ceil-
ings of beam and girder construction shall not exceed 90 square feet.
Area per sprinkler under smooth finished ceilings shall not exceed 100
square feet.
4. The size of riser serving any one floor of one fire area shall not
be less than the following, and the number of sprinklers on a given size
pipe on one floor of one fire area shall not exceed the following:
Maximum Number of
Size of Pipe Sprinklers Allowed
%-inch 1 Sprinkler
1 -inch ..................... 2 Sprinklers
11/4-inch ........................................................................ 3 Sprinklers
1%-inch ..................
.._------....
--..-..............
.,...................
5 Sprinklers
2 -inch .......».............................................................4. 10 Sprinklers
2%-inch ............. 20 Sprinklers
3 -inch ... .. ......................................................,....... 36 Sprinklers
3%-inch ............................................................_......— 55 Sprinklers
4 -inch ....................................................................... 80 Sprinklers
5 -inch ._. ... e.,........_.......,................ 140 Sprinklers
6 -inch ...._... ..„_..................,,._ 200 Sprinklers
5. Each system shall be provided with an outside screw, yoke gate
valve and check valve so located as to be readily accessible and to con-
trol all sources of water supply, except that from steamer connections.
Drain pipes shall,be provided, and the system so installed as to drain
all parts. 1
6. A city pipe system shall be used only when a wet pipe system
is impracticable, as in buildings which have no heating facilities.
7. Two independent water supplies shall be provided, at least one
of which shall be automatic. Except that a connection to street main
of public water works will be deemed sufficient if hydrant tests of
main capacity, with 500 gallons per minute flowing, indicates sufficient
residual underground pressure to give at least 12 pounds under the
roof. This requirement of now is the minimum for equipments having
200 heads or less in one floor, of one fire area; larger areas will require
additional flow in gallons per minute as follows: 201 to 400 heads,
75Q gallons per minute; 401 to 600 heads, 1,000 gallons per minute,
above 600 heads, 1,500 gallons per minute.
S: Pressure tanks, if used, shall have a total capacity of not less
than 4,500 gallons (3,000 gallons of water) and in any event the tank
or tanks shall contain sufficient water to supply 121,E per cent of the
greatest number of sprinklers within a fire area on any one floor for 20
minutes with an average discharge of 20 gallons per minute per
sprinkler. The tank shall be placed either on the roof or in the highest
sprinklered story.
9. (a) Gravity tanks, if used, shall contain an available quantity
of water sufficient to supply 25 per cent of the greatest number of
sprinklers in a fire area on any floor to which it gives protection for 20 _
M
CITY OF FORT WORTH 177
minutes with an average discharge per sprinkler of 20 gallons per
minute, but tank shall not be less than 5,000 gallons available capacity.
(b) Elevation of bottom of tank above the highest line of sprin-
klers below the main roof on the system which it supplies shall be not
less than 20 feet.
4 10. Fire pumps, if used 'shall be of not less than 500 p p , gallons ca-
pacity per minute and sufficient to supply 50 per cent of the number
of sprinklers within a fire area of any floor with an average discharge
per sprinkler of 20 gallons per minute. Pump to have adequate.source
of power and be supplied from street main or from well or cistern
containing 1 hour's supply far the number of sprinklers judged liable
to be open by fire at any one time; suction piping to be well installed.
11. The system shall be connected to a Siamese steamer connec-
tion outside of the building by'a pipe of diameter equal to that of the
largest stand pipe supplied. Such connection shall he made on each
street front, except that corner buildings having one street frontage of
less than 50 feet may have only one connection. Siamese shall be about
1 foot above the curb level, and shall be provided with check valves and
substantial caps to protect thread on the connection; the thread shall
be uniform with that used by the local department. A suitable iron
plate with raised letters shall be provided, reading: "To Basement
Sprinklers" or "To Cellar Sprinklers," where only these are installed,
or "To Automatic Sprinklers," where entire building is equipped.
12. Just inside of the building, in a horizontal section, shall be
• placed a straightway check valve. A drip pipe, with valve to same,
shall be placed between said check valve and Siamese connection to prop-
erly drain this section to prevent freezing.
13. Piping shall be wrought iron or steel, galvanized, and to-
gether with fittings and'connections, shall be of such strength as to
safely withstand at least 150 pounds water pressure to the square inch
for 1 hour when ready for service, without leaking at joints, valve or
fittings; such test to be made by the Commissioner of Fire Prevention.
14. The plans for all such sprinkler equipments shall meet the
approval of the Building Commissioner.
Chapter 35.
HEATING.
Section 35-i.
GENERAL CONDITIONS.
Paragraph 35-1-1. Permit and Fee.
Before commencing the installation or repair of any heating or
ventilating apparatus in any building or structure in the City of Fort
Worth, a permit therefor shall be obtained by the owner, or his agent,
from the Building Commissioner, and it shall be unlawful to commence
any such work unless a permit shall first have been obtained, and a
fee of$3.00 paid. No permit is necessary on work costing $100.00 or less,
provided such work does not conflict with any of the regulations herein
contained.
Paragraph 35-1-2. Certificate of Occupancy.
Upon satisfactory completion of all heating work in all buildings,the
heating contractor shall get a Certificate of Acceptance from the Build-
178 BUILDING CODE
ing Commissioner, and it shall be unlawful for any heating work to be
concealed until inspection has been made and same approved. T
Paragraph 35-1-3. Inspection of New Buildings.
The Contractor for the construction of any heating and ventilating
apparatus in a building shall notify the Building Commissioner when OR
the heating stacks or pipes are in and register boxes installed, and build-
ing is ready for lathing. Final inspection will be made at the time of
general final inspection of the entire building.
Paragraph 35-1-4. Inspection of Existing Buildings.
When the heating apparatus is being installed in an old building,
the heating contractor shall notify the Building Commissioner when heat-
ing stacks or pipes and register boxes are in, and when work is entirely
completed and ready for acceptance.
Paragraph 35-1-5. Hot Air Lines.
All pipes for the distribution of hot air shall be of metal or non-
combustible material, and when vertical pipes are enclosed in partitions
or any covering of combustible materials, pipes shall be covered with
asbestos paper of not less weight than 14 pounds per 100 square feet, or
with other approved material of equal non-conducting quality, and be
kept at least 2 inches away from all wood work or combustible material
unless such wood work be tinned, and then they shall be kept not less
than % inch away from such work or combustible materials.
Horizontal hot air pipes in basement shall be kept at least 6 inches
away from all wood work or combustible materials unless the same be
protected by metal shields or by plaster, and then they shall not be
nearer than 2 inches to such wood work or combustible materials, and
where such horizontal pipes are concealed or surrounded by wood work
or other combustible material in the same manner as is herein required
for vertical pipes.
All register boxes shall be separated from all wood work or com-
bustible material in a manner equal to that herein required for conceal-
ing hot air pipes.
Paragraph 35-1-6. Hot Air Pipes in Existing Buildings.
The above requirement will not be applicable to installations in ex-
isting buildings. Hot air pipes in existing buildings will, however, be re-
quired to be carefully covered with asbestos paper weighing not less than
26 pounds per 100 square feet or with other approved material of equal
non-conductive and non-combustible quality.
Paragraph 35-1-7. Register Over Brick Furnaces.
A register located over a brick furnace shall be supported by a brick
shaft built up from the cover of the hot air chamber; said shaft shall be
lined with a metal pipe and no wood work shall be within 2 inches of
the outer face of the shaft.
Paragraph 35-1-8. Allowance for Expansion and Contraction.
Steam or hot water heating or power systems shall be so designed
and installed that the expansion or contraction of any piping shall not
increase the tension, compression, shearing or twisting strain on any
fitting, radiator connection, or other part of such system beyond the
safe working stress of such part. V
Paragraph 35-1-9. Support of Radiators.
No radiator coil or other heating surface shall be supported on any
supply or return piping connection to same, but must be carried by the
floor, or in hangers rigidly fastened to wall, floor or ceiling. It
OW
CITY OF FORT WORTH 179
Paragraph 35-1-10. Floor Sleeves.
In all buildings hereafter erected, all steam and hot water heating
pipes passing vertically through floors and ceilings, or lathed and plas-
tered partitions shall be protected by a metal tube 1 inch larger in
diameter than the pipe.
c
Paragraph 35-1-11. Base for High Temperature Apparatus.
High pressure steam boilers,bakery ovens or furnaces in which fires
are maintained,producing a high degree of heat, shall rest on the ground,
a trimmer arch, or a fireproof floor.
Paragraph 35-1-12. Base for Low Temperature Apparatus.
Coffee roasters, fire heated candy kettles, laundry stoves, coal
ranges without legs, and similar appliances where hot fires are used,
shall rest upon fireproof foundations as described. However, the Build-
ing Commissioner's written permission may allow them to be placed
upon wooden floors if the floors are protected by metal sheet or on a
1/a-inch layer of asbestos building lumber, covered with not less than
4 inches of masonry set in cement mortar.
Such masonry shall consist of one course of 4-inch hollow terra
Gotta, or of 2 courses of brick or terra Gotta, at least one of which shall
be hollow and be laid to preserve a free circulation of air throughout
the whole course. Concrete may be substituted for a course of solid
brick if desired. The masonry work shall be covered by sheet metal of
+ not less than No.26 gauge, so arranged as not to obstruct the ventilating
passages beneath. Such hearths shall extend at least 12 inches on the
sides, back and front of the furnace, range or similar heating appli-
ances; if solid fuel is used, the front extension shall be at least 24
inches. Low pressure heating boilers shall rest upon fireproof founda-
tion.
Paragraph 35-1-13. Boilers and Furnaces.
Heating boilers shall be encased on sides and top by incombustible
protective covering not less than lea-inch thick and the overhead clear-
ance of such covered boilers and hot air furnaces shall be not less than
6 inches. Any wood work within 18 inches of the top of such boilers
or furnace, shall be protected by a loose fitting metal shield, but such
shields shall not be placed so as to form concealed spaces. All hot air
furnaces with flat tops shall be covered on top with at least 3 inches
of mineral wool, or its equivalent. All furnaces with conical tops shall
have the cone filled with mineral wool or its equivalent.
Paragraph 35-1-14. Stoves and Ranges—Distance From Wood.
No kitchen range or stove in any building shall be placed less than
6 inches from any wood work or wooden lath and plaster partition, un-
less the wood work or partition is properly protected by asbestos-covered
metal shields, in which case the distance shall be not less than 3 inches.
Metal shields shall be so arranged as to preserve an air space behind
them.
Paragraph 35-1-15. Protection of Walls, Furred With Wood.
No furnace, boiler, hot water heater, or other heating appliance
shall be placed nearer than one foot from any wood construction except
as otherwise provided.
Paragraph 35-1-16. Location of Gas Heaters.
Gas heaters shall be placed at least 12 inches from all unprotected
4 wood work.
190 BUILD MG CODE
Paragraph 35-1-17. Bake Ovens.
All bake ovens shall rest on noncombustible foundations or supports,
the sides and ends shall be at least 2 feet from any wood work and the
crown of arch at least 4 feet from ceilings having wood joists.
Paragraph 35-1-18. Core and Annealing Ovens.
All core and annealing ovens and any portable smelting furnaces
shall be set on non-combustible hearths not less than 6 inches thick with
an air space of not less than 5 inches between hearths and the bottom
of such furnaces. The construction of hearths and the protection of
surrounding wood work shall be as required in Paragraph 86-1-12.
Paragraph 35-1-19. Smoke Pipes.
No smoke pipe shall pass through any #soar, nor through a non-
fire-proof roof. Smoke pipes for large cooking ranges, hot air furnaces,'
low pressure steam or hot water boilers shall be not less than 18 inches
below any wood lath and piaster or other combustible ceiling, unless
at least the upper half of such smoke pipe is properly probected by 1
inch or more of asbestos covering or its equivalent, or by a metal casing
spaced 2 inches from the upper half of the pipe. If so protected, smoke
pipes shall be not less than 9 inches from any wood lath and plaster
construction.
Paragraph 35-1-20. Smoke Pipes Passing Through Partitions and Walls.
Where a smoke pipe passes through a wood lath and plaster or
other combustible partition or wall, a section of the partition or wall
shall be removed and the smoke pipe so placed that no part of it shall
be nearer than 2 inches to any remaining combustible part of the parti-
tions. The section of the partition or wall so removed shall be replaced
by approved fireproof material only, and an air space of at least 2 inches
shall be preserved on all sides of the smoke pipe.
Paragraph 35-1-21. Pipes in Wood Partitions.
No pipes conducting products of combustion shall be concealed in
any wood partitions.
Paragraph 35-1-22. Smoke Pipes Above Roof.
Every pipe conducting the products of combustion shall be con-
nected with a chimney or metal stack carried at least 3 feet above the
roof.
Paragraph 35-1-23. Gas Smoke Pipes Connected Into Chimneys.
No pipe conducting the products of combustion from any heater
burning gas as the fuel shall be connected into any other smoke pipe
used by other heating apparatus.
Paragraph 35-1-24. Standard Fireproof Heater Room Construction.
When fireproof apartments for the heating apparatus, the furnace
or boiler, including the breeching fuel room or firing space, shall be en-
closed in brick walls not less than 9 inches thick, or by monolithic con-
crete walls not less than 6 inches thick, the ceiling over same shall be
not less than the following:
Reinforced concrete slab 4 inches thick.
Brick arches 4 inches thick, covered with 1 inch of cement mortar
and supported by fireproof steel with the necessary tie rods.
Hollow tile arches 6 inches thick, covered with 2 inches of concrete
plaster on the under side, and supported by fireproof steel with the neces-
sary tie rods.
All openings into the apartments shall be covered by standard self-
closing fire doors.
CITY OF FORT WORTH ]81
Chapter 36.
VENTILATING.
Section 36-1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS.
Paragraph 36-1-1. Mechanical System of Exhaust Ventilation.
A "Mechanical' system of exhaust ventilation•consists of a fan
mechanically propelled which will remove air from rooms, apartments
or devices it is installed to serve.
Paragraph "-1-2. Gravity System of Exhaust Ventilation.
A "gravity"system of exhaust ventilation consists of vertical flues
connected to registers or openings in the rooms or apartments to be ven-
tilated. These vertical flues shall be carried up above the roof of the
building, having at the top an efficient cowl or ventilator, or shall vent
into attic space, whether or not the vertical flues have accelerating
roils or radiators.
Paragraph 36-1-3. Theatres, Assembly Halls, etc.
Every hail, auditorium or room of every building hereafter erected
er converted for use as a school house, theatre or place of public as-
sembly or entertainment, shall have in continuous operation while oc-
4' eupied, a system of ventilation so designed and installed as to provide
not less than 25 cubic fleet of outer air per minute, for each person
when occupied by fifty people or more, or when one-half of the -eating
capacity of room is utilized.
In addition to the above requirements, buildings of these types shall
meet all the requirements of state laws and other laws and ordinances.
Paragraph 36-1-4. Retail Department Stores.
Every building hereafter erected for or converted for use'as a
retail department store, shall have in operation while occupied a system
of ventilation, so designed and installed as to provide at least the fol-
lowing number of complete air changes per hour:
(a) Basements. Basements used for retailing merchandise or for
locker rooms, or such other rooms as are requited by ordinaree to be
ventilated, 4 changes per hour.
(b) Other Floors. Floors above basement, 3 changes per hour un-
less sufficient natural ventilation is provided and maintained while oc-
capied.
Paragraph 36-1-5. Restaurant Kitchens.
Every building or past thereof, hereafter erected for or converted
for use as a restaurant, lunch room or kitchen shall have in operation
while occupied a mechanical system of exhaust ventilation so designed
and installed as to exhaust the air in the entire kitchen at least four
tames per hour,if the kitchen and restaurant or lunch room are separate;
if not separate, four changes will be required for the entire restaurant
or lunch room and its kitchen.
Paragraph 36-1-6. Factories and Work Shops.
Every building, room or part thereof hereafter erected for or con-
verted for use as a factory or work shop, in which thdre shall be less
than 20 square feet of floor space for each employee or occupant, shall
have in operation while occupied, a mechanical system of ventilation so
7i designed and installed as to provide at least four complete air changes
182 BUILDING CODE
per hour. Every factory in which there are more than 20 square feet
of floor space for each employee or occupant, shall have in operation
while occupied, a system of ventilation so designed and installed as to
provide at least three complete air changes per hour.
If sufficient natural ventilation is provided, the mechanical sys-
tem is not necessary.
Paragraph 36-1-7. Hospitals, Detention Buildings, etc.
Every building hereafter erected for use as a hospital for housing
the sick, infirm, imbeciles or children, and also every jail, police station,
asylum, house of correction and detention, and also every home for the
aged and decrepit, where sleeping accommodations are provided, shall
be provided with a system of ventilation so designed and installed as
to provide not less than 4 changes of air per hour in the dormitories,cells,
blocks, wards, public sitting rooms, toilet rooms and any other room,
or parts of such buildings where the inmates may congregate as herein-
after provided.
Paragraph 36-1-8. Churches.
In every building hereafter erected for or converted for use as an
assembly room or church auditorium, where such auditorium has a seat-
ing capacity in excess of 300, or where the clear story height is less
than 15 feet, such building shall have in operation while occupied, a
mechanical system of ventilation so designed and installed as to pro-
vide not less than 4 complete air changes per hour unless sufficient
natural ventilation is provided.
If the seating capacity of any auditorium is 300 or less and if the F
clear story height is less than 15 feet, a modified system of ventilation,
which shall meet the approval of the Building Commissioner shall be
installed.
Paragraph 36-1-9. Carbon Dioxide Tests.
New Buildings. The amount of carbon dioxide in the air of any
building or part thereof, hereinbefore mentioned in this section shall not
be permitted to rise above 10 parts of carbon dioxide per 10,000 parts
of air.
Existing Buildings. The amount of carbon dioxide in the air of
any building or part thereof, erected prior to the passage of this
ordinance shall not be permitted to rise above 12 parts of carbon dioxide
per 10,000 parts of air.
General. Whenever tests of the ventilation of any building or part
thereof show that the percentage of carbon dioxide in the air is greater
than the maximum prescribed in this section, then the Building Commis-
sioner may require additional ventilation until the percentage of carbon
dioxide does not exceed the prescribed maximum, whether or not the
requirements of this section as to the air change of cubic feet per min-
ute for each occupant have been complied with.
Paragraph 36-1-10. Exceptions to Tests.
The above provisions and standards as to ventilation shall not ap-
ply to storage rooms and vaults,or to any place where the manufacturing
process therein conducted would be materially interfered with, or where
the manufacturing processes therein conducted would produce consider-
able quantities of free carbon dioxide except that the air in such rooms
or vaults or apy places of manufacture shall not be permitted to become
detrimental to the health or safety of those who enter or work therein.
Paragraph 36-1-11. Cellar or Basement Air Prohibited.
No part of the fresh air supplied in compliance with the require-
ments of this section shall be taken from any cellar or basement.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 183
Paragraph 36-1-12. Ample Air, Light and Floor Space.
No person, firm or corporation either as owner,p p , proprietor, lessee,
manager or superintendent of,any factory, mill, workshop or any other
building where one or more persons are employed, shall cause, permit,
or allow the factory or mill, work shop or other building to be over-
crowded or to have inadequate, faulty or insufficient light and ventila-
tion.
Paragraph 36-1-13. Exposure to Drafts, Fumes, etc., Prohibited.
No person shall be exposed to any direct draft from any air inlet.
All poisonous or noxious fumes or gasses arising from any process, and
all dust of a character injurious to the health of persons employed which
is created in the course of a manufacturing process within such factory,
mill, work shop or laundry, shall be removed by either mechanical ven-
tilation or exhaust devices.
Paragraph 36-1-14. Ventilation of Toilet Rooms and Fixtures.
Toilet room ventilation whether gravity or mechanical exhaust, shall
not be connected to any system ventilating other parts of a building, but
y shall be a separate and distinct system discharging above the roof of
the building unless the whole system is properly designed to.ventilate
such toilets in addition to the rest of the building.
Paragraph 36-1-15. Toilets Without Outside Windows.
d Toilets without sufficient windows in the external walls of the
building, shall be provided with a gravity or mechanical system of ex-
haust ventilation, so designed and installed that it will change the air
not less than four times per hour.
Paragraph.36-1-16. Local Venting.
All rooms or compartments containing latrines or urinals provided
with local vents shall be ventilated through the fixtures, and when such
ventilation does not provide four changes of air per hour, additional
ventilation shall be provided.
Paragraph 36-1-17. Required Window Area.
The required outside window,area referred to in this section shall
be not less than 3 square feet,with an additional window area of 1 square
foot for each fixture and such windows shall open directly on a street,
alley,yard or court. At least one-half of the required window area shall
be arranged to open.
Paragraph 36-1-18. Fresh Air Supply.
The fresh air supply for replacing exhaust air in both mechanical
and gravity systems, shall be adequate and shall be taken from outside
the building or from a source.approved by the Building Commissioner,
and no vitiated air shall be reheated.
Paragraph 36-1-19. Separate Vent Ducts.
No vent or flue shall serve more than 3 rooms, except where a
mechanical system is used, and where the connections between ducts or
flues are above the topmost or below the lowermost floor which the
1 system is intended to serve.
Paragraph 36-1-20. Fire Stops.
All fresh air onenings within 30 feet of any other building, struc-
ture, or lot line shall be provided with a fine mesh wire screen to prevent
sparks from entering.
1�4 B'uumftwG CODE
Chapter 37.
ELEVATORS.
Section 37-1. A
CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION OF ELEVATORS.
Paragraph 37-1-1. Definitions.
The term "Elevator," as used in this code, shall include all elevators,
escalators or lifts used for carrying passengers or freight.
The term, "Dumbwaiter," shall include such special form of elevator,
the dimensions of which do not exceed 6 square feet in horizontal section,
and 4 feet in height, and which is used for the conveyance of small pack-
ages and merchandise.
Any hand power elevator having a rise of more than 35 feet shall
comply with all the requirements of this section. No belt elevators
driven from a counter-shaft shall be installed for passenger service.
Paragraph 37-1-2. Permit and Inspection.
Before any elevator shall hereafter be installed or altered in any
building, the owner shall submit to the Building Commissioner an ap-
plication in triplicate, stating the construction and mode of operation
of such elevator to be installed or altered, accompanied by such glans
and drawings as may be necessary,and shall obtain his approval therefor. q.
Before any such elevator shall be put into service, the same shall .
have been duly tested and inspected by the Building Commissioner and
a certificate of inspection and approval obtained. In making any changes
or alterations to elevator shafts, rails, overhead machinery or power,
all the work changed, or altered shall be made to conform to these regu-
lations.
Paragraph 37-1-3. Capacity Notice.
The owner of any elevator now in operation and the manufacturer
of any such elevator hereafter placed in any building, shall cause to be
fastened in a conspicuous place in said elevator, a metal plate having
plain legible letters on same which shall designate the number of pounds
which said elevator shall be permitted to carry, but in no case shall a
carrying capacity of less than 100 pounds per square foot of platform
area inside the car be permitted on any passenger elevator.
Paragraph 37-1-4. Operator.
Every elevator, except full automatic push button elevators, shall be
in charge of a competent, reliable operator not less than 18 years of age,
who shall have had at least one week's experience in running an elevator
under the constant supervision of a person who has received a certificate
of competence as an elevator operator, excepting for hand power eleva-
tors and freight elevators not exceeding five stories lift and not exceeding
50 feet per minute car speed.
Paragraph 37-1-5. Elevator Shaft Doors.
Not more than one door opening in the elevator shaft shall be al-
lowed on each floor, and all openings in the several stories shall be one
above the other, except where the operating device of the elevator is so
placed that the operator can readily control all doors without leaving the
car control, in which case more than one door opening may be permitted
on a floor; provided,however,where more than one opening is used; such
opening shall be provided with a Sliding-door or gate inside the car, and
each door or gate shall be securely closed before the car is put in motion.
CITY OF FORT WORTH �$y�
Paragraph 37-1-6. Door Operation.
All elevators hereafter installed in vertical shafts shall be controlled
by some approved mechanical device that will automatically prevent the
car being moved until the shaft door or gate, at which the car is standing
is shut and securely fastened, and which will prevent the opening of any
shaft door or gate until the car has come to rest at the landing. All
such shaft doors shall be so arranged that they cannot be opened from
the outside except with a key.
Within six months after the adoption of this code,all elevator open-
ings in existing buildings shall he controlled by such mechanical device
as above described.
Paragraph 37-1-7. Counter-Weights.
All counter-weights shall have their section strongly bolted together.
There shall be not less than 3 feet clearance between the top of counter-
weights and the under side of overhead beams when the car is resting
on the bumpers. No continuous forged straps shall be permitted on
counter-weights.
Paragraph 37-1-8. Construction of Cars.
y Elevator cabs shall be constructed of incombustible material except
that flooring may be of hard wood. There shall be not more than 1%
inch space between the floor of the car and the floor 'saddles, and where
the saddles project into the shaft, the same shall be properly beveled on
y the under side.
Cabs for all elevators shall he properly lighted.
Paragraph 37-1-9. Guide Rails.
All guide rails for both car and counter-weights shall be of steel,
and shall be bolted to the sides of the shaft with steel or cast iron
brackets, so spaced that the guide rails will be rigid. The splices in the
rails shall be located as near such rigid supports as possible.
Paragraph 37-1-10. Freight Compartments.
No passenger elevator shall be permitted to have a freight compart-
ment attached to it in any manner.
Paragraph 37-1-11. Slab or Grating.
Immediately. under the sheaves at the top of every elevator shaft
in any building, there shall be provided a concrete slab or substantial
grating of steel having not more than 1 inch space between the members
of said grating, and of such construction as shall be approved by.the
Building Commissioner.
Paragraph 37-1-12. Clearing Space at Ends of Shaft.
A clear space of not less than 3 feet shall be provi&d between the
bottom of the shaft and the lowest point of the under side of the car
floor when the car is at its lowest landing; and between the top of the
crosshead of the car and the under side of the overhead grating when
the car is at its top landing; except that this latter space shall be not
less than 6 feet for elevators having a speed in excess of 350 feet per
minute, and may be reduced to 2 feet for elevators having a total rise
not exceeding 30 feet, and a speed not exceeding 100 feet per minute.
i Paragraph 37-1-13. Machinery Enclosures.
All parts of the elevator machinery shall be enclosed by suitable
partitions of incombustible materials, and such enclosures shall be
lighted. Free and safe access shall be provided to all parts of elevator
= machinery.
186 BUILDING ',ODE
Paragraph 37-1-14. Buffer Springs.
At the tpp and bottom of all elevator shafts there shall be placed +
substantial buffer springs for car and counter-weights.
Paragraph 37-1-15. MachiAery Supports.
The carrying beams and other supports for all machinery shall be
of steel designed for double the live loads to be supported.
Paragraph 37-1-16. Trap Doors.
Every passenger elevator shall have a trap door in the top of the
car of such size as to afford easy egress for passengers, or where two
cars are in the same shaft, such means of egress may be provided in
the side of each car.
Paragraph 37-1-17. Periodical Inspection.
The Building Commissioner shall cause an inspection of elevators
carrying passengers or employees to be made at least once every three
months and shall require any necessary repairs to be made promptly
by the owner. If the Building Commissioner at any time considers an
.elevator to be unsafe, he may require its operation to cease until such
repairs or alterations have been made as will in his judgment produce �F
safety. In lieu of such inspection by his own department, the Building
Commissioner may accept the report of inspections made by other
reliable and properly constituted authorities which in his judgment are
competent and satisfactory.
Paragraph 37-1-18. Availability of Elevators.
In every building exceeding 100 feet in height, at least one pas-
senger elevator shall be kept in readiness for immediate use by the
Fire Department during all hours of the night and day, including holi-
days and Sundays.
Paragraph 37-1-19. Safety Devices.
It shall be unlawful to use any elevator that is not provided with
safety devices for bringing the elevator car to rest without serious in-
jury to passengers or operators, whenever it may for any reason exceed
its rated speed by more than 40 per cent or reach a speed of.850 feet
per minute. Safety devices are not required upon plunger type of ele-
vators, nor upon sidewalk elevators which travel less than 30 feet.
Paragraph 37-1-20. Freight Elevator Gates.
All freight elevators must be equipped at each landing with self-
closing gates not less than five feet six inches in height, except at top
landing where gates must be not less than three feet six inches in height.
The openings between the slats or bars on gates must be not more
than three inches except on side where operating cable is located when
the opening may be made sufficiently large to allow for the operation
of the cable.
On hand power elevators where it is necessary in order to operate
the car, the gate may be made not less than three feet six inches in
height and placed not less than two inches from the car providing tell-
tale chains are attached to the car. Gates swinging on vertical axles
will not be permitted.
Paragraph 37-1-21. Safety Operating Stops. F
All freight elevators shall be provided with a safety device, by
which persons using the elevator at one floor can lock the operating
cable or other operating device to prevent the moving of the elevator
by persons on another floor during loading and unloading.
CITY OF FORT WORTH 187
Paragraph 37-1-22. Other Regulations.
h The Building Commissioner shall issue and enforce such other
regulations regarding the construction, erection, operation or repair of
elevators as he may consider necessary to insure safety.
Paragraph 37-1-23. Inspection Fee.
Wherever the owner of any elevator does not furnish the Building
Commissioner a satisfactory inspection report by some recognized au-
thority every three months, an inspection fee of $1.00 for each elevator
shall be paid by the owner to the Building Commissioner for this
inspection.
Chapter 38.
DATE CODE MADE EFFECTIVE.
Section 38-1.
Paragraph 38-1-1. Date Code Made Effective.
i' This Building Code ordained by the City Council of the City of Fort
Worth on February 28, 1928, shall be effective on and after April 1,
1928. All buildings or structures for which applications for permits are
made on and after April 1, 1928, shall be subject to the provisions and
regulations of this Code except that the Building Commissioner may
allow reasonable variance from the Code in the construction of struc-
tures for which the final plans were completed prior to March 1, 1928.
All permits issued prior to April 1, 1928, shall be considered cancelled
unless the construction allowed under said permit is actually begun on
or before April 1, 1928.
� U.L1111-1.L10 <� Z
o001aD000aao � _°
OZ ►o3-m o
Ell� 02
o QOW�,
Q
u'nn h O ID W u
�-<W
u.W u e
o
L Q
oo: � '' DO
0
oaao Boo❑�� o000 °
boo
TOOO 10
'd9.1 10❑
Fl° o oa DDDDDOO 0T�
ooDaD
OOEJ
pp °� ❑ o i-- ------ - = - yn 4
O O a
N 0
\ t 6
sy E E
JJ
Z
Dui
J
s
L.
t L
W D0 ;0
Z �
Y
a , �
.nu I
I �
+ ❑ 0 0—1
x-DER